Exodus

Exodus front

Introduction to Exodus

Part 1: General Introduction

Outline of Exodus

1. Israel in Egypt; preparing to depart from slavery (1–12)
   • First genealogy (1:1–6)
   • Israel as slaves in Egypt (1:7–22)
   • Moses’ history to the time of the Exodus (2:1–4:26)
   • Israel suffers in Egypt (4:27–6:13)
   • Second genealogy (6:14–27)
   • Moses and Aaron go to Pharaoh (6:28–7:25)
   • The plagues (8:1–11:10)
2. Instructions for celebrating the Passover (12:1–30)
3. From Egypt to Mount Sinai (12:31–18:27)
   • The Passover; preparing to leave Egypt; leaving Egypt (12:31–50, 13:1–22)
   • Journey from Egypt to Mount Sinai (14:1–18:27)
4. Mount Sinai and the Law (19-40)
   • Preparing for the covenant (19:1–25)
   • The Ten Commandments (20:1–17)
   • The covenant described (20:18–23:33)
   • The people agree to the covenant; Moses returns to Mount Sinai (24:1–18)
   • Design of the Dwelling and its furnishings; what was required of those who serve in it; dwelling functions (25:1–31:18)
   • The golden calf; Moses prays for the people (32:1–33:22)
   • The covenant described again (34:1–35)
   • Making of the ark and its furnishings (35:1–38:31) and priestly garments (39:1–43, 40:1–33)
   • The cloud (40:34–38)

What is the book of Exodus about?

Exodus continues the story of the previous book, Genesis. The first half of Exodus is about how Yahweh made Abraham’s descendants into a nation. This nation, which would be called “Israel,” was meant to belong to Yahweh and worship him. The second half of Exodus describes how God gave the Israelites his law through Moses. The law of Moses told the Israelites how to obey and worship Yahweh properly.

The book of Exodus tells how the Israelites were to build the Dwelling. The Dwelling was a tent where Yahweh would be among his people. The Israelites worshiped and sacrificed animals to Yahweh at the Dwelling. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God and tabernacle)

How should the title of this book be translated?

“Exodus” means “exit” or “departure.” Translators may translate this title in a way that can communicate its subject clearly, for example, “About the Israelites Leaving Egypt” or “How the Israelites Left the Land of Egypt.” (See: How to Translate Names)

Who wrote the book of Exodus?

The writers of both the Old and New Testaments present Moses as being very involved with writing the book of Exodus. Since ancient times, both Jews and Christians have thought that Moses wrote Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy.

Why did Moses write so much about God delivering or rescuing the people of Israel?

Moses wrote much about God rescuing his people from the Egyptians to show that Yahweh is very powerful. Egypt was a very powerful nation in the region at that time, but Yahweh was still able to free the Israelites from the Egyptians. Also, by rescuing the Israelites, Yahweh showed that he had chosen them as his people and that they should worship him.

How does the book of Exodus show the fulfillment of the promises given to Abraham?

The book of Exodus shows God beginning to fulfill his promise to Abraham. In Genesis, God promised Abraham that he would have many descendants and that they would become a large nation. When God rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians, he took them to Mount Sinai. There he made a covenant with them, and they became the nation that belonged to Yahweh.

Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

What was the Jewish Passover?

The Jewish Passover was a religious festival. Yahweh commanded the Israelites to celebrate it every year. Passover was a time to remember how God rescued Israel from the Egyptians. The first Passover meal was eaten in the evening just before they left Egypt. (See: Passover)

What was the law of Moses to the people of Israel?

The law of Moses instructed the people of Israel about what Yahweh required them to do as his people. In the law, God told the people how they should live so that they would honor him. He also instructed them about their need to offer animal sacrifices. God required these sacrifices so that he could forgive their sins and continue living among them. The law also described the duties of the priests and told how to build the Dwelling.

What did it mean that Israel was to be a “kingdom of priests and a holy nation” (19:6 ULT)?

Israel was a holy nation because Yahweh separated them from all other nations to belong to him. They were to honor and worship him only. This made them different from all the other nations of the world; the other nations worshiped many false gods.

Part 3: Important Translation Issues

Thus says Yahweh

This phrase is used many times in the Old Testament to introduce Yahweh’s speech. Your team should pick a standard translation. See 4:intro for more.

Pharaoh’s stubborn heart

Between chapters 4 and 14, there are 18 cases where Pharaoh’s heart is described as strong (11x), heavy (6x), or hard (1x), and one case where the Egyptians’ hearts are described as strong. These are metaphors for being stubborn, that is, being unwilling to obey Yahweh or even to do what is clearly in his own and Egypt’s best interest. Many cultures have similar metaphors, but not all will use the same body part. Within these cases, six times there is a neutral description that Pharaoh was stubborn, without saying anyone made him so (7:13, 7:14, 7:22, 8:19, 9:7, 9:35); three times Pharaoh makes himself stubborn (8:15, 8:32, 9:34); and ten times Yahweh makes Pharaoh/the Egyptians stubborn (4:21, 7:3, 9:12, 10:1, 10:20, 10:27, 11:10, 14:4, 14:8, 14:17).

Why are the details of the construction of the Dwelling in Exodus 25–32 repeated in Exodus 35–40?

In Exodus 25–32, God describes exactly how the Dwelling was to be built. The details were repeated in Exodus 35–40 in the description of the actual construction. This showed that the people were careful to do exactly as God commanded.

Are the events in the order that they actually happened?

Most, but not all, of the events in the book of Exodus are told in the order that they actually happened. Translators may need to make it clear when the events are in an unusual order.

What does it mean that God “lived” among his people?

The book of Exodus presents God as living in the Dwelling among the nation of Israel. God is everywhere, but he lived among the Israelites in a special way. God dwelled with the Israelites because they belonged to him. He promised to lead them and bless them. In return, the people were to worship him and honor him.

Exodus 1

Exodus 01 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

This chapter is intended to form a smooth transition from the last chapter of the book of Genesis.

• v. 1-7: Jacob’s family grows
• v. 8-22: Pharaoh oppresses the Israelites and tries to limit the Israelites’ growth

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Israel’s growth

Israel grew in number. This was the beginning of God’s fulfilling his promises to Abraham. It also caused the Pharaoh to worry that there would be more Israelites than Egyptians, with the result that the Egyptians would be unable to defend themselves against so many people. Pharaoh tried to kill all of the male babies so they would not become soldiers who fought against him. (See: fulfill, fulfilled, carried out and covenant)

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

• “All of the descendants of Jacob were 70 in number” This number included both Jacob’s children and grandchildren. It may cause confusion, but it is important to remember Jacob only had 12 sons.
• Starting from verse 7, the terms Hebrews and sons of Israel both refer to the Israelite nation or people group.
• God blesses the Hebrew midwives for lying to the wicked Pharaoh. Translators should not attempt to hide this. They showed that they feared God by disobeying a wicked order in order to preserve the lives of God’s people. They “acted wisely toward him” (or shrewdly, see 1:10) by lying to foil Pharaoh.
• Pharaoh is a specifically Egyptian word for their kings (and queens).

Exodus 1:1

Verses 1–7 are background information for the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

הַ⁠בָּאִ֖ים…בָּֽאוּ

The words translated as came in could also be translated as “went in.” Use whichever form is most natural in your language. (See: Go and Come)

יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל…יַעֲקֹ֔ב

Jacob and Israel are two names for the same man. (See: How to Translate Names)

וּ⁠בֵית֖⁠וֹ

Here, house refers to all of the people who live together, usually a large family with servants. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and his household” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 1:5

וַֽ⁠יְהִ֗י כָּל־נֶ֛פֶשׁ יֹצְאֵ֥י יֶֽרֶךְ־יַעֲקֹ֖ב שִׁבְעִ֣ים נָ֑פֶשׁ

Here, lives refers to people (specifically, men); going out of the loins of Jacob is a reference to these people as being in his seed or semen and produced through his sexual acts–therefore meaning they are his descendants. See also Hebrews 7:9-10. Alternate translation: “And all the male descendants of Jacob numbered 70.” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 1:6

וַ⁠יָּ֤מָת

They did not die immediately. Jacob and his sons spent the rest of their lives in Egypt and died there. If necessary, use a transition word that conveys that some time passed. (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

וְ⁠כָל־אֶחָ֔י⁠ו

All his brothers includes ten older brothers and one younger brother. If your language has different words for those, you can say, “his ten older brothers and his younger brother” (See: Kinship)

Exodus 1:7

וּ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל

This is the first of many times in this book that sons of Israel refers to the Israelite nation or people. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the people of Israel” or “And the Israelites” (See: Metonymy)

פָּר֧וּ וַֽ⁠יִּשְׁרְצ֛וּ וַ⁠יִּרְבּ֥וּ וַ⁠יַּֽעַצְמ֖וּ

All of these verbs mean similar things; they are used together to emphasize that the Israelites became very numerous. If your language doesn’t have as many words that mean the same thing, you can use fewer words and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “had many children and became strong” (See: Doublet)

פָּר֧וּ…וַ⁠יִּרְבּ֥וּ…וַ⁠תִּמָּלֵ֥א הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ

Compare your translation of fruitful … and multiplied … and the land was filled here to Genesis 1:28, 9:1, 9:7, and especially Genesis 35:11 where God renamed Jacob to be called Israel.

פָּר֧וּ וַֽ⁠יִּשְׁרְצ֛וּ

The birth of children to the Israelites is spoken of as if they were plants that were producing fruit and causing new plants to grow around them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “had many children” or “gave birth to many children” (See: Metaphor)

בִּ⁠מְאֹ֣ד מְאֹ֑ד

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun greatness in another way. Alternate translation: “and were very great” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וַ⁠תִּמָּלֵ֥א הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ אֹתָֽ⁠ם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language Alternate translation: “and they filled the land” (See: Active or Passive)

בִּ⁠מְאֹ֣ד מְאֹ֑ד

Here the same word is used twice to emphasize how many the Israelite people had become. If your language does not repeat words like this, express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “with much power” (See: Idiom)

אֹתָֽ⁠ם

Here, them refers to the Israelites. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 1:8

וַ⁠יָּ֥קָם

This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ

The story begins with the new king. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character.(See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

וַ⁠יָּ֥קָם מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ עַל־מִצְרָ֑יִם

Here, Egypt refers to the place and the people of Egypt. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And a new king began to rule over the Egyptians and the country of Egypt” (See: Metonymy)

לֹֽא־יָדַ֖ע אֶת־יוֹסֵֽף

Here, Joseph refers to both the person Joseph and to all of the good things that he did for Egypt. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 1:9

הִנֵּ֗ה

Behold draws special attention to what is about to be said. Use a way of drawing people’s attention that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Listen” (See: Exclamations)

עַמּ֑⁠וֹ

The people whom the king rules over and who are also part of his group (probably shared ethnicity, tribe, or clan) rather than the Israelite group are spoken of as if they belonged to the king. This is an instance of the possessive of social relationship. (See: Possession)

עַמּ֑⁠וֹ

There is some ambiguity as to whom exactly Pharaoh was addressing. It could have been: (1) the people who lived in Egypt, the Egyptians or (2) some group of “his people” like his advisors, generals, nobles, or friends and family. Even if option 1 is meant, it is quite possible that he actually spoke to some smaller group of representatives, as in option 2.

מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ

Use a way that is natural in your language to compare non-specific sizes of groups of people. Alternate translation: “and much greater than us”

הִנֵּ֗ה

Beginning from behold and extending to the end of verse 10 is a direct quotation of what the king said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes. (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 1:10

נִֽתְחַכְּמָ֖ה…שֹׂ֣נְאֵ֔י⁠נוּ…בָּ֖⁠נוּ

The word us is inclusive and refers to the king and his people, the Egyptians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ל֑⁠וֹ…יִרְבֶּ֗ה…וְ⁠נוֹסַ֤ף…הוּא֙…וְ⁠נִלְחַם…וְ⁠עָלָ֥ה

Here, him, he, and himself refer to the Israelite people. The pronouns agree grammatically with the singular “people” in the original. This occurs in many places in Exodus. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the plural, as in the UST. (See: Collective Nouns)

פֶּן־יִרְבֶּ֗ה וְ⁠הָיָ֞ה כִּֽי־תִקְרֶ֤אנָה מִלְחָמָה֙

The king suggests a combination of two hypothetical events: 1. There are even more Israelites, 2. There is a battle. These are followed by a series of undesirable consequences: 3. The Israelites join an enemy, 4. The Israelites attack the Egyptians, 5. The Israelites leave Egypt. While the series of consequences is also technically hypothetical, the king’s language indicates that if 1-2 happen, then 3-5 are certain. Use language that makes it clear that the first two events are hypothetical and that the next three are consequences that could be expected if the first two events happen. (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

וְ⁠עָלָ֥ה מִן־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ

Alternate translation: “and he leaves Egypt”

Exodus 1:11

שָׂרֵ֣י

Overseers were Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work.

מִסִּ֔ים

Here the plural means groups. Alternative translation: “work crews”

לְמַ֥עַן עַנֹּת֖⁠וֹ בְּ⁠סִבְלֹתָ֑⁠ם

Alternate translation: “to force the Israelites to do hard work for the Egyptians”

עָרֵ֤י מִסְכְּנוֹת֙

These were places where the leaders put away food and other important things to keep them safe. Alternative translation: “cities in which to put away things to keep them safe”

עָרֵ֤י מִסְכְּנוֹת֙

The possessive is objective; storage of goods is what occurs in the cities. Alternate translation: “cities for storing things”(See: Possession)

Exodus 1:12

וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁר֙ יְעַנּ֣וּ אֹת֔⁠וֹ כֵּ֥ן יִרְבֶּ֖ה וְ⁠כֵ֣ן יִפְרֹ֑ץ

This sentence expresses a result that is the opposite of what the king expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

וַ⁠יָּקֻ֕צוּ מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun dread in another way. Alternate translation: “And they were very afraid of the face of” (See: Abstract Nouns)

מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל

Here, face figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that the Egyptians were afraid of the Israelites’ existence in their country. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “of the growing Israelite population” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 1:13

וַ⁠יַּעֲבִ֧דוּ מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ

Here, rigor is a noun used to modify the verb enslaved. Rigor could refer either to how hard the work was or how unkindly the Egyptians treated the Israelites. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “And the Egyptians made the sons of Israel work very hard” or “And harshly, the Egyptians made the sons of Israel work” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 1:14

וַ⁠יְמָרְר֨וּ אֶת־חַיֵּי⁠הֶ֜ם

The difficult lives of the Israelites are spoken of as if their daily lives were bitter food that was difficult to eat. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And they made their lives very difficult” (See: Metaphor)

בַּ⁠עֲבֹדָ֣ה קָשָׁ֗ה

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind slavery in another way. Alternative translation: “by making them work hard as slaves” (See: Abstract Nouns)

בְּ⁠חֹ֨מֶר֙

Mortar is a mixture of lime with cement, sand, and water, used in building to bond bricks or stones. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וּ⁠בִ⁠לְבֵנִ֔ים

Bricks are blocks made of clay or mud with straw in them. They are hardened in the sun or in another manner before they are used for building.(See: Translate Unknowns)

אֵ֚ת כָּל־עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔⁠ם אֲשֶׁר־עָבְד֥וּ בָ⁠הֶ֖ם בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ׃

See how you translated this in verse 13. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians made them work very hard” or “the Egyptians forced them to work very hard”

וַ⁠יְמָרְר֨וּ…בָ⁠הֶ֖ם

Here, they and them refer to the Egyptians. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

חַיֵּי⁠הֶ֜ם…עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔⁠ם…עָבְד֥וּ

Here, their and they refer to the Israelites. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ

See how you translated rigor in the previous verse. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 1:15

This sentence introduces a new event in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֖ת

Midwives were women who helped a pregnant woman give birth to a baby.

שִׁפְרָ֔ה…פּוּעָֽה

Shiphrah and Puah are women’s names. (See: How to Translate Names)

שִׁפְרָ֔ה…פּוּעָֽה

The midwives are introduced here as new participants in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Exodus 1:16

וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר

In the UST, the phrase and the king said, is combined with “spoke” from verse 15 (ULT) because the verb for “say” is used twice before he speaks. Having two speech verbs may be strange in some languages. If it would be unnatural to say that the king spoke or said words twice, you may leave one off.

בְּ⁠יַלֶּדְ⁠כֶן֙…וּ⁠רְאִיתֶ֖ן…וַ⁠הֲמִתֶּ֣ן

The king is speaking to the two midwives, so the form of you is plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

עַל־הָ⁠אָבְנָ֑יִם

Women sat on this short stool as they gave birth. Therefore, it was associated with birth. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the birthing process” (See: Metonymy)

אִם־בֵּ֥ן הוּא֙ וַ⁠הֲמִתֶּ֣ן אֹת֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠אִם־בַּ֥ת הִ֖יא וָ⁠חָֽיָה

These two statements are hypothetical conditions (starting at if) with instructions for what the midwives should do in each situation (starting at then). Use a natural form in your language for hypothetical situations connected to instructions. (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

Exodus 1:17

וַ⁠תִּירֶ֤אןָ

But introduces a contrast to what was expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

Exodus 1:18

לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֔ת

Women whose work is to help other woman give birth to a baby are called midwives. See how you translated this in Exodus 1:15.

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר לָ⁠הֶ֔ן מַדּ֥וּעַ עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ן הַ⁠דָּבָ֣ר הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה וַ⁠תְּחַיֶּ֖יןָ אֶת־הַ⁠יְלָדִֽים

If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate this quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and he asked them why they were letting the sons live.” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

מַדּ֥וּעַ עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ן הַ⁠דָּבָ֣ר הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה וַ⁠תְּחַיֶּ֖יןָ אֶת־הַ⁠יְלָדִֽים

Alternate translation: “Why have you not killed the baby boys?”

עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ן

This you is plural. The king is speaking to the two midwives. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 1:19

כִּ֣י לֹ֧א כַ⁠נָּשִׁ֛ים הַ⁠מִּצְרִיֹּ֖ת הָֽ⁠עִבְרִיֹּ֑ת כִּֽי־חָי֣וֹת הֵ֔נָּה בְּ⁠טֶ֨רֶם תָּב֧וֹא אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֛ן הַ⁠מְיַלֶּ֖דֶת וְ⁠יָלָֽדוּ

The midwives give a reason, the Hebrew women are not like the Egyptian women, and then they expand on that reason, for they are lively (or energetic), with the result that before the midwife comes to them, they have given birth. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֤רְןָ הַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹת֙

Here, midwives said means that a midwife spoke representing the thoughts of the group. It may not make sense in your language to say that multiple people said something, so you may need to translate it in the singular (see UST). (See: Synecdoche)

הַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹת֙

These were women who helped a woman give birth to a baby. See how you translated this in Exodus 1:15.

Exodus 1:20

לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֑ת

These were women who helped a woman give birth to a baby. See how you translated this in Exodus 1:15.

וַ⁠יִּ֧רֶב הָ⁠עָ֛ם וַ⁠יַּֽעַצְמ֖וּ מְאֹֽד

This sentence gives background information about the events at the time. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

וַ⁠יִּ֧רֶב…וַ⁠יַּֽעַצְמ֖וּ מְאֹֽד

These words mean similar things and are used together to emphasize their numeric growth. If your language doesn’t have as many words that mean the same thing, you can use fewer words and express the emphasis in another way. (See: Doublet)

וַ⁠יֵּ֥יטֶב אֱלֹהִ֖ים לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֑ת

This phrase is more logically connected to the statements in verse 21. It describes the result of the midwives fearing God with a general statement. If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange verses 20-21 so that the reason (verses 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 1:21

כִּֽי־יָֽרְא֥וּ הַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֖ת אֶת־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים

This is the reason for what God did. If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange verses 20-21 so that the reason (verses 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ לָ⁠הֶ֖ם בָּתִּֽים

This describes the result of the midwives fearing God with a specific statement. If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange verses 20-21 so that the reason (verses 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

בָּתִּֽים

Alternate translation: “households”

Exodus 1:22

כָּל־הַ⁠בֵּ֣ן הַ⁠יִּלּ֗וֹד הַ⁠יְאֹ֨רָ⁠ה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ

This order was given in order to drown the male Hebrew children. The full meaning of this may be made explicit. Alternate translation: “You must dispose of each new baby boy in the river so he will drown” or “Drown each baby boy in the river when he is born” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠יְצַ֣ו פַּרְעֹ֔ה לְ⁠כָל־עַמּ֖⁠וֹ לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כָּל־הַ⁠בֵּ֣ן הַ⁠יִּלּ֗וֹד הַ⁠יְאֹ֨רָ⁠ה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ וְ⁠כָל־הַ⁠בַּ֖ת תְּחַיּֽוּ⁠ן

From You shall to the end of the verse is a direct quote of Pharaoh’s speech. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. However, it could be translated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Pharaoh commanded all of his people to throw every baby boy into the river, but to let every girl live.” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ…תְּחַיּֽוּ⁠ן

The uses of the word you here refer to all the Egyptians. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 2

Exodus 02 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• v. 1-10: Moses’ birth and early life
• v. 11-15: Moses’ attempted intervention and flight
• v. 16-22: Moses settles in Midian
• v. 23-25: God sees the Israelites’ plight

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Covenant

At the end of the chapter, God begins to relate to the Israelites based on his covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Identification of participants

• Moses is the only participant named in most of this chapter. This is because many of the participants play very minor roles and because this part of the story is focusing on Moses’ life.

Moses’ heritage

In the first part of this chapter, Pharaoh’s daughter recognizes Moses as being a Hebrew, but in the last part of this chapter, the Midianites believe him to be an Egyptian.

Ironic situations

• While Pharaoh tried to diminish the power of the Israelites by killing all of their baby boys, God used Pharaoh’s own daughter to save Moses.
• Moses believes he is meant to be the rescuer of his people, but they reject him. Ultimately, Moses was correct, but the people rejected him at this point (see Acts 7).

Exodus 2:1

וַ⁠יֵּ֥לֶךְ

A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

אִ֖ישׁ…בַּת

These are new participants. They remain unnamed until Exodus 6:20 where they are identified as Amram and Jochebed. For now it is best to leave them unnamed in your language, if possible. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

וַ⁠יִּקַּ֖ח אֶת־בַּת־לֵוִֽי

Here, took a daughter is an idiom for marrying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: Idiom)

Exodus 2:2

ט֣וֹב

Alternative translations: “pleasing” or “fine”

וַ⁠תֵּ֤רֶא…וַֽ⁠תִּצְפְּנֵ֖⁠הוּ

Hiding the boy was a result of seeing that he was good. Alternative translation: “Since she saw … she hid him” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה

3 (See: Numbers)

Exodus 2:3

תֵּ֣בַת גֹּ֔מֶא

The ark is a basket made from a tall grass (papyrus reeds) that grows by the Nile River in Egypt. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וַ⁠תַּחְמְרָ֥⁠ה בַ⁠חֵמָ֖ר וּ⁠בַ⁠זָּ֑פֶת

You could explicitly state that this was to keep out water. Alternate translation: “and she daubed it with bitumen and with pitch to keep water from getting into it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠תַּחְמְרָ֥⁠ה

This means that she applied a waterproof coating. (See: Translate Unknowns)

בַ⁠חֵמָ֖ר

This is a sticky black substance made from oil. It can be used to keep out water. Alternate translation: “with tar” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וּ⁠בַ⁠זָּ֑פֶת

This is a sticky brown or black substance that can be made from tree sap. It too can be used to keep out water. Alternate translation: “and with tar” or “and with resin” (See: Translate Unknowns)

בַּ⁠סּ֖וּף

These reeds were a type of tall grass with wide blades that formed a flat surface when woven together. They grew in flat, wet areas. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 2:4

וַ⁠תֵּתַצַּ֥ב אֲחֹת֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠רָחֹ֑ק

This means she stood far enough away so that she would not be noticed, but close enough to see the ark. Use a word that expresses this sort of distance in your language.

מֵ⁠רָחֹ֑ק

This probably means somewhere in the reeds where she could see the basket, but no one would see her. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun distance in another way. Alternate translation: “not far away” (See: Abstract Nouns)

אֲחֹת֖⁠וֹ

Here, the actions of his sister show that she was older. If your language uses a different term for siblings based on their relative ages or the gender of the siblings or both, use one that means “a boy’s older sister.” (See: Kinship)

לְ⁠דֵעָ֕ה מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה לֽ⁠וֹ

This is her purpose in being close by. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternative translation: “in order to learn what would happen to him” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Exodus 2:5

וַ⁠תֵּ֤רֶד

Came down may be literal or figurative, as important places are often considered to be in a higher place. This means she came from her home, probably Pharaoh’s palace. If a perspective is required for Pharaoh’s daughter, you may choose go or come as works best in your language. “Come” is better as the scene is at the river and she comes to the scene location. However, you also need to consider your language’s way of introducing new participants. (See: Go and Come)

וַ⁠תֵּ֤רֶד בַּת־פַּרְעֹה֙

The daughter of Pharaoh is introduced here as a new participant. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

וְ⁠נַעֲרֹתֶ֥י⁠הָ

These women are introduced here as new participants; however, they are not mentioned again after this verse. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

עַל־יַ֣ד הַ⁠יְאֹ֑ר

Here, hand is a metaphor for side or, as relating to a river, shore. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you can simply translate the meaning. (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠נַעֲרֹתֶ֥י⁠הָ

These were the young women whose job it was to be with her and make sure nothing bad happened to her.

וַ⁠תִּקָּחֶֽ⁠הָ

It is not clear who is meant by she here, either Pharaoh’s daughter or the servant. It is likely that Pharaoh’s daughter remains the subject. Alternative translation: “and she took the ark from her slave” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 2:6

וְ⁠הִנֵּה

The word behold signals the surprising information that follows. (See: Exclamations)

וַ⁠תַּחְמֹ֣ל עָלָ֔י⁠ו

The text does not state exactly what caused her to have compassion on the baby. If a reason must be provided in your language, it should be connected to either his crying (this is the better option) or that he was a “good” baby (verse 2). (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

מִ⁠יַּלְדֵ֥י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֖ים זֶֽה

This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. It seems to have been said loud enough for the baby’s sister to hear. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes. (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 2:7

וְ⁠קָרָ֤אתִי לָ⁠ךְ֙ אִשָּׁ֣ה מֵינֶ֔קֶת מִ֖ן הָ⁠עִבְרִיֹּ֑ת

This is a suggestive question. The child’s sister is hopeful that Pharaoh’s daughter does not yet have a plan for the baby beyond saving his life. However, it is still a true question, for without Pharaoh’s daughter’s permission, the child’s sister will not be able to fetch the woman. If your language has a way of forming questions that are also suggestions, use it here.

מֵינֶ֔קֶת…וְ⁠תֵינִ֥ק

Here, nursing or to nurse means to feed with milk from the breast.

וְ⁠תֵינִ֥ק לָ֖⁠ךְ אֶת־הַ⁠יָּֽלֶד

This is the purpose of the sister’s proposal. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternative translation: “And she could nurse the infant for you” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Exodus 2:8

לֵ֑כִי…וַ⁠תֵּ֨לֶךְ֙

The girl left Pharaoh’s daughter to go to the child’s mother. The girl was almost certainly on foot. Use verbs of motion that express this. (See: Go and Come)

Exodus 2:9

לָ֣⁠הּ

The child’s mother is reintroduced as a participant. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. Alternative translation: “to the baby’s mother” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

שְׂכָרֵ֑⁠ךְ

This refers to payment that Pharaoh’s daughter would give to the mother in exchange for her service of nursing the baby.

וַ⁠תִּקַּ֧ח…וַ⁠תְּנִיקֵֽ⁠הוּ

The mother’s acceptance of the deal is implied. You could make it explicit, as in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 2:10

וַ⁠יִגְדַּ֣ל הַ⁠יֶּ֗לֶד וַ⁠תְּבִאֵ֨⁠הוּ֙

And the child grew older marks an unspecified amount of time. He would have stayed with his mother at least until he was weaned (no longer feeding on his mother’s milk). (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

וַֽ⁠יְהִי־לָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠בֵ֑ן

Alternate translation: “and he became the adopted son of Pharaoh’s daughter”

וַֽ⁠יְהִי־לָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠בֵ֑ן וַ⁠תִּקְרָ֤א שְׁמ⁠וֹ֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה

These events were likely simultaneous, because her act of naming him may have been what made him become as a son to her. Consider using a conjunction that does not make a great separation between these events. (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

מֹשֶׁ֔ה וַ⁠תֹּ֕אמֶר כִּ֥י מִן־הַ⁠מַּ֖יִם מְשִׁיתִֽ⁠הוּ

Translators may add a footnote that says, “The name Moses sounds like the Hebrew word that means ‘draw out.’”

וַ⁠תֹּ֕אמֶר כִּ֥י מִן־הַ⁠מַּ֖יִם מְשִׁיתִֽ⁠הוּ

For begins a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “because she said she drew him out of the water” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Exodus 2:11

וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֗ם וַ⁠יִּגְדַּ֤ל מֹשֶׁה֙ וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֣א

A significant amount of time has passed; later texts state that Moses was 40 years old at this point. Alternative translation: “Many years later, once Moses was grown, he went out” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֗

This introduces a new event in the story. In your language, use a phrase that indicates a new event occurring after significant time has passed. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֣א

The UST supplies a probable location that he went out from; it could also have been simply out from the Egyptian area or out to the work area or cities. Use go or come as appropriate in your language. (See: Go and Come)

מַכֶּ֥ה אִישׁ־עִבְרִ֖י

Alternate translation: “hitting a Hebrew” or “beating a Hebrew”

Exodus 2:12

וַ⁠יִּ֤פֶן כֹּה֙ וָ⁠כֹ֔ה

These two opposite directions have the combined meaning of “everywhere.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “He looked all around” (See: Merism)

וַ⁠יַּךְ֙

The context makes clear that Moses struck the Egyptian hard enough or repeatedly until Moses killed him. Consider using a word that indicates a deadly blow. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 2:13

וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙

See how you translated this in Exodus 2:11. (See: Go and Come)

הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י

The ordinal number here could mean “the next day” (UST) or simply on some day following the events of the previous verse. (See: Ordinal Numbers)

וְ⁠הִנֵּ֛ה

Here, behold shows that Moses was surprised by what he saw. You can use a word in your language that will give this meaning. (See: Exclamations)

לָֽ⁠רָשָׁ֔ע

Based on Moses’ question, this means the aggressor or the man wrongfully attacking his neighbor. Alternate translation: “the man who was guilty of starting the fight”

Exodus 2:14

מִ֣י שָֽׂמְ⁠ךָ֞ לְ⁠אִ֨ישׁ שַׂ֤ר וְ⁠שֹׁפֵט֙ עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ

The man is not asking a question, he is using this question to rebuke Moses for intervening in the fight. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are not our leader and have no right to judge us!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י

The man used a question here to be sarcastic. Alternate translation: “We know that you killed an Egyptian yesterday. You had better not kill me!” (See: Irony)

הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י

Again, the man asks a question that is intended to make a statement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do you think you can kill me without anyone finding out? We know what you did to the Egyptian” (See: Rhetorical Question)

הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר

Alternate translation: “Are you planning to kill me” or “Are you threatening to kill me”

וַ⁠יֹּאמַ֔ר

Certainly the thing is known was likely something Moses said to himself, that is, he thought it to himself rather than speaking to the men in front of him. If this would be confusing in your language, you might introduce it as a thought. Alternate translation: “and thought” (See: Aside)

וַ⁠יֹּאמַ֔ר אָכֵ֖ן נוֹדַ֥ע הַ⁠דָּבָֽר

It may be clearer to present what was likely a thought Moses had as an indirect quotation. Alternative translation (as indirect quotation): “because he thought that everyone knew what he had done” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Exodus 2:15

וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֖שׁ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֣ג אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֑ה

Pharaoh most likely delegated this task. Alternative translation: “and he sought to have Moses killed” (note that the passive form will not work in every language)

מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י

His face means his presence. Alternate translation: “from” (See: Metonymy)

וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב…וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב

In Hebrew, these are the same verb. In English, they could be translated as “settle,” which can mean to dwell in a certain place, but it can also mean to lower one’s body into a seated position. This could mean: (1) Moses lived in Midian. He sat by this well one day. This may have been the well for the town he lived in. (2) Moses lived in Midian. His home was by this well. (3) Moses was a wanderer. He was in Midian and sat by this well when the next event occurred.

Exodus 2:16

וּ⁠לְ⁠כֹהֵ֥ן מִדְיָ֖ן שֶׁ֣בַע בָּנ֑וֹת

This sentence is background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

וּ⁠לְ⁠כֹהֵ֥ן מִדְיָ֖ן שֶׁ֣בַע בָּנ֑וֹת

This sentence marks a scene transition. However, the last clause of the previous verse (“and he sat down by a well”) seems to be related to this new scene, so you may want to make your transition before that, as is done in the UST. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

בָּנ֑וֹת

The daughters are new participants. Use the natural form in your language for introducing new characters. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

וַ⁠תָּבֹ֣אנָה

The perspective of the narrative is set at the well. The daughters came from elsewhere to the well. They were probably on foot. Here each language will need to choose the appropriate motion word. (See: Go and Come)

שֶׁ֣בַע

7 (See: Numbers)

וַ⁠תִּדְלֶ֗נָה

This means that they brought up water from a well.

הָ֣⁠רְהָטִ֔ים

The troughs were long, narrow, open containers for animals to eat or drink out of. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 2:17

וַ⁠יָּבֹ֥אוּ

A group of men came. They may not have been far away before coming and driving the women away. Use an appropriate form of moving verb. (See: Go and Come)

הָ⁠רֹעִ֖ים

These are new characters only seen briefly. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

וַ⁠יָּ֤קָם

Use an expression that communicates that what Moses did was unexpected. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

Exodus 2:18

וַ⁠תָּבֹ֕אנָה

The daughters came from the well to their father, probably on foot. You can use either come or go, whichever is more natural. (See: Go and Come)

רְעוּאֵ֖ל

Reuel, a name or perhaps a title, is used of the man only here and in Numbers 10:29. He is otherwise called “Jethro.” (See: How to Translate Names)

רְעוּאֵ֖ל

The priest of Midian was mentioned in v. 16 in a background statement but is a new character starting here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר מַדּ֛וּעַ מִהַרְתֶּ֥ן בֹּ֖א הַ⁠יּֽוֹם

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and he asked how they were able to return so quickly that day” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

בֹּ֖א

Alternative translation: “in returning” (See: Go and Come)

Exodus 2:19

אִ֣ישׁ מִצְרִ֔י

Jethro’s daughters assume Moses was Egyptian. When you translate it, you should be clear that this refers to Moses.

מִ⁠יַּ֣ד

Here, hand figuratively refers to the power, control, or actions of the shepherds. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “from the strength of” or “from the harm of” (See: Metonymy)

דָּלֹ֤ה דָלָה֙

This expresses surprise or emphasizes the magnitude of Moses’ act of kindness to the women. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: Idiom)

Exodus 2:20

וְ⁠אַיּ֑⁠וֹ לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ עֲזַבְתֶּ֣ן אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ

These questions are a mild rebuke to the daughters for not inviting Moses into their home according to the normal hospitality of that culture. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have left this man at the well!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ל֖⁠וֹ

Here, him refers to Moses. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

לָֽחֶם

Here, bread is used to refer to food in general. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternative translation: “food” (See: Synecdoche)

Exodus 2:21

וַ⁠יּ֥וֹאֶל מֹשֶׁ֖ה לָ⁠שֶׁ֣בֶת אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֑ישׁ

Alternate translation: “Moses agreed to live with Reuel”

צִפֹּרָ֥ה

Zipporah is Reuel’s (Jethro’s) daughter. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 2:22

גֵּ֣ר הָיִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אֶ֖רֶץ נָכְרִיָּֽה

Only this portion is a quotation. As a possibility for clarity, the UST includes both speech events as one quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

גֵּרְשֹׁ֑ם

His name, Gershom, sounds somewhat like the Hebrew for “a stranger here.” You may consider using a footnote to explain that. (See: How to Translate Names)

גֵּ֣ר הָיִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אֶ֖רֶץ נָכְרִיָּֽה

Alternate translation: “stranger in a foreign land”

Exodus 2:23

וַ⁠יְהִי֩ בַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָֽ⁠רַבִּ֜ים הָ⁠הֵ֗ם וַ⁠יָּ֨מָת֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם

This introduces a new section and series of events. A large amount of time went by. According to Stephen’s sermon in Acts 7:30, Moses was in Midian 40 years. Alternative translation: “This is what happened during the many days Moses was in Midian. The king of Egypt died.” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Verses 23-25 give a summary of what happened in Egypt and with the Israelites and God while Moses was in exile. These verses give background information to set the scene. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

וַ⁠יֵּאָנְח֧וּ

They groaned because of their sorrow and misery. Alternate translation: “sighed deeply”

וַ⁠תַּ֧עַל שַׁוְעָתָ֛⁠ם אֶל־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים

The plea of the Israelites are spoken of as if they were a person and were able to travel up to where God is. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and God heard their pleading” (See: Personification)

Exodus 2:24

וַ⁠יִּזְכֹּ֤ר אֱלֹהִים֙

This a common biblical way of saying that God thought about what He had promised. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “and God recalled” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 3

Exodus 03 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

This chapter is one conversation in which Yahweh begins to commission and send Moses to rescue the Israelites.

This chapter records one of the most important events in the history of the Israelite people: the revelation of the name Yahweh at the burning bush. (See: reveal, revealed, revelation)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

God’s holiness

God is so holy that people can not look upon him without dying. This is why Moses covered his eyes. It is also why he took off his shoes. (See: holy, holiness, unholy, sacred and Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Yahweh

The name Yahweh is the personal name of God, which he revealed to Moses. Yahweh is probably related to the phrase “I am” which he tells Moses in verse 14. Some translations use all capitals to set this apart: “I AM.” Great care must be taken in translating the phrase “I am that I am.” (See: Yahweh)

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Participants

“The angel of Yahweh,” “Yahweh,” and “God” all appear to be speaking to Moses and interacting with him from the burning bush. Furthermore, God says that his name is “I AM.” (See note above on Yahweh and I AM.) Yahweh and God are the same, while there is speculation about who the angel of Yahweh is.

Exodus 3:1

וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֗ה הָיָ֥ה רֹעֶ֛ה

This phrase brings the story focus back to Midian and Moses. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Verse 1 provides immediate background context, setting the scene for Moses’ interaction with Yahweh. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

כֹּהֵ֣ן מִדְיָ֑ן

This is a possessive of social relationship. Jethro is a priest who serves the Midianites. (See: Possession)

וַ⁠יָּבֹ֛א אֶל

Alternate translation: “and he arrived at” (See: Go and Come)

הַ֥ר הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים

This is an associative possessive. This mountain was associated with God in some way. In Exodus 3:12 God tells Moses that he and the Israelites will serve him on this mountain. Later in the story, this promise is fulfilled, and it is where God makes his covenant with Israel and gives them the 10 Commandments. So it may have been called the mountain of God in retrospect (as Moses probably wrote this book sometime after the Israelites were wandering in the wilderness). However, it is possible that the mountain was already somehow associated with God’s presence or worship before Moses went there with the flock. (See: Possession)

Exodus 3:2

וַ֠⁠יֵּרָא מַלְאַ֨ךְ יְהֹוָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו בְּ⁠לַבַּת־אֵ֖שׁ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠סְּנֶ֑ה

This is a summary of what happened. The next few verses tell the story of how this happened and how Moses discovered what was happening.

יְהֹוָ֥ה

This is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. See the translationWord page about Yahweh concerning how to translate this.

וְ⁠הִנֵּ֤ה הַ⁠סְּנֶה֙ בֹּעֵ֣ר בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠סְּנֶ֖ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ אֻכָּֽל

The word behold here shows that Moses saw something that was very different from what he expected. He expected the bush to be burnt up completely by the fire. Consider using an interjection in your language that expresses that what follows is a surprise. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

אֻכָּֽל

Here, being consumed means being eaten completely until gone. In the case of fire, this is a metonym for burning completely until gone. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “destroyed by the fire” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 3:3

אָסֻֽרָה־נָּ֣א וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֔ה אֶת־הַ⁠מַּרְאֶ֥ה הַ⁠גָּדֹ֖ל הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה מַדּ֖וּעַ לֹא־יִבְעַ֥ר הַ⁠סְּנֶֽה

This is a direct quote. It’s not specified who Moses spoke to; he may have been alone or with a group of shepherds or his family. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

אֶת־הַ⁠מַּרְאֶ֥ה הַ⁠גָּדֹ֖ל

If your language does not use an abstract noun for something strange that someone sees, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun sight in another way. Alternate translation: “unusual thing that I see” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 3:4

יְהוָ֖ה…אֱלֹהִ֜ים

These terms both refer to the same being, since God’s name is Yahweh.

Exodus 3:5

כִּ֣י הַ⁠מָּק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֤ר אַתָּה֙ עוֹמֵ֣ד עָלָ֔י⁠ו אַדְמַת־קֹ֖דֶשׁ הֽוּא

This is the reason Moses must stop coming close to the burning bush and take off his sandals. If it would be more natural in your language, you could put the reason before the commands, as in, “The place on which you are standing, it is holy ground, so you must not come close to here. Take your sandals off from on your feet.” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 3:6

אָנֹכִי֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י אָבִ֔י⁠ךָ אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יַעֲקֹ֑ב

All of these men worshiped the same God. Alternate translation: “the God of your father, of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob”

אָנֹכִי֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י אָבִ֔י⁠ךָ אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יַעֲקֹ֑ב

This a direct quotation. The UST continues the quotation from verse 5 rather than including an additional “he said.” This may be more natural in some languages. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate the direct quotation with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

אָבִ֔י⁠ךָ

This could mean (1) “your father,” if it means “your father,” then it refers to Moses’ own father (2) “your ancestor,” if it means “your ancestor,” then the phrases following it clarify who “your father” refers to: it refers to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In most cases, it will be best to translate it as “your father,” i.e. Amram, Moses’ father.

וַ⁠יַּסְתֵּ֤ר מֹשֶׁה֙ פָּנָ֔י⁠ו כִּ֣י יָרֵ֔א מֵ⁠הַבִּ֖יט אֶל־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים

Reason: for he was afraid from staring toward God Result: And Moses hid his face If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship and Exodus 33:20)

Exodus 3:7

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה

After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues through the end of verse 10. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

רָאֹ֥ה רָאִ֛יתִי

The Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Here, “see” is repeated in Hebrew. This expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having seen how his people were suffering. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: Idiom)

אֶת־עֳנִ֥י עַמִּ֖⁠י

There are two possessives here: (1) “affliction of … people”: This is an event-related possessive where the people are the objects of affliction. They are treated badly as slaves. (2) “my people”: This one is more difficult as it involves both ownership and the possessive of social relationship. God views his people as his possession, and he is also in relationship with them as their God because they are descended from Abraham, though at this time they may not know God as theirs. (See: Possession)

עֳנִ֥י עַמִּ֖⁠י אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠מִצְרָ֑יִם

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun affliction in another way. Alternate translation: “how my people who are in Egypt are afflicted” or “how the Egyptians afflict my people” (See: Abstract Nouns)

מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו

Here, faces refers to the whole person or the presence of the person(s) who were oppressing the Israelites. If this image is used in your language, you may translate it. If a similar image is used, you may consider using it. If neither is the case, you may omit the word “face” and translate the meaning. (See: Metonymy)

נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו

Alternate translation: “his oppressors”

כִּ֥י

Here, surely is intensifying the expression of Yahweh’s knowledge. Your translation should express Yahweh’s knowing with certainty or strength.

נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו…מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו

These pronouns, him and his, refer to the Israelites as a group in the singular. They agree with “people” as a collective noun in 3:6. Some languages may have to use plural pronouns. Others may have to match the pronoun’s gender to the grammatical gender of the word for “people” in their language. If necessary, change “him” to “them” or change “his” to “hers” or “its” (depending on grammatical gender of “people.”) Alternate translation: “those who oppress them … their anguish” (See: Collective Nouns)

מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו

This is an event-related possessive where the people (as a group: his) are the subjects of anguish. Your translation should express that they are deeply distressed. (See: Possession)

מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו

It is implied that they are deeply distressed because they are treated badly as slaves. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his anguish from his slavery” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun anguish in another way. Alternate translation: “how distressed they are” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 3:8

Verse 8 contains God’s intended result from his acts of seeing and hearing, expressed in both verses 7 and 9. You may need to expressly mark this, for instance by introducing verse 8 with something like “Therefore,” and verse 9 with something like “Again, because.” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

וָ⁠אֵרֵ֞ד

God is figuratively expressing that he is descending from heaven to earth to intervene. God is always everywhere, but this phrase means that his special attention will be directed to this situation. Use whatever form of come or go is appropriate in your language for this. (See: Go and Come)

לְ⁠הַצִּיל֣⁠וֹ…וּֽ⁠לְ⁠הַעֲלֹת⁠וֹ֮

Here, him refers in the singular to the Israelites as a group. It is agreeing with “people” as a collective noun in 3:6. Some languages may have to use plural pronouns. Others may have to match the pronoun’s gender to the grammatical gender of the word for “people” in their language. See what you did in the previous verse. (See: Collective Nouns)

מִ⁠יַּ֣ד

Someone’s hand is a common Biblical metaphor for power and control. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. (See: Metaphor)

מִ⁠יַּ֣ד מִצְרַ֗יִם

This is a possessive where the Egyptians are the subject of the hand, which means power. The Egyptians used their power and control to oppress the Israelites. Use a phrase in your language that expresses the idea of a group of people having power. (See: Possession)

אֶל־אֶ֤רֶץ טוֹבָה֙ וּ⁠רְחָבָ֔ה אֶל־אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ

There are multiple levels of parallelism here. First, the statements, to a good and wide land and to a land flowing with milk and honey are in parallel with each other. Within each of those, good and wide are in parallel with each other, and milk and honeyare in parallel with each other. Each of these levels is meant to reinforce and expand upon one another. These are not examples of synonymous parallelism, and each part of the statement should be translated. (See: Parallelism)

חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ

Here, milk is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; honey is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. The next note explains further. (See: Metonymy)

אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ

God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. If this metaphor makes sense in your language, you may translate it. If your language has metaphors that mean a land is good for producing healthy livestock and good crops, you may consider using those. If neither is the case, you may translate the meaning. See UST. (See: Metaphor)

זָבַ֥ת

Alternate translation: “full of” or “with an abundance of”

חָלָ֖ב

Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: Metonymy)

וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ

Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 3:9

This verse parallels verse 7. Yahweh is restating that the Israelite’s plight has gotten his attention. This creates emphasis and connection to what Yahweh will do with what Moses will do as Yahweh’s appointed leader. If this repetition would confuse your readers consider a paragraph break at the start of this verse to separate the two parallel statements or use some other strategy of emphasis and connection that is natural in your language. (See: Parallelism)

הִנֵּ֛ה

This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “certainly.” (See: Exclamations)

צַעֲקַ֥ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בָּ֣אָה אֵלָ֑⁠י

Here, the cry is spoken of as if it were a person who is capable of moving on his own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I have heard the cries of the people of Israel” (See: Personification)

רָאִ֨יתִי֙ אֶת־הַ⁠לַּ֔חַץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִצְרַ֖יִם לֹחֲצִ֥ים אֹתָֽ⁠ם

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun oppression in another way. Alternate translation: “I have seen how the Egyptians are oppressing them” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 3:10

וְ⁠עַתָּ֣ה

And now functions as a discourse marker expressing logical conclusion. “So then,” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 3:11

מִ֣י אָנֹ֔כִי כִּ֥י אֵלֵ֖ךְ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה וְ⁠כִ֥י אוֹצִ֛יא אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם

Moses uses this question to tell God that he, Moses, is not the right person for the task. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: Rhetorical Question)

Exodus 3:12

תַּֽעַבְדוּ⁠ן֙

If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 3:13

הִנֵּ֨ה אָנֹכִ֣י בָא֮ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵל֒ וְ⁠אָמַרְתִּ֣י לָ⁠הֶ֔ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבוֹתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם שְׁלָחַ֣⁠נִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם וְ⁠אָֽמְרוּ־לִ֣⁠י מַה־שְּׁמ֔⁠וֹ

Moses presents God with a hypothetical situation here. The three events (go, say, say) are part of one hypothetical event. You should translate this in a way that makes it clear that this is a future, not-yet-real event. (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

הִנֵּ֨ה

Behold is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. In this case, Moses uses it to introduce what he views as a probable future occurrence. Alternative translation: “Now”

בָא֮

In your language, use go or “come” as makes most sense for Moses’ hypothetical action of going from the mountain to where the Israelites are. (See: Go and Come)

אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבוֹתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם שְׁלָחַ֣⁠נִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם

This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation inside a quotation. However, you may also choose to translate it as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that the God of their fathers has sent me to them” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבוֹתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם

Here, fathers figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “The God of your ancestors” or “The God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: Metonymy)

מָ֥ה אֹמַ֖ר אֲלֵ⁠הֶֽם

Moses is asking God what he should do as a result of the hypothetical situation he presented. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 3:14

אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽהְיֶ֑ה

This is God’s response to Moses’ question about God’s name. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “God said to Moses, ‘Tell them that God says his name is “I AM THAT I AM.”’”

אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽהְיֶ֑ה

This could mean: (1) this whole sentence is God’s name or (2) God is not telling his name but something about himself. By saying this, God is teaching that he is eternal; he has always lived and always will live.

אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה…אֶֽהְיֶ֑ה…אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה

Languages that do not have an equivalent to the verb “am” may need to render this as “I LIVE” or “I EXIST.”

וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר

This indicates that God is still speaking. It may make more sense to omit this in some languages.

אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה שְׁלָחַ֥⁠נִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶֽם

This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation inside a quotation. However, you may also choose to translate it as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: Quotes within Quotes)

Exodus 3:15

וַ⁠יֹּאמֶר֩ ע֨וֹד אֱלֹהִ֜ים אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה

As God is still speaking, it may make more sense to omit this in some languages.

אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה

After this phrase, a direct quotation begins that continues until the end of chapter 3 at verse 22. This section contains four levels of quotations as God tells Moses to tell the Israelite elders a specific message from God. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

יְהוָ֞ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵי⁠כֶ֗ם אֱלֹהֵ֨י אַבְרָהָ֜ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֛ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹ֖ב שְׁלָחַ֣⁠נִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם זֶה־שְּׁמִ֣⁠י לְ⁠עֹלָ֔ם וְ⁠זֶ֥ה זִכְרִ֖⁠י לְ⁠דֹ֥ר דֹּֽר

This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. It may be possible to translate it as an indirect quotation, but you will need to be careful to correctly change the pronoun persons. Alternative translation: “You must tell the Israelites that Yahweh, the God of their fathers, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob, sent you to them. This is his name forever, and this is his memorial from generation to generation.” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵי⁠כֶ֗ם

Here, fathers figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: Metonymy)

לְ⁠דֹ֥ר דֹּֽר

The repetition of generation is indicating “to each and every generation” which figuratively means “for all people at all times.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: Merism)

Exodus 3:16

יְהוָ֞ה

This begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 17. It contains a third-level quotation that begins at “I have certainly” and also continues to the end of verse 17. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. The closing marks for both the second and third-level quotations should not occur until the end of verse 17. (See: Quote Markings)

אֱלֹהֵ֤י אֲבֹֽתֵי⁠כֶם֙

Here, fathers figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: Metonymy)

אַבְרָהָ֛ם יִצְחָ֥ק וְ⁠יַעֲקֹ֖ב

Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob were three of the Israelites’ ancestors. They all worshiped the same God.

פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙

This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 17. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation that is within a quotation. The closing marks for both the second-level and third-level quotations should not occur until the end of verse 17. (See: Quote Markings)

פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙

The word translated attended often means God is coming to take action. Translate this phrase in a way that communicates God’s focused, caring observation. (See: Idiom)

פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙

Here, attended is repeated in Hebrew. The Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. This expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having attended to how his people were suffering. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: Idiom)

אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם

The word you refers to the people of Israel. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

הֶ⁠עָשׂ֥וּי

The focus of this passive is the mistreatment being done to the Israelites, not on who is doing it. In fact, in Egypt further dissociates the actors from this sentence. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠מִצְרָֽיִם

The phrase in Egypt is a metonym for the Egyptian oppressors. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “by the Egyptians” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 3:17

If you are using direct quotations, at the end of this verse you should have three closing markers. In English, it looks like ’ ” ’ (without spaces). (See: Quote Markings)

אַעֲלֶ֣ה אֶתְ⁠כֶם֮ מֵ⁠עֳנִ֣י מִצְרַיִם֒ אֶל־אֶ֤רֶץ הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙ וְ⁠הַ֣⁠חִתִּ֔י וְ⁠הָֽ⁠אֱמֹרִי֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י וְ⁠הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִ֑י אֶל־אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ

This is a fourth-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer three levels. Alternatively, it can be translated as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: Quotes within Quotes)

אַעֲלֶ֣ה

Regardless of the geographic realities, to bring up does not primarily have a literal meaning. Rather, it means to bring the Israelites into a better situation. God promised to bring them up from their low status as slaves to a place where they would be the masters of a good land. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: Idiom)

מֵ⁠עֳנִ֣י

See how you translated affliction in 3:7. Alternate translation: “from being afflicted” (See: Abstract Nouns)

חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ

Here, milk is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; honey is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. The next note explains further. (See: Metonymy)

אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ

God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. See how you translated this in Exodus 3:8. Alternate translation: “a land that is excellent for raising livestock and growing crops” or “a land where milk and honey flow” (See: Metaphor)

זָבַ֥ת

Alternate translation: “full of” or “with an abundance of”

חָלָ֖ב

Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: Metonymy)

וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ

Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 3:18

וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖וּ לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ

Listen often means “hear and do/obey.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternative translation: “And they will pay attention to your voice” (See: Idiom)

לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ…אַתָּה֩

Here, your and you refers to Moses. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ

This phrase means the elders will listen to the message Moses brings from God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to your message” or “to my message which you tell them” (See: Synecdoche)

וְ⁠זִקְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל

This is a possessive of social relationship. Alternative translation: “elders in charge of the Israelites” (See: Possession)

יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל

Israel is a collective noun that refers to all the Israelites. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternative translation: “the Israelites” or “the Israelite people” (See: Collective Nouns)

מִצְרַ֗יִם

Here, Egypt refers to the Egyptian nation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians” (See: Metonymy)

וַ⁠אֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם

If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ…נֵֽלֲכָה…וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָ֖ה

These instances of us are exclusive; they include Moses, the elders, and all the Israelites, but exclude the king of Egypt. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת

Alternate translation: “3” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 3:19

וְ⁠לֹ֖א בְּ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה

The word hand is a metonym for the power of the owner of the hand. There are two further difficulties: (1) Whose hand (power) is being referred to, (2) does the negative mean “not unless” or “not even?” Possible meanings include: (1) “only if he sees that he has no power to do anything else,” where the hand belongs to Pharaoh (2) “only if I force him to let you go,” where the hand belongs to Yahweh, taking “not unless” for the negative (3) “not even if I force him to let you go,” where the hand belongs to Yahweh, taking “not even” for the negative (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 3:20

וְ⁠שָׁלַחְתִּ֤י

God says this will be a result of the king of Egypt’s stubbornness. Alternate translation: “Therefore, I will send out” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

וְ⁠שָׁלַחְתִּ֤י אֶת־יָדִ⁠י֙

Here, hand refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “I will use my strength” (See: Metonymy)

מִצְרַ֔יִם

Egypt refers to both the land and the people group, and then, by extension, to Pharaoh as well. (See: Metonymy)

מִצְרַ֔יִם…בְּ⁠קִרְבּ֑⁠וֹ

Here, him refers to Egypt as a collective.

נִפְלְאֹתַ֔⁠י

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun wonders in another way. Alternate translation: “my amazing acts” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וְ⁠אַחֲרֵי־כֵ֖ן

Here the sequential nature of these happenings is emphasized. Consider using a stronger sequential connective term than usual here. (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

יְשַׁלַּ֥ח

Here, he refers to the Pharaoh, the king of Egypt. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

אֶתְ⁠כֶֽם

Here, you refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 3:21

חֵ֥ן…בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם

In the eyes of the Egyptians is an idiom for the Egyptian’s feelings. Favor means those feelings are positive. Taken together, this means that when the Egyptians see the Israelites (Hebrews) leaving Egypt, they will gladly help them (because they want them to leave so badly due to the Egyptians suffering under God’s judgment). If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. (See: Idiom)

בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם

This is a part-whole possessive. Also, if your language uses a specific form of the possessive for things one cannot lose, it would be appropriate to use that form here. (See: Possession)

הָֽ⁠עָם־הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה

Alternate translation: “you”

תֵֽלֵכ֔וּ⁠ן…תֵלְכ֖וּ

If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

תֵֽלֵכ֔וּ⁠ן…תֵלְכ֖וּ

Alternate translation: “leave” or “go out” or “come out” (See: Go and Come)

לֹ֥א…רֵיקָֽם

The double negative, not … emptily is used to mean “full.” If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “[go] with many things” (See: Double Negatives)

לֹ֥א תֵלְכ֖וּ רֵיקָֽם

Here Yahweh uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “you will go with your hands full of good things” or “you will go with many valuable things” (See: Litotes)

Exodus 3:22

וּ⁠מִ⁠גָּרַ֣ת בֵּיתָ֔⁠הּ

The word, sojourning means living somewhere other than one’s native land, usually temporarily. It is unclear both who the sojourning (visiting) women are and in whose house they are sojourning, leaving several possibilities. Most translations which make a decision about who they are identify both the temporary resident and her host home as Egyptian. This makes sense as the Israelites will be plundering the Egyptians. If it is possible to leave this ambiguous in your translation, that would be best.

וְ⁠שַׂמְתֶּ֗ם עַל־בְּנֵי⁠כֶם֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠נִצַּלְתֶּ֖ם

Each of these is a plural you. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

מִצְרָֽיִם

After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s word which started in verse 15 ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 4

Exodus 04 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• v. 1-17: Moses hesitates to obey so Yahweh gives Moses signs to prove his commission
• v. 18-28: Moses goes back to Egypt
• v. 29-31: Moses and Aaron meet with the Israelite leaders and tell them what Yahweh said

Potential Translation Issues

Quotations

• There is a difficult transition between 4:4 and 4:5 because the quotation stops in the middle to inject a bit of narrative. When it resumes in 4:5,the sentence seems incomplete (even if merged directly with the quotation fragment in 4:4). (See: Ellipsis)* Yahweh’s instructions to Moses are complex, and there are up to four levels of quotations in this chapter. Translators will need to decide if some of these need to become indirect quotations (if that is possible in their language) and take great care to use the proper quotation markings in the proper locations.

Order of events

• The order of events is not always clear. In 4:14 Yahweh tells Moses that Aaron is coming to meet him, but Yahweh telling Aaron to go meet Moses in the wilderness is not recorded until 4:27.
• The timing of the events in 4:18\-4:27, especially verses 18-19 and 27 in relation to the rest of the events of the chapter, is unclear.

Thus says Yahweh

The first of over 400 occurrences throughout the Old Testament of a standard phrase used to introduce direct, authoritative instruction from Yahweh occurs in 4:22. It occurs ten times in the book of Exodus; nine of these are between chapters 4–11. It would be good for your team to have a standard way to translate this that makes it clear that the words that come next are directly from God. If your language has a standard way of introducing a new message from your leader that alerts the hearers that these are the words of the leader, that would be a good phrase to consider.

Yahweh’s attempt to kill someone

The encounter recorded from 4:24 to 4:26 is one of the strangest and most difficult passages in the entire book. Difficulties include:

• To whom do the pronouns refer? Masculine pronouns are used throughout the section, but there are two possible antecedents, Moses (who is not named in the narrative) and Zipporah’s son (who was presumably also Moses’ son, but this is how he is referred to in this text. For why, see below on why Yahweh did this). Most commentators believe the pronouns refer to Moses.
• Circumcision is described in fairly graphic detail. Different cultures will need to approach this differently. Some may have terms for circumcision, while others may be comfortable translating mostly literally, and others will need to use euphemisms or other strategies to translate. (See: circumcise, circumcised, circumcision, uncircumcised, uncircumcision)
• The meaning of the phrase a bridegroom of blood (ULT) is unknown.
• Why did Yahweh attack Moses? Many commentators conclude that Moses had neglected to circumcise one of his sons because it displeased Zipporah, and Yahweh was holding Moses responsible before he returned to lead the Israelites (who should have been circumcised). When Zipporah repented by circumcising the son herself and touching the foreskin to Moses’ feet, Yahweh relents. These conclusions should help inform translation but should not be made explicit in the text.

Study Concepts in this Chapter

Children of God

This chapter introduces the concept that Israel, the people group, is the chosen people of God and God’s firstborn son. (See: chosen, choose, chosen people, Chosen One, elect and people of God and firstborn)

Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart

Scholars are divided over how to understand this statement. There is debate over how Pharaoh has an active or passive role in the hardening of his own heart. Translators should simply follow the text. In Exodus 4-14 there are ten statements that Yahweh hardens Pharaoh’s heart, and ten statements that Pharaoh hardens his own heart. (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 4:1

וַ⁠יַּ֤עַן מֹשֶׁה֙ וַ⁠יֹּ֔אמֶר

Here, answered and said is a Hebrew expression which does not convey any extra information. Unless your language naturally uses a similar structure, it is better to translate one verb and omit the other. Alternate translation: “Moses answered”

וְ⁠הֵן֙ לֹֽא־יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ לִ֔⁠י וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִשְׁמְע֖וּ בְּ⁠קֹלִ֑⁠י כִּ֣י יֹֽאמְר֔וּ לֹֽא־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֖י⁠ךָ יְהוָֽה

This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

בְּ⁠קֹלִ֑⁠י

See 3:18. Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: Metonymy)

לֹֽא־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֖י⁠ךָ יְהוָֽה

This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you could translate it as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that Yahweh has not appeared to me” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

וְ⁠הֵן֙

This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “Listen to me.”

Exodus 4:2

אֵלָ֛י⁠ו…וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר

Here, him and he refer to Moses. Alternate translation: “to Moses … And Moses said” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 4:3

מִ⁠פָּנָֽי⁠ו

Here, “face” figuratively represents the snake itself. Alternative translation: “from the snake” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 4:4

וֶ⁠אֱחֹ֖ז בִּ⁠זְנָב֑⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “and pick it up by the tail” or “and grasp it by the tail”

שְׁלַח֙ יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֔ וֶ⁠אֱחֹ֖ז בִּ⁠זְנָב֑⁠וֹ

This direct quotation is interrupted by Moses obeying Yahweh. This is probably a tightly ordered sequence of events where Yahweh paused and then continued speaking immediately after Moses obeyed. The quote resumes in verse 5, and there is more discussion there about how to translate the quotation resumption. (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

וַ⁠יְהִ֥י לְ⁠מַטֶּ֖ה

Alternate translation: “and it turned into a rod” or “and it changed into a staff”

Exodus 4:5

לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב

This continues the direct quotation from the first part of verse 4. It may be more natural to reorganize verses four and five to keep the quote together. If you rearrange like this, Moses picking up the snake/staff should come after the full quotation. However, it is better to do something similar to the UST, which restates that Yahweh is speaking and provides some implied directives from Yahweh to make a complete sentence. (See: Quote Markings)

לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב

This quote is not a complete sentence; the UST provides a clarification. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. (See: Ellipsis)

יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ…אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם

Here, them and their refer either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is a better option. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ

Here, you refers to Moses. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב

Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob were three of their ancestors. They all worshiped the same God.

Exodus 4:6

וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה

This word, behold, is used to create an exclamation, showing surprise. (See: Exclamations)

כַּ⁠שָּֽׁלֶג

The word like (ULT) or “as” (UST) here is used to compare how Moses’ hand looked. You may not have a word for snow in your language. If so, consider an alternative that describes something very white. You may need to make the whiteness explicit. Alternate translation: “that made it look white like wool” or “that made it look white like the sand on the beach” (See: Simile)

Exodus 4:7

וְ⁠הִנֵּה

This word is used to create an exclamation, showing surprise. (See: Exclamations)

Exodus 4:8

וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִשְׁמְע֔וּ לְ⁠קֹ֖ל הָ⁠אֹ֣ת הָ⁠רִאשׁ֑וֹן וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ לְ⁠קֹ֖ל הָ⁠אֹ֥ת הָ⁠אַחֲרֽוֹן

Here each sign is spoken of as if it had a voice with which it could speak. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way that makes explicit that the signs are meant to be proof that God sent Moses. Alternative translation: “and are not convinced that God has appeared to you by seeing the first sign, then they will be convinced by seeing the second sign.” (See: Personification)

יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ…יִשְׁמְע֔וּ…וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ

Here, they refers either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is the better option, but be sure to do the same as you did in verse 5. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

לֹ֣א יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ…וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ

Alternate translation: “they do not acknowledge … then they will acknowledge” or “they do not accept … then they will accept”

Exodus 4:9

יַאֲמִ֡ינוּ…יִשְׁמְעוּ⁠ן֙

Here, they refers either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is the better option, but be sure to do the same as you did in verse 5. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

לְ⁠קֹלֶ֔⁠ךָ

See 3:18. Alternate translation: “to what you say” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 4:10

בִּ֣י

This word is used by a speaker to beg a superior to allow him to speak. Alternate translation: “Please”

לֹא֩ אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים אָנֹ֗כִי גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם

Alternate translation: “I have never been an excellent speaker, not now, not before”

אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים

This expression means “a man who uses words well,” in other words, an eloquent man who can speak well and convincingly.

גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם

These phrases simply mean “in the past.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: Merism)

עַבְדֶּ֑⁠ךָ

Moses refers to himself as God’s servant to lower his status before God (and perhaps by doing so to make his argument of inability stronger). If this is confusing in your language, you could make who he means plain. Alternate translation: “me, your servant” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

כְבַד־פֶּ֛ה וּ⁠כְבַ֥ד לָשׁ֖וֹן

These phrases mean basically the same thing. Moses uses them to emphasize that he is not a good speaker. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “not good at public speaking”(See: Doublet)

לָשׁ֖וֹן

Here, tongue refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “speech” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 4:11

מִ֣י שָׂ֣ם פֶּה֮ לָֽ⁠אָדָם֒

Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the Creator who makes it possible for people to speak. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Is it not I, Yahweh, who created the human mouth and the ability to speak” (See: Rhetorical Question)

מִֽי־יָשׂ֣וּם אִלֵּ֔ם א֣וֹ חֵרֵ֔שׁ א֥וֹ פִקֵּ֖חַ א֣וֹ עִוֵּ֑ר

Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the one who decides if people can speak and hear, and if they can see. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “make people able to speak or hear or to see or to be blind” (See: Rhetorical Question)

הֲ⁠לֹ֥א אָנֹכִ֖י יְהוָֽה

Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he alone makes these decisions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am the one who does this!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Exodus 4:12

וְ⁠אָנֹכִי֙ אֶֽהְיֶ֣ה עִם־פִּ֔י⁠ךָ

Here, mouth refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you the ability to speak” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 4:13

בִּ֣י

This word is used by a speaker to beg a superior to allow him to speak. See what you did in verse 10. Alternate translation: “Please”

שְֽׁלַֽח־נָ֖א בְּ⁠יַד־תִּשְׁלָֽח

In translating this phrase, it is important to make clear that Moses is asking Yahweh to send someone else. Here he is not accepting Yahweh’s commission.

בְּ⁠יַד

This phrase means “by a person.” The figure is of a person taking Yahweh’s message in his hand to the Israelites and Pharaoh. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. (See: Synecdoche)

Exodus 4:14

וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֨ף יְהוָ֜ה

This means that Yahweh is angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh became angry” (See: Idiom)

וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙

Here, he refers to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh said” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

הֲ⁠לֹ֨א אַהֲרֹ֤ן אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הַ⁠לֵּוִ֔י

Yahweh uses this rhetorical question to suggest an alternative to Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternative translation: “I know you have a brother, Aaron the Levite.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙

Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: Kinship)

דַבֵּ֥ר יְדַבֵּ֖ר

In Hebrew, the word speak is repeated. This means he speaks well. English cannot convey this by doubling, so the meaning of the repetition was translated in the ULT in this case. If your language can say something like “speaking speaks” to mean “speaks well,” consider it; otherwise, translate the meaning similarly to the ULT or UST. (See: Idiom)

הִנֵּה

Here, behold is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. If your language has a term that functions in that way (“Listen!” or “Look!” or “Pay Attention!”), use it here.

יֹצֵ֣א

Yahweh says Aaron is coming from Egypt to Midian to find Moses. He is probably on foot. Depending on the language, the required form of go or come may vary. (See: Go and Come)

וְ⁠שָׂמַ֥ח

Aaron will be glad because he sees Moses. Consider a conjunction or other form that expresses result, as in the UST or alternative translation: “and because he sees you, he will have joy” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

בְּ⁠לִבּֽ⁠וֹ

Here, heart refers to inner thoughts and emotions. If the heart is not a body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s thoughts and emotions, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 4:15

הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים

Words here are spoken of as if they were something that can be physically placed in a person’s mouth. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the message that he is to repeat” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠אָנֹכִ֗י אֶֽהְיֶ֤ה עִם־פִּ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וְ⁠עִם־פִּ֔י⁠הוּ

The word mouth here represents Moses’ and Aaron’s choice of words. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And I will be with you as you speak and with him as he speaks” (See: Metonymy)

אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם…תַּעֲשֽׂוּ⁠ן

These refer to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form if you have one or, if not, use a plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 4:16

לְ⁠פֶ֔ה

This phrase compares Aaron to a mouth because he will be the one to actually vocalize to the Israelites and Pharaoh what Moses tells him to say. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the one to say what you tell him to say” (See: Simile)

תִּֽהְיֶה־לּ֥⁠וֹ לֵֽ⁠אלֹהִֽים

The word like here means Moses would represent the same authority to Aaron as God did to Moses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you will speak to Aaron with the same authority with which I speak to you” (See: Simile)

Exodus 4:17

הַ⁠מַּטֶּ֥ה הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה

Yahweh assumes that Moses will know that by this staff, he means the one that Moses said he had in his hand in verse 2 and with which God told him to do a miracle in verses 3-4. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 4:18

יֶ֣תֶר

Jethro is reintroduced as a participant in the narrative here. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character.(See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

וַ⁠יֵּ֨לֶךְ

Because the setting has shifted back to Jethro’s home, some languages may need to use “come” here. (See: Go and Come)

חֹֽתְנ֗⁠וֹ

This refers to the father of Moses’ wife. If your language uses a different term for the husband’s or wife’s father use the one for wife’s father. (See: Kinship)

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר

Here, he refers to Moses. Alternate translation: “and Moses said” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ל⁠וֹ֙

Here, him refers to Jethro. Alternate translation: “to Jethro” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

אַחַ֣⁠י

Here the term brothers refers more broadly to all of Moses’ people group, those he is related to. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my relatives” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֖ה הַ⁠עוֹדָ֣⁠ם חַיִּ֑ים

Later in the Bible we are told that Moses was in Midian for 40 years. Moses’ request may have been literal or an idiom that meant he wanted to know how they were doing. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: Idiom)

לֵ֥ךְ לְ⁠שָׁלֽוֹם

This is a phrase of assent and blessing. It may be necessary for some languages to explicitly add, “Yes,” to the beginning of Jethro’s response. (See: Blessings)

Exodus 4:19

וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֤ה אֶל־מֹשֶׁה֙

The timing and situation for Yahweh speaking to Moses here is not specified. Some conjecture that it was part of the narrative of the encounter with Yahweh from the previous verses but placed after his request to Jethro for an unknown reason. Another speculation is that Moses delayed returning to Egypt (either by his own choice, Yahweh’s instructions, or someone else delaying him) and Yahweh came and told him again (the UST explicitly offers this optional translation). (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

הַֽ⁠מְבַקְשִׁ֖ים אֶת־נַפְשֶֽׁ⁠ךָ

This means they were seeking to end his life, that is, to kill him.

Exodus 4:20

בָּנָ֗י⁠ו

Moses’ second son is not introduced until 18:4 but had already been born before they left Midian. It is not necessary to make this explicit here, if it would confuse your readers you could add a footnote. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

וַ⁠יָּ֖שָׁב אַ֣רְצָ⁠ה מִצְרָ֑יִם

It is clear from verse 24 and 25 that Moses’ family went with him. If this is confusing in your language, you may need to change from he to “they” returned. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וַ⁠יָּ֖שָׁב אַ֣רְצָ⁠ה מִצְרָ֑יִם

After the incident on the road in verses 24-26. Moses’ family is not mentioned again until 18:2, which says that Moses sent them back, so it may be better to make a translation similar to the UST, which only commits to the family starting on the way to Egypt. This option has the further benefit of allowing for the several events that happen before Moses gets to Egypt. The ULT’s toward is another way of giving space in the translation for the next several events. (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

מַטֵּ֥ה הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים

The phrase the staff of God refers to the staff that God told Moses to take with him in verse 17. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

מַטֵּ֥ה הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים

The book describes this staff as the staff of God because God appointed it as his instrument so that Moses could do miraculous works through it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Make sure your translation does not lead people to think the staff was a magic wand or shaman’s staff that had its own power or power from Moses or that the staff gave Moses the ability to command God. In every instance where miracles happened, first God told Moses to do something with the staff, then Moses obeyed, and then God caused a miracle. Alternate translation: “the staff that God had told him to bring because God intended to work powerfully through it when Moses stretched it out.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 4:21

בְּ⁠לֶכְתְּ⁠ךָ֙

This begins a direct quotation that continues to the end of 4:23. It contains up to fourth-level quotations. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

רְאֵ֗ה

Most translations and interpretations of the verb see take it to mean something like “see that you do.”

כָּל־הַ⁠מֹּֽפְתִים֙ אֲשֶׁר־שַׂ֣מְתִּי בְ⁠יָדֶ֔⁠ךָ

Here the miracles are spoken of as if they were items Moses could carry. In part, this may be because the three signs already given to Moses involved the use of his hand. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “all the wonders I have authorized you to perform” (See: Metaphor)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֑ה

This time, while before the face of still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Moses is to actually do the miracles in front of Pharaoh so he can see them. Alternative translation: “so Pharaoh can see them” (See: Metonymy)

וַ⁠אֲנִי֙ אֲחַזֵּ֣ק

Referring to himself in the opening of this sentence serves to emphasize a contrast between what might normally be expected and what will actually happen. Translate this in a way that clearly contrasts the performance of miracles before Pharaoh (which might be expected to lead to him releasing the Israelites) with what Yahweh says Pharaoh will do. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

וַ⁠אֲנִי֙ אֲחַזֵּ֣ק אֶת־לִבּ֔⁠וֹ

This means that God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart would be made stronger. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “But as for me, I will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְשַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־הָ⁠עָֽם

Make it clear in your translation that this is a result of God hardening Pharaoh’s heart. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 4:22

כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה

This is the first of hundreds of occurrences throughout the Old Testament of a standard phrase, Thus says Yahweh, used to introduce direct, authoritative instruction from Yahweh. It would be good for your team to have a standard way to translate this that makes it clear that the words that come next are directly from God. If your language has a standard way of introducing a new message from your rulers that alerts the hearers that these are the words of the rulers, that would be a good phrase to consider.

כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה

This begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of 4:23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “that Yahweh says” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

בְּנִ֥⁠י בְכֹרִ֖⁠י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃

This is the beginning of a third-level quotation that continues until the end of 4:23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. (If you chose to translate, “Thus says Yahweh,” as an indirect quote, this will be a second- level quotation.) (See: Quote Markings)

בְּנִ֥⁠י

Yahweh expresses his affection for the Israelites by calling them his son. Some languages may need to change the metaphor here into a simile. See the UST. (See: Metaphor)

יִשְׂרָאֵֽל

The word Israel here represents all the people of Israel as a group. It is important to keep the singular reference to Israel as son rather than change it to something like ‘the Israelites are my children,’ because God is making a particular contrast here between his son and Pharaoh’s son. Some languages may not be able to use “Israel” as a collective noun and may need to choose a translation like “the nation of Israel” or “the Israelite nation.” (See: Collective Nouns)

יִשְׂרָאֵֽל

The Israelite nation is often referred to simply by the name of the patriarch. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “The Israelites are” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 4:23

שַׁלַּ֤ח אֶת־בְּנִ⁠י֙ וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֵ֔⁠נִי

This is a fourth-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. (If you chose to translate “Thus says Yahweh” as an indirect quote, this will be a third-level quotation.) (See: Quote Markings)

וָ⁠אֹמַ֣ר אֵלֶ֗י⁠ךָ שַׁלַּ֤ח אֶת־בְּנִ⁠י֙ וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֵ֔⁠נִי וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֖ן

The fourth-level quotation here may be a good one to translate as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “and I told you to let my son go that he may serve me. But you have refused” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

בְּנִ⁠י֙

Yahweh continues to metaphorically speak of Israel as my son. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternative translation: “the Israelite nation, which is like a son to me” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֵ֔⁠נִי…לְ⁠שַׁלְּח֑⁠וֹ

The pronouns he and him agree with “son.” What you use may depend on how you translated son in the previous verse. (See: Pronouns)

הִנֵּה֙

This is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternative translation: “Know this”

בִּנְ⁠ךָ֖

Here, your son refers to the actual son of Pharaoh.

בִּנְ⁠ךָ֖ בְּכֹרֶֽ⁠ךָ

After this phrase, the three levels of direct quotations end, bringing a complete close to all quotations that started in verses 21 and 22. If you are using direct quotations, at the end of this verse you should have three closing markers: third level, second level and first level. In English, it looks like ” ’ ” (without spaces). (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 4:24

וַ⁠יְהִ֥י

This introduces a new event. Mark the transition in a natural way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וַ⁠יִּפְגְּשֵׁ֣⁠הוּ…הֲמִיתֽ⁠וֹ

Here, it is not clear who him refers to. Most commentators believe it refers to Moses, but it could refer to the son, though that is less likely. If it is necessary to choose for your translation, use Moses. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֖שׁ

Here, he refers to Yahweh. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 4:25

צִפֹּרָ֜ה

Zipporah is the name of Moses’ wife. See how you translated it in 2:21. (See: How to Translate Names)

צִפֹּרָ֜ה

Zipporah is introduced here as a new character. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

צֹ֗ר

This was a flake or a sharp piece of a hard gray rock that was used as a knife.. (See: Translate Unknowns)

עָרְלַ֣ת

Theforeskin is the retractable fold of skin which covers and protects the end of the penis. (See: Translate Unknowns)

לְ⁠רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו

It is possible that the word feet may have been a more respectful way to refer to the genital area of the body. However, that possibility is not high enough that you should translate it either literally as genitals or with another euphemism meaning genitals in your language. If you have a word that means primarily feet or legs, but could in some cases also euphemistically mean genitals, you may consider it. (See: Euphemism)

כִּ֧י חֲתַן־דָּמִ֛ים אַתָּ֖ה לִֽ⁠י

The meaning of this metaphor is unclear. It was probably a known saying in that culture. Alternate translation: “You are related to me by this blood” or “You are my husband because of blood” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 4:26

וַ⁠יִּ֖רֶף

God relented as a result of Zipporah’s action. Consider a conjunction or other form that expresses result, as in the UST. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

וַ⁠יִּ֖רֶף

Here, he refers to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “Yahweh relented” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

מִמֶּ֑⁠נּוּ

As in 4:24, him could refer to either Moses or the son, but most commentators think it is still Moses. The UST uses “anyone” to preserve ambiguity. Alternative translation: “from Moses” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים

This is a unique quotation because Zipporah probably does not speak again; rather, the quotation refers back to her statement in 4:25. Use a form from your language for quoting a portion of what someone previously said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים לַ⁠מּוּלֹֽת

It is not clear if the quotation includes because of the circumcision or if that is a comment explaining the quotation. Translations are divided in where they end the quotation, but most exclude because of the circumcision, and it is best to follow that unless a locally respected translation includes it. (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 4:27

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר

You may want to add a word that marks the beginning of a new part of the story, as the UST does. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

אַהֲרֹ֔ן

Aaron is introduced as a new participant. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

בְּ⁠הַ֥ר הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים

See how you translated this in 3:1. (See: Possession)

וַ⁠יִּשַּׁק

This was a traditional way of greeting which showed love. You can make this explicit, as in the UST. (See: Symbolic Action)

Exodus 4:28

שְׁלָח֑⁠וֹ…צִוָּֽ⁠הוּ

These are a bit awkward to translate in English, so the UST adds more information. Other languages may not have the same difficulty.

שְׁלָח֑⁠וֹ…צִוָּֽ⁠הוּ

Here, the pronoun he refers to Yahweh, and him refers to Moses. Alternative translation: “Yahweh sent Moses … Yahweh commanded Moses” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 4:29

וַ⁠יֵּ֥לֶךְ

This begins a new event which you may need to mark in your translation with a transitional word like the UST’s “When.” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Exodus 4:30

לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הָ⁠עָֽם

Here, before the eyes means he did the signs so they could see them. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “in their sight” (See: Metonymy)

הָ⁠עָֽם

Context suggests that people refers to the leaders gathered in 4:29.

Exodus 4:31

הָ⁠עָ֑ם

Context suggests that people refers to the leaders gathered in 4:29.

פָקַ֨ד…בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל

Alternate translation: “saw the Israelites” or “was concerned about the Israelites”

וַֽ⁠יִּקְּד֖וּ וַ⁠יִּֽשְׁתַּחֲוּֽוּ

This action was an expression of thankful worship. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternative translations: “they bowed their heads in awe” or “they bowed down low in reverence.” (See: Symbolic Action)

Exodus 5

Exodus 05 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• v. 1-5: Moses gives Pharaoh Yahweh’s message
• v. 6-21: Pharaoh makes the Israelites work harder
• v. 22-23: Moses asks Yahweh why things went badly

Exodus 5:1

וְ⁠אַחַ֗ר בָּ֚אוּ מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֖וּ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה

The time phrase, and afterward, marks a transition in the narrative. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternative translation: “After that” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וְ⁠אַחַ֗ר בָּ֚אוּ מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֖וּ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה

It is unclear how long Moses and Aaron waited before they went to see Pharaoh. (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

בָּ֚אוּ

In this instance, depending on how they have to set scenes, some languages may need to use “came in.” (See: Go and Come)

פַּרְעֹ֑ה

Pharaoh is reintroduced as a participant in the narrative for the first time since chapter two. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠יָחֹ֥גּוּ לִ֖⁠י בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר

This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There is a second-level quotation fully contained within this portion which is addressed elsewhere. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙

This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See 4:intro for more information.

וְ⁠יָחֹ֥גּוּ

This is a celebration to worship Yahweh. Alternative translation: “so they can worship me with eating and drinking”

Exodus 5:2

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר

The result here is exactly as God has said; therefore, a contrastive transition word is reasonable but not required, given the immediate human context. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

מִ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶשְׁמַ֣ע בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל

This is not a rhetorical question, though Pharaoh may have spoken with contempt. Pharaoh would have considered himself a god. The Egyptians had several gods, and most people groups were assumed to have their own gods. Therefore, Pharaoh had truly not heard of Yahweh (who has just revealed his name to Moses).

יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל

Here the nation is spoken of as an individual. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternative translation: “the nation of Israel” (See: Collective Nouns)

בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ

Here, his voice represent the words God spoke. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what he says” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠גַ֥ם

This functions to strengthen Pharaoh’s statement about his decision. Alternative translation: “and most definitely”

Exodus 5:3

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמְר֔וּ

It may not make sense in all languages for multiple people to speak. Since Aaron was appointed as Moses’ spokesman, consider the alternative translation: “Aaron replied” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

אֱלֹהֵ֥י הָ⁠עִבְרִ֖ים

This term, The God of the Hebrews, is also used for Yahweh, the Israelites’ God.

עָלֵ֑י⁠נוּ נֵ֣לֲכָה…וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָה֙…יִפְגָּעֵ֔⁠נוּ

Here, us (or “we” in UST) refers to the Hebrew people (the Israelites). It excludes Pharaoh and his people. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

בֶ⁠חָֽרֶב

Here, sword represents war or an attack by enemies. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “cause our enemies to attack us” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 5:4

לָ֚⁠מָּה מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן תַּפְרִ֥יעוּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם מִ⁠מַּֽעֲשָׂ֑י⁠ו

Pharaoh uses this rhetorical question to express his anger toward Moses and Aaron for taking the Israelites away from their work. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Stop distracting the people from doing their work!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

לְכ֖וּ לְ⁠סִבְלֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם

This your could refer to Moses and Aaron, or it could mean “all you Israelite people.” The second meaning is more likely. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 5:5

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר פַּרְעֹ֔ה

It is unusual for the same speaker to be reintroduced like this. Some translations omit the repetition, but there is another option. This statement may be more connected to the next couple of verses, so it might be appropriate to make a minor break before this verse. (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר פַּרְעֹ֔ה הֵן־רַבִּ֥ים עַתָּ֖ה עַ֣ם הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ וְ⁠הִשְׁבַּתֶּ֥ם אֹתָ֖⁠ם מִ⁠סִּבְלֹתָֽ⁠ם

This statement by Pharaoh may have been him commenting to himself, or he may have only thought this statement silently; either way, it led to his next actions. If this would be confusing in your language, consider stating it in a way that clarifies that his statement or thoughts here impacted his next actions. (See: Aside)

הֵן

Behold is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say.

וְ⁠הִשְׁבַּתֶּ֥ם

Here, you means Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form if you have one, or if not, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 5:6

וַ⁠יְצַ֥ו פַּרְעֹ֖ה…אֶת־הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֣ים בָּ⁠עָ֔ם וְ⁠אֶת־שֹׁטְרָ֖י⁠ו לֵ⁠אמֹֽר

Pharaoh may have sent a messenger or messengers to the taskmasters and officers or spoken to one or a few representatives of them at his court rather than speaking to them directly. Alternative translation: “And … Pharaoh gave an order to the taskmasters among the people and officers. He said,”

הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֣ים

Taskmasters were Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. These are probably the same as the “overseers” of labor gangs from Exodus 1:11, but here the term is harsher. Alternative translation: “oppressors”

שֹׁטְרָ֖י⁠ו

Officers were probably Israelite slaves who were in charge of the other Israelites but who answered to the Egyptian taskmasters.

לֵ⁠אמֹֽר

Here, saying is a way of introducing a direct quotation in Hebrew; most translations can omit it without harm.

Exodus 5:7

לֹ֣א תֹאסִפ֞וּ⁠ן

This command was given to multiple people; if your language distinguishes between singular and plural forms when giving commands, make sure this is a plural form. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֑ם

This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “as you used to do” or “as was done previously” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 5:8

תָּשִׂ֣ימוּ

If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

הַ⁠לְּבֵנִ֜ים

Bricks are blocks made of clay or mud with straw in them. They are hardened in the sun or in another manner before they are used for building. See how you translated in 1:14. (See: Translate Unknowns)

תְּמ֤וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁם֙

This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” See how you translated this in 5:7 Alternative translation: “before” or “previously” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 5:9

וְ⁠אַל־יִשְׁע֖וּ בְּ⁠דִבְרֵי־שָֽׁקֶר

Here words are spoken of as if they could be looked upon. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “and not listen to words that are lies” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 5:10

וַ⁠יֵּ֨צְא֜וּ

This begins a new scene, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

נֹגְשֵׂ֤י

Taskmasters were Egyptians whose job was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in 5:6.

כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה

This is the same quotation introduction as is used when Yahweh gives a direct command. See 4:intro for more information.

וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֥וּ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֖ם לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה

It might be helpful in some languages to translate thus says Pharaoh as an indirect quote so that his conveyed command is not a quote within a quote. Alternate translation: “and told the people that Pharaoh says” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי

This is the beginning of a second-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 11. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the start of a quotation within a quotation. However, you could also translate this as an indirect quote. See UST. (See: Quotes within Quotes)

אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן

The structure of this phrase and the one that opens the next verse create a strong contrast between what I (Pharaoh) and you (you all, the Israelites) will do. Translate this in a way that emphasizes, if possible, the contrast between I and you. Alternative translation: “It is not I who will give you straw.” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן

Pharaoh uses I to refer to his ownership and commands. Pharaoh does not physically give the Israelites straw. Rather, he had commanded his servants to take straw that belonged to Pharaoh and give it to the Israelites. Now he told his servants to stop providing straw. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “My servants will no longer give you my straw” (See: Metonymy)

לָ⁠כֶ֖ם

Youis plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 5:11

אַתֶּ֗ם לְכ֨וּ קְח֤וּ לָ⁠כֶם֙ תֶּ֔בֶן מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר תִּמְצָ֑אוּ

The structure of this phrase serves as the opposing side of the contrast Pharaoh sets up in the last phrase. By explicitly using a pronoun with a command, he is emphasizing who will go get straw. If possible, translate this in a way that emphasizes the contrast between I and you. See the previous verse. Alternative translation: “Rather, it is you yourselves who must go get straw from wherever you might find it” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

אַתֶּ֗ם

Here, you is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

אַתֶּ֗ם…לָ⁠כֶם֙

The repetition of you (as your) emphasizes that the Egyptians will no longer help the slaves. See the UST. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

כִּ֣י אֵ֥ין נִגְרָ֛ע מֵ⁠עֲבֹדַתְ⁠כֶ֖ם דָּבָֽר

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “for you must continue to make the same number of bricks as before” (See: Double Negatives)

Exodus 5:12

בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרָ֑יִם

This is a generalization used to show the extra effort Israel made to meet Pharaoh’s demands. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that means many places. Alternate translation: “to many places throughout Egypt” (See: Hyperbole)

קַ֖שׁ

Stubble is the part of a plant that is left over after harvest. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 5:13

וְ⁠הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֖ים

Taskmasters were Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in Exodus 5:6.

וְ⁠הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֖ים

The change of subject is emphasized here. If your language has a way of specifically focusing on the actor in a narrative, use it here. See the UST for how that is done in English. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

דְּבַר־י֣וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמ֔⁠וֹ

Day by day means “daily.” Alternative translation: “the daily task”

Exodus 5:14

נֹגְשֵׂ֥י

Taskmasters are Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in Exodus 5:6.

וַ⁠יֻּכּ֗וּ שֹֽׁטְרֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל

The text does not specify who beat the officers. It was probably either the taskmasters or someone the taskmasters ordered to beat the officers. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And the taskmasters beat the officers of the sons of Israel” (See: Active or Passive)

מַדּ֡וּעַ לֹא֩ כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם לִ⁠לְבֹּן֙ כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם גַּם־תְּמ֖וֹל גַּם־הַ⁠יּֽוֹם

The taskmasters used this question to show they were angry with the lack of bricks. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are not producing enough bricks, either yesterday or today, as you did in the past!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם

Here, you and your are plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

לֹא֩ כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם

Here, you and your do not simply refer to the officers; they refer to the groups of Israelite workers the officers are in charge of. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have your teams not finished their required” (See: Synecdoche)

כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם

This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” Here it specifically refers to the time before the Egyptians stopped giving the Israelites straw. See how you translated this in 5:7 Alternative translation: “before” or “previously” (See: Idiom)

גַּם־תְּמ֖וֹל גַּם־הַ⁠יּֽוֹם

This time expression refers to more recent days, ones since the Egyptians stopped providing the straw to the Israelites.

Exodus 5:15

וַ⁠יָּבֹ֗אוּ

This begins a new scene, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. The officers have gone to where Pharaoh is. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וַ⁠יָּבֹ֗אוּ

You will need to decide if go or come is the better translation in your language. (See: Go and Come)

לַ⁠עֲבָדֶֽי⁠ךָ

Here, the Israelite officers use the term your servants to refer to themselves in the third person as a way of showing humility. It is also possible that they mean to include all the Israelites. Either option is valid if your language must state who is meant by “your servants.” Alternate translation: “to us” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 5:16

תֶּ֗בֶן אֵ֤ין נִתָּן֙ לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֔י⁠ךָ

The text does not specify who is not giving them straw. From the context, the taskmasters and, by implication, Pharaoh himself are the ones not doing this. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternative translation: “You are not giving your servants any straw.” (See: Active or Passive)

לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֔י⁠ךָ…עֲבָדֶ֛י⁠ךָ

Here, the Israelite officers use the term your servants to refer to themselves in the third person as a way of showing humility. It is also possible that they mean to include all the Israelites. Either option is valid if your language must state who is meant by “your servants.” Alternate translation: “to us” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

אֹמְרִ֥ים

Here, they refers to the Egyptian taskmasters. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

וְ⁠הִנֵּ֧ה

And behold is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows.

עֲבָדֶ֛י⁠ךָ מֻכִּ֖ים

The text does not specify who beat the officers. It was probably either the taskmasters or someone the taskmasters ordered to beat the officers. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠חָטָ֥את עַמֶּֽ⁠ךָ

The Israelites are indirectly accusing Pharaoh of doing wrong. To translate this, consider polite or indirect ways of making accusations in your culture. (See: Euphemism)

וְ⁠חָטָ֥את

Alternate translation: “but it is the wrongdoing of”

Exodus 5:17

אַתֶּ֖ם…אַתֶּ֣ם

These uses of you are plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

נִרְפִּ֥ים אַתֶּ֖ם נִרְפִּ֑ים

Pharaoh repeats himself for emphasis. In your translation, make sure the idea of laziness or idleness is repeated or strengthened in a way that is natural. Alternative translation: “You are extremely lazy” (See: Exclamations)

נֵלְכָ֖ה נִזְבְּחָ֥ה לַֽ⁠יהוָֽה

Here the king is quoting another person’s speech. This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 5:18

וְ⁠תֶ֖בֶן לֹא־יִנָּתֵ֣ן לָ⁠כֶ֑ם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The subject could be “I” (as in Pharaoh) or “we” (as in the Egyptians or Pharaoh and his taskmasters) or “my people.” See UST. (See: Active or Passive)

לָ⁠כֶ֑ם…תִּתֵּֽנּוּ

Here, you means all the Israelites or the officers as representatives of all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 5:19

וַ⁠יִּרְא֞וּ שֹֽׁטְרֵ֧י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל אֹתָ֖⁠ם בְּ⁠רָ֣ע לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר לֹא־תִגְרְע֥וּ מִ⁠לִּבְנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם דְּבַר־י֥וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמֽ⁠וֹ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. See the UST. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

אֹתָ֖⁠ם

Here the officers are both the subject and object, because they are thinking about their own situation. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

וַ⁠יִּרְא֞וּ…אֹתָ֖⁠ם בְּ⁠רָ֣ע לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר

Alternate translation: “knew that they were in trouble, because the king said” or “perceived themselves to be in danger, because the king said”

Exodus 5:20

וַֽ⁠יִּפְגְּעוּ֙

A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וַֽ⁠יִּפְגְּעוּ֙…לִ⁠קְרָאתָ֑⁠ם בְּ⁠צֵאתָ֖⁠ם

Here, they and them refer to the officers. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 5:21

יֵ֧רֶא יְהוָ֛ה עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִשְׁפֹּ֑ט

The Israelite officers used this form to curse Moses and Aaron.

עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִשְׁפֹּ֑ט

You refers to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

הִבְאַשְׁתֶּ֣ם אֶת־רֵיחֵ֗⁠נוּ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֤י פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו

The Egyptians responded to the Israelites the same way they would respond to a foul odor. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you have caused Pharaoh and his servants to hate us” (See: Metaphor)

חֶ֥רֶב בְּ⁠יָדָ֖⁠ם

Here, a sword into their hand is a metonym for “a reason in their mind.” The Israelites are afraid that the Egyptians will feel that they are doing the right thing if they kill the Israelites, because Moses and Aaron are making demands to the king and because the Egyptians view the Israelites as lazy and dangerous. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “them a reason to think they would be right” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 5:22

לָ֥⁠מָּה זֶּ֖ה שְׁלַחְתָּֽ⁠נִי

This question shows how disappointed Moses was that the Egyptians were treating the Israelites even more harshly now. He is expressing that he thinks God has caused the opposite of what he promised to happen. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I thought you sent me to rescue them.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Exodus 5:23

בִּ⁠שְׁמֶ֔⁠ךָ

Here, in your name indicates that Moses delivers Yahweh’s message. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for you” or “your message for him” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠הַצֵּ֥ל לֹא־הִצַּ֖לְתָּ

In Hebrew, rescued is repeated for emphasis. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: Idiom)

Exodus 6

Exodus 06 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• v. 1-13, 28-30: Yahweh repeats his commissioning of Moses after the bad events recorded in chapter 5
• v. 14-27: Genealogy of Moses and Aaron

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Repetition of events:

Most of the content of this chapter is very similar to the events and dialogue in chapters 3-4. For consistency, translators should consult the decisions they made there while keeping in mind that this narrative is not exactly the same. Also, verses 10-12 and verses 28-30 are very similar to each other. These events are probably a recommissioning of Moses. After his first encounter with Pharaoh went very poorly and the Israelites seem to reject God, Yahweh reminds Moses of his promises and power.

Referring to God

A name for God (Yahweh) and a title for God (El Shaddai) are mentioned in this chapter (6:2\-6:3). The precise meaning of El Shaddai is not known, but most scholars think it means something like “almighty.” Translators who have worked on Genesis may find confusing the statement that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob did not know Yahweh as the name of God.

Other possible translation difficulties:

With little explanation, a large portion of the chapter is devoted to the genealogy of Moses and Aaron. Some of the people in the genealogy lived much longer than is normal for humans today. If translators are not familiar with the lengths of people’s lives in the early days of the world (as recorded in Genesis, especially chapter 5), this may cause confusion.

Study Concepts in this Chapter

Promised Land

According to the covenant Yahweh made with Abraham, Egypt is not the home of the Hebrew people. Their home is the Promised Land in Canaan. The people are to return home to their land. (See: covenant and Promised Land)

God and his people

In verse 7, note the mention of a very important biblical theme of God being “your God” and the special relationship that his people have with him.

Exodus 6:1

עַתָּ֣ה תִרְאֶ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה לְ⁠פַרְעֹ֑ה כִּ֣י בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔⁠ם וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖⁠ם מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ

This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

עַתָּ֣ה

This refers to future events starting very soon. Alternative translation: “Starting soon” or “Very soon” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה

Here, hand is a metonym for power. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by a strong power … and by a strong power” (See: Metonymy)

בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה

It is not clear in the text whose hand is referred to here. The options include: (1) Both refer to God’s hand (forcing Pharaoh’s actions) (2) Both refer to Pharaoh’s hand (forcing the Israelites out) (3) They don’t refer to the same person’s hand; the first refers to God’s and the second to Pharaoh’s. The UST has followed (1), which is the most common interpretation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: (1) “by my strong hand … and by my strong hand” (2) “by his strong hand … and by his strong hand” (3) “by my strong hand … and by his strong hand” (See: Metonymy)

כִּ֣י בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔⁠ם וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖⁠ם מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ

These two phrases mean similar things. God says the same thing twice, in similar ways, for emphasis. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let my people leave the land” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase intensifies the first by portraying Pharaoh as not merely letting the Israelites go, but as forcing them to leave the land. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let them go, in fact, I will force him to force them to leave his land” (See: Parallelism)

מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “from Egypt”

Exodus 6:2

וַ⁠יְדַבֵּ֥ר אֱלֹהִ֖ים אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֑ה וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר אֵלָ֖י⁠ו

There is a transition here. Before this verse, Yahweh was answering Moses’ question more directly. At the beginning of this verse, Yahweh is reintroduced as “God” because he begins to make a clarifying statement about himself and his relationship with the Israelites and their ancestors as well as his plans for the Israelites. Much of this section repeats what Yahweh has already told Moses. You may want to consider a section break before this verse. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Exodus 6:3

בְּ⁠אֵ֣ל שַׁדָּ֑י

El Shaddai is a title for God that many scholars think means “almighty.” You will need to decide if you will transliterate the term into your language or translate the meaning. Either approach has broad support. Alternative translation: “as the strongest God of all” (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

וּ⁠שְׁמִ֣⁠י יְהוָ֔ה לֹ֥א נוֹדַ֖עְתִּי לָ⁠הֶֽם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but they did not know me by my name Yahweh” (See: Active or Passive)

וּ⁠שְׁמִ֣⁠י יְהוָ֔ה לֹ֥א נוֹדַ֖עְתִּי לָ⁠הֶֽם

This statement is very difficult to understand as God’s name, Yahweh, is used throughout Genesis, including by Abraham and others. There are many theories about what it means; the view followed by the UST is that now God is revealing to the Israelites a fuller meaning of his divine name than what Abraham and others knew. Alternate translation: “but my name Yahweh was not understood by them”

Exodus 6:4

לָ⁠תֵ֥ת לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֶת־אֶ֣רֶץ כְּנָ֑עַן

This is the content of the covenant promise from God to his people. Some languages may need to make this part a direct quotation. To do so, begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “I said, ‘I will give you the land of Canaan’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

אֶ֥רֶץ מְגֻרֵי⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־גָּ֥רוּ בָֽ⁠הּ

These two phrases mean similar things. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the land they lived in as temporary residents” or “the land that was not their home but where they lived as foreigners” (See: Parallelism)

Exodus 6:5

נַאֲקַת֙

Here, groaning means making sad sounds because of pain and suffering.

וָ⁠אֶזְכֹּ֖ר אֶת־בְּרִיתִֽ⁠י

I have remembered my covenant means God is going to take action. Alternative translation: “I will keep my promise”

Exodus 6:6

לָ⁠כֵ֞ן

God is now telling Moses to deliver a message to the Israelites of what God is going to do because of everything that he said in verses 2-5. The reason-result relationship is strongly marked here, so translations should make sure to use a connector that marks verse 6-8 as a result of verses 2-5. Alternate translation: “Because of this” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

לָ⁠כֵ֞ן אֱמֹ֥ר לִ⁠בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֘ל

This is a command from Yahweh to Moses. Alternate translation: “So Yahweh told Moses to say to the Israelites”

אֶתְ⁠כֶ֗ם…אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם…אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙

Here every occurrence of you refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

מִ⁠תַּ֨חַת֙ סִבְלֹ֣ת מִצְרַ֔יִם

This refers to all the hard work the Egyptians made the Israelites do. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the hard work the Egyptians force you to do” (See: Synecdoche)

בִּ⁠זְר֣וֹעַ נְטוּיָ֔ה

Here, arm is a figurative way of referring to Yahweh’s power, influence, and capacity for action. Outstretched means that he is using that power. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “by my great strength” (See: Metaphor)

וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁפָטִ֖ים

Here, the term judgments refers to the plagues that God is about to send to harm Egypt and the Egyptians. Each plague is a response to Pharaoh’s stubbornness. Alternate translation: “and by [greatly] harming the Egyptians”

Exodus 6:7

אֶתְ⁠כֶ֥ם…לָ⁠כֶ֖ם…וִֽ⁠ידַעְתֶּ֗ם…אֱלֹ֣הֵי⁠כֶ֔ם…אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם

Here every occurrence of you refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת סִבְל֥וֹת מִצְרָֽיִם

This refers to all the hard work the Egyptians forced upon the Israelites. See what you did in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “from the hard work the Egyptians force you to do” (See: Synecdoche)

Exodus 6:8

אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙…לָ⁠כֶ֛ם

Here every occurrence of you refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

נָשָׂ֨אתִי֙ אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י

This is an action that signifies making an oath. Raising the hand may not have the same meaning in your culture, so you may need to use a different symbolic oath-taking action in your translation or simply translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “I promised” (See: Symbolic Action)

מוֹרָשָׁ֖ה

This means the Israelites will own the land. Alternate translation: “as your own land”

Exodus 6:9

וְ⁠לֹ֤א שָֽׁמְעוּ֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה מִ⁠קֹּ֣צֶר ר֔וּחַ וּ⁠מֵ⁠עֲבֹדָ֖ה קָשָֽׁה

In some languages it will be necessary to put the reason for the people not listening before the result. Alternate translation: “but because of shortness of spirit and because of hard service, they did not listen to Moses” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

מִ⁠קֹּ֣צֶר ר֔וּחַ

Here, the people’s spirit is spoken of as something that could be measured. By calling it “short,” the author is saying they did not have very much motivation or hope. Alternate translation: “because they had no hope”

Exodus 6:10

לֵּ⁠אמֹֽר

This is used to mark the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted if it is unnatural.

Exodus 6:11

וִֽ⁠ישַׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ

This statement tells Moses what to discuss with Pharaoh. Some languages may need to covey this information as a direct quotation. Be careful to change the third-person pronouns to second-person pronouns if you do this. Alternate translation: “and say, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Exodus 6:12

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by the words before the face of Yahweh. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

הֵ֤ן

Behold is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”

הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה

Moses asked this question in hopes that God would change his mind about using Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Since the Israelites did not listen to me, neither will Pharaoh!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה

Moses is presenting a reasoned argument: since this, then probably that. Use a natural way of expressing such arguments in your language. Alternate translation: “Since the sons of Israel have not listened to me, why would you think Pharaoh would listen to me?” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

וַ⁠אֲנִ֖י עֲרַ֥ל שְׂפָתָֽיִם

This is a metaphor that means that Moses was not a good speaker. It is somewhat crude; your translation of this phrase could convey that Moses spoke impolitely. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And I do not speak well” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 6:13

וַ⁠יְצַוֵּ⁠ם֙ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֖ה

This phrase is somewhat difficult to translate. Here, command could also be translated as “charge” or “commission.” Another difficulty is knowing to whom the command is directed: is it to Moses and Aaron or are they to give the command to Pharaoh and the Israelites; thus to could be translated as “for” or “regarding.” Alternate translations: “and he charged them regarding the sons of Israel and regarding Pharaoh” or “and he gave them a command for the sons of Israel and for Pharaoh” or “and he gave them a commission to the sons of Israel and to Pharaoh”

Exodus 6:14

Verses 14-27 are background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

רָאשֵׁ֣י

Here, heads refers to the original leaders of the clan. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the ancestors of ” (See: Metonymy)

רְאוּבֵ֜ן…יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל…חֲנ֤וֹךְ וּ⁠פַלּוּא֙ חֶצְר֣וֹן וְ⁠כַרְמִ֔י…רְאוּבֵֽן

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 6:15

שִׁמְע֗וֹן יְמוּאֵ֨ל וְ⁠יָמִ֤ין וְ⁠אֹ֨הַד֙ וְ⁠יָכִ֣ין וְ⁠צֹ֔חַר וְ⁠שָׁא֖וּל…שִׁמְעֽוֹן

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 6:16

לֵוִי֙…גֵּרְשׁ֕וֹן וּ⁠קְהָ֖ת וּ⁠מְרָרִ֑י…לֵוִ֔י

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

שֶׁ֧בַע וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת

Alternate translation: “one hundred thirty-seven” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 6:17

גֵרְשׁ֛וֹן לִבְנִ֥י וְ⁠שִׁמְעִ֖י

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 6:18

קְהָ֔ת עַמְרָ֣ם וְ⁠יִצְהָ֔ר וְ⁠חֶבְר֖וֹן וְ⁠עֻזִּיאֵ֑ל…קְהָ֔ת

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

שָׁלֹ֧שׁ וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת

Alternate translation: “one hundred thirty-three” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 6:19

מְרָרִ֖י מַחְלִ֣י וּ⁠מוּשִׁ֑י

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 6:20

עַמְרָ֜ם…אַהֲרֹ֖ן…מֹשֶׁ֑ה…עַמְרָ֔ם

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

יוֹכֶ֤בֶד

This is the name of a woman. (See: How to Translate Names)

דֹּֽדָת⁠וֹ֙

Here the term his aunt specifically means his father’s sister. If your language uses a different term that is specific in this way, translators should use it. (See: Kinship)

שֶׁ֧בַע וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת

Alternate translation: “one hundred thirty-seven” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 6:21

יִצְהָ֑ר קֹ֥רַח וָ⁠נֶ֖פֶג וְ⁠זִכְרִֽי׃

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 6:22

עֻזִּיאֵ֑ל מִֽישָׁאֵ֥ל וְ⁠אֶלְצָפָ֖ן וְ⁠סִתְרִֽי

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 6:23

אַהֲרֹ֜ן…עַמִּינָדָ֛ב…נַחְשׁ֖וֹן…נָדָב֙…אֲבִיה֔וּא…אֶלְעָזָ֖ר…אִֽיתָמָֽר

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

אֱלִישֶׁ֧בַע

This is the name of a woman. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 6:24

קֹ֔רַח אַסִּ֥יר וְ⁠אֶלְקָנָ֖ה וַ⁠אֲבִיאָסָ֑ף

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

הַ⁠קָּרְחִֽי

This was the name of the clan of people descended from Korah. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 6:25

וְ⁠אֶלְעָזָ֨ר…אַהֲרֹ֜ן…פּֽוּטִיאֵל֙…פִּֽינְחָ֑ס

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

רָאשֵׁ֛י

Here, heads represents family leaders. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “These were the leaders of the families” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 6:26

עַל־צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם

The term hosts refers to a large group of people often organized into groups for war. Alternate translation: “by their groups” or “by their divisions” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 6:27

לְ⁠הוֹצִ֥יא

This expresses their goal when they spoke to Pharaoh. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. See the UST. (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Exodus 6:28

וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠י֨וֹם

This marks a transition from the record of the genealogy back to the narrative. Consider placing a section break at the start of this verse. Alternate translation: “One day” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Exodus 6:30

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by saying he spoke before the face of Yahweh. See how you translated this in 6:12. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

הֵ֤ן אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֵ֕יךְ יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֵלַ֖⁠י פַּרְעֹֽה

Moses asks this question hoping to change God’s mind about sending him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Behold, I am not a good speaker. Pharaoh will certainly not listen to me!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

הֵ֤ן

Behold is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”

אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם

This is a metaphor that means that Moses thought he was not a good speaker. It is somewhat crude, and your translation of this phrase could convey that Moses spoke impolitely. See how you translated this in 6:12. Alternate translation: “I always fail to speak well” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 7

Exodus 07 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• v. 1-9: The end of Yahweh’s re-sending of Moses and Aaron to Pharaoh
• v. 10-13: Pharaoh’s first refusal, the sign of the snakes
• v. 14-25: First plague: the Nile turns to blood

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Miracles

When Yahweh had Moses perform miracles, Pharaoh’s men were able to copy these miracles. It is unknown how they were able to do this, but since it was not from Yahweh, they were probably done under some evil power. (See: miracle, wonder, sign and evil, wicked, unpleasant)

Pharaoh’s hard heart

Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard, strong, or heavy in this chapter. This means that he was not willing to obey Yahweh’s instructions.

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Include:

• Moses as God to Pharaoh
• A number of difficult terms: prophet, signs, wonders, miracles, sorcerers, magicians, magic, judgments, canals, reservoirs
• The use of “heart” to refer to the seat of will and emotion
• Up to third-level quotations

Exodus 7:1

מֹשֶׁ֔ה

After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of verse 5. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

רְאֵ֛ה

This is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternative translation: “Listen carefully”

נְתַתִּ֥י⁠ךָ אֱלֹהִ֖ים לְ⁠פַרְעֹ֑ה

This means Moses would represent the same authority to Pharaoh as God did to Moses. See how you translated the very similar phrase in Exodus 4:16. Alternate translation: “I will cause Pharaoh to consider you as a god” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֥ן אָחִ֖י⁠ךָ יִהְיֶ֥ה נְבִיאֶֽ⁠ךָ

This phrase compares Aaron to a prophet, because Aaron will actually be the one who proclaims to Pharaoh what Moses tells him. See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 4:16. Alternate translation: “and Aaron your brother will act like your prophet” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 7:2

אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙

Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: Kinship)

וְ⁠שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ

Some languages may need to make this a direct quotation. If so, be sure to mark it as a second-level quotation, subordinate to Yahweh’s main speech. See what you did in 6:25. Alternative translation: “saying, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “from Egypt”

Exodus 7:3

אַקְשֶׁ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה

This means God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were hard. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in Exodus 4:21, but note the slightly different metaphor there: the heart being strong vs. hard here. Alternate translation: “will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

אֶת־אֹתֹתַ֛⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־מוֹפְתַ֖⁠י

The words signs and wonders mean basically the same thing. God uses them to emphasize the greatness of what he will do in Egypt. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine them.(See: Doublet)

Exodus 7:4

אֲלֵ⁠כֶם֙

Here, you means Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) or plural form (if not) here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

יָדִ֖⁠י

The words my hand represent God’s great power. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my power” (See: Metonymy)

בְּ⁠מִצְרָ֑יִם

Here, on Egypt refers to the land and everything in it, including people, animals, and plants. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: Metonymy)

אֶת־צִבְאֹתַ֜⁠י אֶת־עַמִּ֤⁠י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙

These phrases refer to the Israelites in three different ways; they do not refer to three different groups of people. Here, armies is the same word translated “hosts” in Exodus 6:26. Alternate translation: “the armies of my Israelite people”

Exodus 7:5

וְ⁠יָדְע֤וּ מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ כִּֽי־אֲנִ֣י יְהוָ֔ה

This is the result of God rescuing the Israelites. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

בִּ⁠נְטֹתִ֥⁠י אֶת־יָדִ֖⁠י עַל

This phrase represents God’s great power. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “when I show my powerful acts against” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠הוֹצֵאתִ֥י אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠תּוֹכָֽ⁠ם

The goal of God’s powerful acts was to rescue the Israelites. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternate translation: “so that I bring the sons of Israel out from their midst” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Exodus 7:6

וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ…עָשֽׂוּ

This repetition emphasizes the statement. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: Parallelism)

Exodus 7:7

This verse contains background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

שְׁמֹנִ֣ים…שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֖ים

Alternate translation: “eighty … eighty-three” (See: Numbers)

בֶּן־שְׁמֹנִ֣ים שָׁנָ֔ה…בֶּן־שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֖ים שָׁנָ֑ה

The phrase a son of, followed by a number and then years, is an idiom that refers to their age. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: Idiom)

Exodus 7:8

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה

This verse marks the beginning of new sections, both major and minor. The major story of the plagues and Exodus itself unfolds from here until after Pharaoh’s army is defeated at the Red Sea. The next minor event is the miracle of the rods becoming snakes. Either by using particular forms that your language uses to mark transitions or by making a section break and heading, this transition should be marked for readers. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

לֵ⁠אמֹֽר

Here, saying marks the beginning of a direct quote and is often omitted in translation when such a construction is unnatural in the target language. See UST.

Exodus 7:9

כִּי֩ יְדַבֵּ֨ר אֲלֵ⁠כֶ֤ם פַּרְעֹה֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר תְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם מוֹפֵ֑ת וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין

The two quotations in this verse could be stated as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “When Pharaoh tells you to do a miracle, then you will tell Aaron to take his staff and throw it down before Pharaoh so that it may become a snake” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין

This is a second-level direct quotation. The second level may either end after Pharaoh or at the end of the verse. If you did not decide to make it an indirect quotation, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר

Here, saying marks the beginning of a direct quote and is often omitted in translation when such a construction is unnatural in the target language. See UST.

אֲלֵ⁠כֶ֤ם…לָ⁠כֶ֖ם

These pronouns are plural, referring to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) or plural form (if not) here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה

Although before the face of still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Moses and Aaron are to actually do the miracles in front of Pharaoh so that Pharaoh can see them. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “so Pharaoh can see it” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 7:10

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו

This time, while before the face of still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Aaron actually does this right in front of Pharaoh and his servants so they could watch what happens. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “where Pharaoh and his servants could see it” (See: Metonymy)

עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו

Here, his servants does not refer common servants but probably refers to important advisors that would be in the king’s court.

Exodus 7:11

לַֽ⁠חֲכָמִ֖ים וְ⁠לַֽ⁠מְכַשְּׁפִ֑ים…חַרְטֻמֵּ֥י

Here, magicians probably describes both wise men and sorcerers rather than being a third group. See translationWords articles for each term.

Exodus 7:12

אִ֣ישׁ

Alternate translation: “magician”

וַ⁠יִּבְלַ֥ע

Alternate translation: “ate up” or “devoured”

וַ⁠יִּבְלַ֥ע מַטֵּֽה־אַהֲרֹ֖ן אֶת־מַטֹּתָֽ⁠ם

This is a surprising and amusing twist which was not what the magicians expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

מַטֵּֽה…מַטֹּתָֽ⁠ם

It may be necessary in some languages to translate the word staff as “snake,” since it had turned into one. This may be true if it would not make sense in the target language to say (because it is not living) that a staff swallowed or ate something. It may also may not make sense in some languages to speak of the snakes as staffs once they have been transformed. (See: Personification)

Exodus 7:13

וַ⁠יֶּחֱזַק֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה

Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in Exodus 4:21, but note that this is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn, as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: Metaphor)

כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה

Because Yahweh’s prediction precedes this event, some languages may need to place the reference to that prediction before the statement that it was fulfilled. See UST.

Exodus 7:14

כָּבֵ֖ד לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה

Now Yahweh speaks of Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude as if Pharaoh’s heart were heavy. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). See how you translated this in Exodus 7:13, but note the slightly different metaphor there: the heart being strong vs heavy here. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh is defiant” (See: Metaphor)

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר

A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Exodus 7:15

הִנֵּה֙

Behold is used to draw attention to information that follows.

יֹצֵ֣א הַ⁠מַּ֔יְמָ⁠ה

There are various theories as to what Pharaoh would go down to the Nile to do, but there is no need to speculate or specify in the translation.

Exodus 7:16

וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו

Alternate translation: “Say to Pharaoh”

אֱלֹהֵ֤י הָ⁠עִבְרִים֙

Yahweh claimed the Hebrews (Israelites) as his own. They worshiped him. This is a possessive of social relationship. (See: Possession)

שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֻ֖⁠נִי בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֑ר וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה לֹא־שָׁמַ֖עְתָּ עַד־כֹּֽה

This is a third-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. Alternatively, you could translate it as an indirect quotation as in the UST. If you do this, take care to adjust the pronoun person (second/third) as appropriate. (See: Quotes within Quotes)

וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה

Here, behold is used to draw attention to the information that follows. In some languages, it will not be translated.

Exodus 7:17

כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה

This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See 4:intro for more information.

בְּ⁠זֹ֣את

This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 18. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. It is possible that the third-level quotation actually ends before or after Behold, in which case, in the rest of the quote I refers to Moses, not Yahweh. (See: Quotes within Quotes)

הִנֵּ֨ה

Behold is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Alternate translation: “Look at this”

Exodus 7:18

וּ⁠בָאַ֣שׁ הַ⁠יְאֹ֑ר

His warning,the river will stink, will happen because the fish die. Alternate translation: “and because of that the river will stink” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

לִ⁠שְׁתּ֥וֹת מַ֖יִם

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternative translation: “in order to find water to drink” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

וְ⁠נִלְא֣וּ מִצְרַ֔יִם

Here, themselves refers back to the subject (the Egyptians) to indicated that the Egyptians are the object of the verb as well. Use a natural form in your language to show that the Egyptians are both subject and object. Alternate translation: “And the Egyptians will exhaust the Egyptians” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

מִן־הַ⁠יְאֹֽר

After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s commands ends. Depending on your decisions about the embedded quotation levels, you may have up to three levels of quotations that need to be closed here. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation and quotations within quotations. (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 7:19

עַֽל־נַהֲרֹתָ֣⁠ם ׀ עַל־יְאֹרֵי⁠הֶ֣ם וְ⁠עַל־אַגְמֵי⁠הֶ֗ם וְ⁠עַ֛ל כָּל־מִקְוֵ֥ה מֵימֵי⁠הֶ֖ם

This list is meant to expand on and reinforce the idea of all of the water in Egypt. You should translate the list in such a way that the locations of the blood are not limited to these specific places, but to imply universality. (See: Merism)

בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֣רֶץ

Alternate translation: “in every part of”

וּ⁠בָ⁠עֵצִ֖ים וּ⁠בָ⁠אֲבָנִֽים

This possessive show composition. Alternate translation: “and in containers made from wood and in containers made from stone” (See: Possession)

Exodus 7:20

בַּ⁠יְאֹ֔ר

If it would be helpful to your readers, the name of the river may be made explicit. Alternate translation: “in the Nile River” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה וּ⁠לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י עֲבָדָ֑י⁠ו

This means in their sight. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh and his servants” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 7:22

חַרְטֻמֵּ֥י

See how you translated this term in 7:11. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וַ⁠יֶּחֱזַ֤ק לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֙

Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). See how you translated this in Exodus 7:13. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: Metaphor)

כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה

Because Yahweh’s prediction precedes this event, some languages may need to place the reference to that prediction before the statement that it was fulfilled. See UST and how you translated this in 7:13, where the same sentence appears.

Exodus 7:23

וְ⁠לֹא־שָׁ֥ת לִבּ֖⁠וֹ גַּם־לָ⁠זֹֽאת

This is an idiom meaning Pharaoh did not think about the meaning of the miracle he had just seen. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And he did not consider what even this meant” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 7:24

כָל־מִצְרַ֛יִם

The word all here is a generalization that means “many.” At the least, the upper class would have sent their slaves to dig for them. However, it does indicate that all the Egyptians who wished to drink water had to dig or had to have dug for them. Alternate translation: “many of the Egyptians” (See: Hyperbole)

Exodus 7:25

וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֖א

A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֖א שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים

This means seven days later. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: Idiom)

שִׁבְעַ֣ת

Alternate translation: “7” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 8

Exodus 08 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• v. 1-15: Second plague: frogs
• v. 16-19: Third plague (first that magicians cannot imitate): gnats
• v. 20-32: Fourth plague: flies

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

• the exact insects in plagues 3-4 are not certain; translation teams will need to decide what insects they can use for each
• Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy, that is, he determines to be proud and resist Yahweh twice in this chapter
• the Israelites’ sacrifices are spoken of as an abomination to the Egyptians, but it is not specified how or why that is

Lifting up the hand and staff:

In the next few chapters, God will instruct Moses or Aaron or both to raise his hand or staff or both hand and staff. The narrative will then record who will raise his hand or staff or both. The instruction and the action do not always match exactly. God may say raise your hand, and the narrative may say that Moses raised his staff. These are not conflicting reports. Translators should understand that the hand and the staff are always understood together. They are one unit, and they can both be mentioned, or they can be mentioned separately. In each case, Moses or Aaron raises his hand with the staff in it. This fact is merely expressed differently.

Exodus 8:1

בֹּ֖א

This begins a direct quote that continues until the end of verse 4. (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה

This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See 4:intro for more information.

כֹּ֚ה

Here, Thus begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 4. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: Quotes within Quotes)

שַׁלַּ֥ח

This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 4. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. (See: Quotes within Quotes)

Exodus 8:2

לְ⁠שַׁלֵּ֑חַ

What Pharaoh is to let go is not specified, but “my people” or “the Israelites” are the understood object. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to let the Israelites go” (See: Ellipsis)

הִנֵּ֣ה

Here, behold is an interjection meant to focus the attention of the listener on what comes next, in this case a dire warning. Alternate translation: “look out”

Exodus 8:3

בְּ⁠בֵיתֶ֔⁠ךָ וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲדַ֥ר מִשְׁכָּבְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠עַל־מִטָּתֶ֑⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠בֵ֤ית עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠תַנּוּרֶ֖י⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠מִשְׁאֲרוֹתֶֽי⁠ךָ

This long list means “everywhere in Egypt.” It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that the frogs’ location is not limited to these specific places. The list should imply universality. (See: Merism)

Exodus 8:4

Up to three levels of quotes end at the end of this verse. Depending on how many levels you chose to mark as direct quotations, you should indicate them ending here with closing second-level (and third-level) quotation mark(s) or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations and quotations within a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 8:5

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ אֶל־מֹשֶׁה֒ אֱמֹ֣ר אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן

It may be helpful to translate this first quotation indirectly to avoid having two levels of quotations in this verse. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh told Moses to say to Aaron” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

נְטֵ֤ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠מַטֶּ֔⁠ךָ עַל־הַ֨⁠נְּהָרֹ֔ת עַל־הַ⁠יְאֹרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־הָ⁠אֲגַמִּ֑ים וְ⁠הַ֥עַל אֶת־הַֽ⁠צְפַרְדְּעִ֖ים עַל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם

This is a second-level direct quotation if you chose to make Say to Aaron a direct quotation. In that case, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level opening and closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation inside a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

יָדְ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠מַטֶּ֔⁠ךָ

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

עַל־הַ֨⁠נְּהָרֹ֔ת עַל־הַ⁠יְאֹרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־הָ⁠אֲגַמִּ֑ים

This list is meant to convey the idea of all the water in Egypt where frogs might live. You should translate the list in such a way that the locations are not limited to these specific places. The list should imply universality. This is made clear in 8:6. (See: Merism)

Exodus 8:6

וַ⁠יֵּ֤ט אַהֲרֹן֙

It is implied that Moses told Yahweh’s instructions to Aaron. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

יָד֔⁠וֹ

It is implied that Aaron was holding his staff as instructed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff. Alternate translation: “his hand holding his staff” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠יֵּ֤ט אַהֲרֹן֙ אֶת־יָד֔⁠וֹ עַ֖ל מֵימֵ֣י

Aaron would not have been able to reach his hand over all the water in Egypt. He likely stretched his hand over some nearby portion of the Nile, symbolizing all the water of Egypt. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. (See: Synecdoche)

וַ⁠תַּ֨עַל֙

Verse 3 has specified from where the frogs will come. Here it is implied, but if it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

הַ⁠צְּפַרְדֵּ֔עַ

There were so many frogs that the text uses the collective singular. If that would be misunderstood in your language, you may simply use the plural, as in the UST. (See: Collective Nouns)

וַ⁠תַּ֨עַל֙ הַ⁠צְּפַרְדֵּ֔עַ וַ⁠תְּכַ֖ס אֶת־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם

This means that there were frogs everywhere in Egypt. The image is like that of a blanket smothering the entire country. (Or more directly, like one giant, nation-sized frog sitting on top of the entire land). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 8:7

הַֽ⁠חֲרְטֻמִּ֖ים בְּ⁠לָטֵי⁠הֶ֑ם

See how you translated these in 7:11. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 8:8

וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֨א פַרְעֹ֜ה לְ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן

Alternate translation: “Then Pharaoh sent for Moses and Aaron” or “And the king summoned Moses and Aaron”

וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֨א פַרְעֹ֜ה לְ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙

It is implied that Moses and Aaron came to Pharaoh between the time when he called them and when he spoke to them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And Pharaoh called for Moses and for Aaron, and after they came, he said” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠יָסֵר֙ הַֽ⁠צְפַרְדְּעִ֔ים מִמֶּ֖⁠נִּי וּ⁠מֵֽ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י

In some languages you may have to make the content of Pharaoh’s prayer to Yahweh a direct quote. Note that this will make it a second-level quotation and you will need to mark it with second-level quotation markings if your language uses them. Alternate translation: “to Yahweh saying, ‘Please take away the frogs from Pharaoh and from his people.’ ” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

וַ⁠אֲשַׁלְּחָה֙ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֔ם וְ⁠יִזְבְּח֖וּ לַ⁠יהוָֽה

This promise is conditional on the frogs going away. Use a natural form in your language for hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Once the frogs are gone, I will let the people go, and they may sacrifice to Yahweh” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

Exodus 8:9

הִתְפָּאֵ֣ר עָלַ⁠י֒

Moses speaks with false humility here. He is ironically pointing out Pharaoh’s powerlessness before Yahweh. Alternate translation: “You can choose” (See: Irony)

לְ⁠ךָ֗ וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וּֽ⁠לְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֔…מִמְּ⁠ךָ֖ וּ⁠מִ⁠בָּתֶּ֑י⁠ךָ

These lists mean “for everyone” and “from everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that Moses will ask for a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: Merism)

Exodus 8:10

לְמַ֣עַן תֵּדַ֔ע כִּי־אֵ֖ין כַּ⁠יהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ

This knowledge is the goal of Yahweh’s granting a respite from the frogs. In some languages you may need to place this at the end of verse 11, after Moses says the frogs will leave. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ

Here, our refers to the Israelites’ God, excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Exodus 8:11

מִמְּ⁠ךָ֙ וּ⁠מִ⁠בָּ֣תֶּ֔י⁠ךָ וּ⁠מֵ⁠עֲבָדֶ֖י⁠ךָ וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמֶּ֑⁠ךָ

This list means “from everywhere and everyone” (in Egypt). This shows that the end of the plague will be as complete as was its extent. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: Merism)

Exodus 8:12

שָׂ֥ם

Alternate translation: “Yahweh had set”

וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א מֹשֶׁ֛ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֖ן

A minor scene shift occurs here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Exodus 8:13

מִן־הַ⁠בָּתִּ֥ים מִן־הַ⁠חֲצֵרֹ֖ת וּ⁠מִן־הַ⁠שָּׂדֹֽת

This list means “from everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that there was a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: Merism)

Exodus 8:14

חֳמָרִ֣ם חֳמָרִ֑ם

Literally, the Hebrew says “piles piles.” Repetition is used in Hebrew to emphasize how many or how big the piles of frogs were.

Exodus 8:15

וְ⁠הַכְבֵּד֙ אֶת־לִבּ֔⁠וֹ

Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own heart heavy. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in Exodus 7:14, but note there that the state of Pharaoh’s heart is reported, whereas here Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: Metaphor)

כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה

Alternate translation: “just as Yahweh had said Pharaoh would do”

Exodus 8:16

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮

A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the start of the third plague sequence. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ אֶל־מֹשֶׁה֒ אֱמֹר֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן

Say to Aaron starts a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. However, it may be helpful to translate one of the parts as an indirect quotation so that you do not have to have two levels of quotations here. See the UST. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh told Moses to tell Aaron” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

נְטֵ֣ה אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠הַ֖ךְ

This is one action or motion, but it is described with the two verbs that occur throughout this section of plague judgment.

מַטְּ⁠ךָ֔

This refers to Aaron’s staff. See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

לְ⁠כִנִּ֖ם

We do not know exactly what this word means. It is probably a tiny (as in dust-particle size), biting insect. You should choose a different insect here than the one in the next plague (8:21-8:31). (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 8:17

וַ⁠יֵּט֩ אַהֲרֹ֨ן אֶת־יָד֤⁠וֹ בְ⁠מַטֵּ֨⁠הוּ֙ וַ⁠יַּךְ֙ אֶת־עֲפַ֣ר הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ

Again, this is one action or motion, but it is described with the two verbs, stretched and struck, that occur throughout this section of plague judgment. See how you translated it in the previous verse.

יָד֤⁠וֹ בְ⁠מַטֵּ֨⁠הוּ֙

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

הַ⁠כִּנָּ֔ם…כִנִּ֖ים

Again, we do not know what this term refers to for certain, so see how you translated it in 8:16. (See: Translate Unknowns)

בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם

Here man includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See the UST. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

כָּל־עֲפַ֥ר הָ⁠אָ֛רֶץ…בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם

This extraordinary statement with the repeated all is used to emphasize the extent and severity of the plague. If this would be unnatural in your language use a natural way to communicate that. (See: Hyperbole)

Exodus 8:18

הַ⁠חַרְטֻמִּ֧ים בְּ⁠לָטֵי⁠הֶ֛ם

See how you translated these in 7:11. (See: Translate Unknowns)

הַ⁠כִּנִּ֖ים…הַ⁠כִּנָּ֔ם

See how you translated this term in 8:16. (See: Translate Unknowns)

בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם

Here man includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See UST. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Exodus 8:19

הַֽ⁠חַרְטֻמִּים֙

See how you translated this term in 7:11. (See: Translate Unknowns)

אֶצְבַּ֥ע אֱלֹהִ֖ים הִ֑וא

The words “finger of God” represent the power of God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This is the powerful work of God” (See: Synecdoche)

וַ⁠יֶּחֱזַ֤ק לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֙

Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in Exodus 7:13. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: Metaphor)

אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֔ם

Here, them may refer to the magicians or to Aaron and Moses. Alternate translation: “to the magicians’ warning” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה

Some languages will need to place this before the thing that Yahweh predicted, as in the UST.

Exodus 8:20

וְ⁠הִתְיַצֵּב֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה

Alternate translation: “and present yourself to Pharaoh”

וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה

A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the fourth plague sequence. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה

Here, face figuratively means the presence of a person. (See: Metonymy)

הִנֵּ֖ה

Behold is used to draw attention to important information that is next. In some languages and translation styles, it will make the most sense to omit this, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully”

כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה

This phrase opens a direct quote that continues until the end of verse 23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. However, you may also consider making the opening portion an indirect quote so that you do not have a quote inside of a quote for the next verses. Alternate translation: “that Yahweh says” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה

This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See 4:intro for more information.

שַׁלַּ֥ח

This phrase opens a second-level direct quotation which continues until the end of verse 23, unless you made thus says Yahweh an indirect quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֻֽ⁠נִי

This is the purpose of the people being let go. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternate translation: “so they can serve me” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Exodus 8:21

הִנְ⁠נִי֩

The expression behold me! is used to draw attention to important information that is next. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully”

הֶ⁠עָרֹ֑ב…הֶ֣⁠עָרֹ֔ב

Here, the swarm is a collective singular noun that refers to a great number of flying, biting insects traveling in a group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “swarms of flies” (See: Collective Nouns)

הֶ⁠עָרֹ֑ב…הֶ֣⁠עָרֹ֔ב

Here, the swarm probably refers to the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. (See: Translate Unknowns)

בְּ⁠ךָ֜ וּ⁠בַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֧י⁠ךָ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֛ וּ⁠בְ⁠בָתֶּ֖י⁠ךָ…בָּתֵּ֤י מִצְרַ֨יִם֙…וְ⁠גַ֥ם הָ⁠אֲדָמָ֖ה

This long list means “everywhere in Egypt.” It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that the flies’ location is not limited to these specific places but is understood to imply universality. (See: Merism)

Exodus 8:22

לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֥י הֱיֽוֹת־שָׁ֖ם עָרֹ֑ב

This is the goal of Yahweh treating the land of Goshen differently. Alternate translation: “by keeping the swarm from there” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

עָרֹ֑ב

This is a collective singular noun that refers to a great number of swarming, biting insects. See how you translated this in 8:21. Alternate translation: “swarms of flies” (See: Collective Nouns)

עָרֹ֑ב

These are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in 8:21 (See: Translate Unknowns)

לְמַ֣עַן תֵּדַ֔ע כִּ֛י אֲנִ֥י יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠קֶ֥רֶב הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ

This is the goal of treating the Israelites differently. In some languages you may need to put this phrase the beginning of the verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

אֲנִ֥י יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠קֶ֥רֶב הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ

Here, am could be connecting I and Yahweh or it could be connecting I, Yahweh and in the middle of the land. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am in the middle of the land”

Exodus 8:23

פְדֻ֔ת

This is a noun derived from a verb meaning “to buy back.” Very broadly, it can mean “to save or rescue.” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of redemption, you could express the same idea in another way. See the next note regarding textual variants for more information. (See: Abstract Nouns)

פְדֻ֔ת

Many translations follow the Septuagint here, which uses the word “division.” A minor change to the Hebrew would also produce the word translated “treat differently” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “a division” (See: Textual Variants)

עַמִּ֖⁠י

Yahweh’s people, that is, the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites”

עַמֶּ֑⁠ךָ

Pharaoh’s people, that is, the Egyptians. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians”

לְ⁠מָחָ֥ר יִהְיֶ֖ה הָ⁠אֹ֥ת הַ⁠זֶּֽה׃

After this phrase, the three levels of direct quotations of Yahweh that started in 8:20 ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing first-level, second-level, and third-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations. You may not have three levels if you made any level an indirect quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 8:24

וַ⁠יַּ֤עַשׂ יְהוָה֙ כֵּ֔ן

The UST supplies a brief sentence filling in the gap between Yahweh’s command to Moses and the onset of the plague. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly to make the progression of events clear. Alternate translation: “Moses obeyed the instructions Yahweh gave him, and Pharaoh responded as Yahweh had said he would. And Yahweh did so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠יַּ֤עַשׂ יְהוָה֙ כֵּ֔ן

There is a minor scene change here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

עָרֹ֣ב

There are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in 8:21 (See: Translate Unknowns)

וַ⁠יָּבֹא֙

Some languages may need to translate this as “going” rather than “coming.” Alternate translation: “and … went” (See: Go and Come)

בֵּ֥יתָ⁠ה פַרְעֹ֖ה וּ⁠בֵ֣ית עֲבָדָ֑י⁠ו

This means “to everyone everywhere” (in Egypt), as made explicit in the next statement. This makes clear that the insects were throughout the land. You should translate this in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: Merism)

תִּשָּׁחֵ֥ת הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠פְּנֵ֥י הֶ⁠עָרֹֽב

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The swarms of flies devastated the land” (See: Active or Passive)

מִ⁠פְּנֵ֥י הֶ⁠עָרֹֽב

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of the insects. Alternate translation: “because the insects were everywhere” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 8:25

וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֣א

This happened during the plague. (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

לֵֽ⁠אלֹהֵי⁠כֶ֖ם

Here, your is plural. It could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) if your team decides it means Moses and Aaron; otherwise use a plural form. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 8:26

תּוֹעֲבַ֣ת מִצְרַ֔יִם…תּוֹעֲבַ֥ת מִצְרַ֛יִם

We do not know what about their sacrificing was an abomination to the Egyptians. The same term is used in Genesis 43:32 and 46:34 to describe the Egyptians’ feelings about eating with Hebrews and about the Hebrew profession of shepherding, respectively. Translators should attempt to convey the strong negative feelings that would be provoked in the Egyptians without speculating as to the cause.

נִזְבַּ֖ח…אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ…נִזְבַּ֞ח…יִסְקְלֻֽ⁠נוּ

Here, we, our, and us should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and the Egyptians are not included. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִסְקְלֻֽ⁠נוּ

Moses asks this question to show Pharaoh that the Egyptians would not allow the Israelites to worship Yahweh by making a sacrifice repugnant to them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “they will certainly stone us!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

לְ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֖ם

The express before their eyes is a figurative way of saying “where they can see.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in their sight” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 8:27

נֵלֵ֖ךְ…וְ⁠זָבַ֨חְנוּ֙…אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ…אֵלֵֽי⁠נוּ

Here, we, our, and us should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and his people are not included. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Exodus 8:28

אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙…אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶם֙…תַרְחִ֖יקוּ

If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙

Alternate translation: “the Israelites”

הַרְחֵ֥ק…תַרְחִ֖יקוּ

In Hebrew, far is repeated to emphasize (with not) that they are absolutely not to go too far. If your language does not use repeating words like this, express the emphasis in another way. (See: Idiom)

Exodus 8:29

הִנֵּ֨ה

Behold is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation. Alternate translation: “Know this”

הֶ⁠עָרֹ֗ב

These are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in 8:21 (See: Translate Unknowns)

מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֛ה…פַּרְעֹה֙

Moses may be using the third person to refer to Pharaoh to show respect, because the king appears to be relenting. If use of the third person is not a way of showing respect in your culture or is not a valid way of addressing an individual at all, you may need to change the form. Alternate translation: “from you … you” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֛ה מֵ⁠עֲבָדָ֥י⁠ו וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמּ֖⁠וֹ

This list means “from everywhere and everyone” (in Egypt). This shows that the end of the plague will be as complete as its extent. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: Merism)

אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל לְ⁠בִלְתִּי֙ שַׁלַּ֣ח אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֔ם

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “you must begin to deal truthfully with us and let our people go” (See: Double Negatives)

רַ֗ק אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל

Alternate translation: “But you must not deceive us” or “But you must not lie to us”

Exodus 8:30

וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א מֹשֶׁ֖ה

There is a minor scene shift here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Exodus 8:31

הֶ⁠עָרֹ֔ב

These are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in 8:21 (See: Translate Unknowns)

מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֖ה מֵ⁠עֲבָדָ֣י⁠ו וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמּ֑⁠וֹ

This list means “from everyone and everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that there was a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: Merism)

לֹ֥א נִשְׁאַ֖ר אֶחָֽד

This extreme statement emphasizes how thoroughly Yahweh removed the insects from the land. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that emphasizes thoroughness or complete lack of the swarm. Alternate translation: “There was not a single one of these insects left in the whole land” (See: Hyperbole)

Exodus 8:32

וַ⁠יַּכְבֵּ֤ד פַּרְעֹה֙ אֶת־לִבּ֔⁠וֹ

Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own heart heavy. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in 8:15. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 9

Exodus 09 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• v. 1-7: Fifth plague (first that does not affect Israelites): disease kills livestock
• v. 8-12: Sixth plague: boils
• v. 13-35: Seventh plague: hail
• v. 27-35: Pharaoh seems to repent, but it does not last

Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

• animals are affected in both the fifth and seventh plagues, in the fifth, the word is specifically related to domestic animals (livestock) while the word used in the seventh is more general

Exodus 9:1

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙

A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the fifth plague sequence. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה

After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of 9:4 and contains two additional levels of quotes. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

וְ⁠דִבַּרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים

You may want to translate the second-level quotation beginning with Thus says Yahweh as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “and say to him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, says” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙

This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See 4:intro for more information.

עַמִּ֖⁠י

Alternate translation: “the Israelites”

Exodus 9:2

כִּ֛י אִם־מָאֵ֥ן אַתָּ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁלֵּ֑חַ וְ⁠עוֹדְ⁠ךָ֖ מַחֲזִ֥יק בָּֽ⁠ם

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “If you continue refusing to let them go” (See: Parallelism)

Exodus 9:3

הִנֵּ֨ה

The word behold is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternate translation: “look out”

יַד־יְהוָ֜ה הוֹיָ֗ה בְּ⁠מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֙

Here, hand represents Yahweh’s power to afflict their animals with disease. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Then the power of Yahweh will afflict your livestock” (See: Metonymy)

יַד־יְהוָ֜ה

This is part of the reported speech that Yahweh wants Moses to say to Pharaoh. Therefore, you could change the third person the hand of Yahweh to first person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “My hand” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

בְּ⁠מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֙

While the word your here is not plural, the next verse shows that it refers to all the people of Egypt who owned cattle. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, you may want to use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

בַּ⁠סּוּסִ֤ים בַּֽ⁠חֲמֹרִים֙ בַּ⁠גְּמַלִּ֔ים בַּ⁠בָּקָ֖ר וּ⁠בַ⁠צֹּ֑אן

This long list is meant to reinforce the universal effects of the coming plague. It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that it is not limiting but is understood to imply universality. (See: Merism)

בַּ⁠בָּקָ֖ר…וּ⁠בַ⁠צֹּ֑אן

These (cattle and flock) are collective singular nouns which refer to groups of animals. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “on your bulls and cows and on your sheep and goats” (See: Collective Nouns)

כָּבֵ֥ד

Here the plague is spoken of as if it weighed a lot. This means it would be very bad. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “severe” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 9:4

יְהוָ֔ה

This is part of the reported speech that Yahweh wants Moses to say to Pharaoh. Therefore, you could change the third person Yahweh to first person if it would be clearer in your language. You should do the same as you did in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל

Here, Israel refers to the Israelites. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people” (See: Metonymy)

יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל

Here, Israel is used as a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people” (See: Collective Nouns)

מִקְנֵ֣ה מִצְרָ֑יִם

Here, Egypt refers to the Egyptians. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the livestock of the Egyptian people” (See: Metonymy)

דָּבָֽר

Alternate translation: “animal”

מִ⁠כָּל־לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל

Alternate translation: “which belongs to any of the sons of Israel”

Exodus 9:5

וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם יְהוָ֖ה מוֹעֵ֣ד

Alternate translation: “And Yahweh made an appointed time”

לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר

This marks the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted in translation if your language does not use a similar form. However, in this sentence it is the only verb related to speech, so you may need to translate it similarly to the way the UST does.

יְהוָ֛ה

Yahweh is speaking here. Therefore, you could change the third person Yahweh to first person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh,” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 9:6

וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ יְהוָ֜ה

It is implied that Moses went and spoke to Pharaoh as directed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses did as Yahweh had commanded. And Yahweh did” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

כֹּ֖ל מִקְנֵ֣ה

This is exaggerated to emphasize the seriousness of the event. There were still some animals alive that were afflicted by later plagues. However, it may be best to translate this with the word “all.” (See: Hyperbole)

מִצְרָ֑יִם

Here, Egypt refers to the Egyptians. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptian peoples’” (See: Metonymy)

וּ⁠מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֹא־מֵ֥ת אֶחָֽד

Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “But every single one of the Israelites’ livestock lived” (See: Litotes)

Exodus 9:7

וְ⁠הִנֵּ֗ה

Again, behold is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternate translation: “and listen”

לֹא־מֵ֛ת מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל עַד־אֶחָ֑ד

Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “every single one of the Israelites’ livestock was alive” (See: Litotes)

יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל

Here, Israel refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “of the Israelites” (See: Metonymy)

יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל

Here, Israel is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: Collective Nouns)

וַ⁠יִּכְבַּד֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה

Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were heavy. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). See how you translated this in Exodus 7:14. Alternate translation: “But Pharaoh was defiant” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 9:8

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮

A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the start of the sixth plague scene. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

לָ⁠כֶם֙…חָפְנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם

You and your refer to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use dual form (if you have one) or plural forms (if not) here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

קְח֤וּ לָ⁠כֶם֙ מְלֹ֣א חָפְנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם

Alternate translation: “Each of you fill both your hands with”

פִּ֖יחַ כִּבְשָׁ֑ן

Alternate translation: “ash from a furnace” or “ash produced by a furnace”

פִּ֖יחַ

Here, ash is singular. For some languages you may need to make it plural as in the UST. (See: Collective Nouns)

הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֖יְמָ⁠ה

Alternate translation: “toward the sky”

לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י פַרְעֹֽה

The phrase before the eyes of Pharaoh means in his sight. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh” or “so Pharaoh sees it” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 9:9

לִ⁠שְׁחִ֥ין פֹּרֵ֛חַ אֲבַעְבֻּעֹ֖ת

To have boils means to have a condition where the skin is red, hot, and painful, the skin breaks open, and puss and blood come out. (See: Translate Unknowns)

הָ⁠אָדָ֜ם

Here, man includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See UST. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Exodus 9:10

פִּ֣יחַ

Here, ash is singular. For some languages you may need to make it plural as in the UST. See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: Collective Nouns)

פִּ֣יחַ הַ⁠כִּבְשָׁ֗ן

Alternate translation: “ash from a furnace” or “ash produced by a furnace” See how you translated this in the previous verse.

וַ⁠יַּֽעַמְדוּ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה

Here, before the face of Pharaoh means in Pharaoh’s presence. Alternate translation: “and stood in Pharaoh’s presence” or “and stood in the presence of Pharaoh” See how you translated a similar statement in the previous verse. (See: Metonymy)

הַ⁠שָּׁמָ֑יְמָ⁠ה

Alternate translation: “toward the sky” See how you translated this in the previous verse.

שְׁחִין֙ אֲבַעְבֻּעֹ֔ת פֹּרֵ֕חַ

To have boils means to have a condition where the skin is red, hot, and painful, the skin breaks open, and puss and blood come out. See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: Translate Unknowns)

בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם

Here, man includes women and children. See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Exodus 9:11

הַֽ⁠חַרְטֻמִּ֗ים…בַּֽ⁠חֲרְטֻמִּ֖ם

See how you translated magicians in 7:11.

לַ⁠עֲמֹ֛ד לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י מֹשֶׁ֖ה

Here, before the face of means in Moses’ presence. Alternate translation: “to stand in Moses’ presence” (See: Metonymy)

מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֑ין

Here, the face of means the presence of or perhaps pain from the boils. Alternate translation: “because of the boils” (See: Metonymy)

הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֑ין…הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֔ין

To have boils means to have a condition where the skin is red, hot, and painful, the skin breaks open, and puss and blood come out. See how you translated this in 9:9. However, this time only boils is used, without the description (“bursting blisters”) that is in the previous two verses. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 9:12

וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה

This phrase means that it was God who made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in 4:21. Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 9:13

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה

A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the seventh plague sequence. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וְ⁠הִתְיַצֵּ֖ב לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֑ה

Here, before the face of means in Pharaoh’s presence. Alternate translation: “and stand in Pharaoh’s presence” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים

After and say to him, a second-level quote begins which continues until the end of 9:19. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. However, it may be useful to translate this short quote frame as an indirect quotation, as the UST does. (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙

This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See 4:intro for more information.

Exodus 9:14

כִּ֣י

Here it is implied that Pharaoh will again not let God’s people go. For is expressing the result, that is, God’s response to Pharaoh’s disobedience to the command immediately preceding. You may need to insert this as in the UST or choose a contrastive conjunction. Alternate translation: “Otherwise,” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

אֲנִ֨י שֹׁלֵ֜חַ אֶת־כָּל־מַגֵּפֹתַ⁠י֙ אֶֽל־לִבְּ⁠ךָ֔

Here, to your heart is a synecdoche that means that even Pharaoh will be hurt by the plagues. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am about to send all my plagues against you personally” (See: Synecdoche)

Exodus 9:15

כִּ֤י עַתָּה֙ שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠אֶֽת־עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠דָּ֑בֶר וַ⁠תִּכָּחֵ֖ד מִן־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ

This verse presents two things that God could have done but did not do to the Egyptians. This is to set up the reason he gives in the next verse. Be sure that it is clear in your translation that these are hypothetical past events. See the note regarding Yahweh’s stated goals in the next verse. Some languages may need to reverse the order of these verses to put Yahweh’s goals before his non-action. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. (See: Hypothetical Situations)

שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛

Here, my hand refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “I could have used my power to attack you” (See: Metonymy)

וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠אֶֽת־עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠דָּ֑בֶר

Here, a plague is spoken about as if it were something that could be used to hit someone. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and caused you and your people to suffer from a plague” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 9:16

וְ⁠אוּלָ֗ם בַּ⁠עֲב֥וּר זֹאת֙ הֶעֱמַדְתִּ֔י⁠ךָ בַּ⁠עֲב֖וּר הַרְאֹתְ⁠ךָ֣ אֶת־כֹּחִ֑⁠י וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ׃

The statements from to show to the end of the verse are Yahweh’s stated goals, and thus, his reasons for not yet destroying Egypt and Pharaoh. You will need to translate, However, for this reason I appointed you: in order in a way that connects with the previous verse in an action-goal manner. (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ

Here, my name represents Yahweh’s reputation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and so that people everywhere will know who I am” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 9:17

עוֹדְ⁠ךָ֖ מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל בְּ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י

Pharaoh’s opposition to letting the Israelites go to worship Yahweh is spoken of as if he were raising himself up as a barrier to them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You are still blocking my people” (See: Metaphor)

מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל

Here, Pharaoh is both the subject and object of the sentence. Translate this in a way that conveys that (1) Pharaoh is making Pharaoh (himself) proud and (2) this is metaphorically expressed as Pharaoh making Pharaoh (himself) the obstacle in the Israelites’ way to freedom (as discussed in the previous note.) (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל

Here, you is Pharaoh.

בְּ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י

Here, my people are the Israelites.

Exodus 9:18

הִנְ⁠נִ֤י

Alternate translation: “Pay attention to the important thing I am about to tell you”

כָּ⁠עֵ֣ת…אֲשֶׁ֨ר לֹא־הָיָ֤ה כָמֹ֨⁠הוּ֙

Alternate translation: “at this time. There has never been anything like this”

Exodus 9:19

שְׁלַ֤ח הָעֵז֙ אֶֽת־מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠אֵ֛ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֥ר לְ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠שָּׂדֶ֑ה

The form of address here is singular; Moses is speaking directly to Pharaoh. However, the next two verses make it clear that Pharaoh’s servants heard and understood this warning to be for them as well. In this sense Pharaoh represents the Egyptians. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠יָרַ֧ד עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֛ם הַ⁠בָּרָ֖ד

Alternate translation: “and the balls of ice will drop on”

כָּל־הָ⁠אָדָ֨ם

Here, man means humans and includes men, women, and children. Alternate translation: “everyone” or “anyone” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

וְ⁠הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֜ה

Here, and beast includes domestic and wild animals.

וָ⁠מֵֽתוּ

The people and animals will die because they will be fatally injured by the hail. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the hail will kill them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וָ⁠מֵֽתוּ

Up to three levels of direct quotation (depending on your earlier decision about converting a level to an indirect quotation) end at the end of this verse. You should indicate that ending here with closing first-level, second-level, and third-level (if required) quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations within quotations. (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 9:20

הַ⁠יָּרֵא֙

As in some other occasions, Moses’ conversation with Pharaoh is not recorded. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the fact that he did as Yahweh instructed explicitly. See the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

הַ⁠יָּרֵא֙ אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה מֵֽ⁠עַבְדֵ֖י פַּרְעֹ֑ה

Here, the word of Yahweh refers to Yahweh’s warning, more broadly it means they believed that Yahweh would do what he threatened. Alternate translation: “Those of Pharaoh’s servants who feared Yahweh’s warning”

Exodus 9:21

וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־שָׂ֛ם לִבּ֖⁠וֹ אֶל

Here, set his heart means he believed or thought something was true. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “but whoever did not respect” (See: Metaphor)

דְּבַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה

Here, the word of Yahweh refers to Yahweh’s warning, more broadly it means they did not believe that Yahweh would do what he threatened. Alternate translation: “Yahweh’s warning” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 9:22

וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה

A minor scene shift occurs here and may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

הָ⁠אָדָ֣ם

Here, man includes women and children. See the UST. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֗ה

Here, beast includes domestic and wild animals.

Exodus 9:23

מַטֵּ⁠הוּ֮

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

Exodus 9:25

מֵ⁠אָדָ֖ם וְ⁠עַד־בְּהֵמָ֑ה

Here, from man to beast is a figure of speech used to emphasize the extent and severity of the hail. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “every living thing” (See: Merism)

מֵ⁠אָדָ֖ם

Here, man includes women and children. Alternate translation: “from people” or “from mankind” or “from humans” See UST. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

בְּהֵמָ֑ה

Here, beast includes domestic and wild animals.

Exodus 9:27

וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֣ח פַּרְעֹ֗ה

A minor scene shift occurs here and may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

חָטָ֣אתִי

Some commentators suggest translating sinned more literally, that is “missed the mark,” because Pharaoh is probably not admitting a moral failure, but instead, admitting that he misjudged.

הַ⁠צַּדִּ֔יק…הָ⁠רְשָׁעִֽים

Many commentators suggest that Pharaoh is using these terms in a narrow, legal sense and only referring to this instance. That is, he is saying something like “I’ve lost this round in court.” See UST.

וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י

Here, my people refers to the Egyptians.

Exodus 9:28

וְ⁠לֹ֥א תֹסִפ֖וּ⁠ן לַ⁠עֲמֹֽד

Here Pharaoh uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “really, I will let you go”(See: Litotes)

Exodus 9:29

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר אֵלָי⁠ו֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה

Alternate translation: “And Moses said to Pharaoh”

אֶפְרֹ֥שׂ אֶת־כַּפַּ֖⁠י אֶל־יְהוָ֑ה

This symbolic gesture accompanies prayer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will pray to Yahweh” (See: Symbolic Action)

Exodus 9:30

וְ⁠אַתָּ֖ה וַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֑י⁠ךָ

This phrase is shifted to the beginning of the sentence to mark focus on Pharaoh and his servants because, despite Yahweh demonstrating his power, they are not yet afraid of him. If your language has a form or discourse feature that draws contrastive focus to participants, use it here. (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י יְהוָ֥ה

Here, face means presence or power. Alternate translation: “of Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 9:31

0

This and the next verse give background information so that the destruction caused by the later plagues can be understood by the reader. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

וְ⁠הַ⁠פִּשְׁתָּ֥ה…וְ⁠הַ⁠פִּשְׁתָּ֖ה

Flax is a plant that produces fibers that can be made into linen cloth. (See: Translate Unknowns)

אָבִ֔יב

This means the seeds at the top of the barley stalk were developing but still green. (See: Translate Unknowns)

גִּבְעֹֽל

Alternate translation: “was flowering”

Exodus 9:32

וְ⁠הַ⁠כֻּסֶּ֖מֶת

Spelt is a kind of wheat. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 9:33

וַ⁠יִּפְרֹ֥שׂ כַּפָּ֖י⁠ו אֶל־יְהוָ֑ה

This symbolic gesture accompanies prayer. See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 9:29. Alternate translation: “lifted up his hands toward Yahweh and prayed” (See: Symbolic Action)

Exodus 9:34

וַ⁠יַּכְבֵּ֥ד לִבּ֖⁠וֹ

Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own heart heavy. This time his servants do the same. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in 8:15. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: Metaphor)

וַ⁠יֹּ֣סֶף לַ⁠חֲטֹ֑א

This statement is from the author’s perspective. Therefore, unlike in 9:27, sin should be translated with the word your language uses for “sin.”

וַ⁠יַּכְבֵּ֥ד לִבּ֖⁠וֹ ה֥וּא וַ⁠עֲבָדָֽי⁠ו

Alternate translation: “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did also” or “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did the same”

Exodus 9:35

וַֽ⁠יֶּחֱזַק֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה

Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in Exodus 7:13. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: Metaphor)

כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶֽׁה

This is similar to 9:12. In this case, what Yahweh said is figuratively spoken of as if it were something that could be held in someone’s hand. This means that Moses delivered a message from Yahweh that Pharaoh would be stubborn. It is not clear if this message was given to the Israelites or if this refers to Moses’ statement to Pharaoh in 9:30. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “just as Yahweh had told Moses to say” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 10

Exodus 10 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

The text does not specify, but some time seems to have passed between chapters nine and ten (see 9:31-32 and 10:5). - v. 1-20: Eighth plague: locusts - v. 16-20: Pharaoh seems to repent, but it does not last - v. 21-29: Ninth plague: darkness

Exodus 10:1

כִּֽי־אֲנִ֞י הִכְבַּ֤דְתִּי אֶת־לִבּ⁠וֹ֙ וְ⁠אֶת־לֵ֣ב עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו

This means God made Pharaoh and his servants stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their hearts were heavy. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in 4:21, but note that the metaphor is slightly different here. Alternate translation: “for I have caused Pharaoh and his servants to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 10:2

הִתְעַלַּ֨לְתִּי֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם

Alternate translation: “I mocked Egypt”

Exodus 10:3

וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו

After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until near the end of 10:6. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים

It may be helpful to turn the introductory quotation into an indirect quotation so that you do not have to use quotes within quotes. Alternate translation: “and told him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, said thus” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙

This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See 4:intro for more information.

עַד־מָתַ֣י מֵאַ֔נְתָּ לֵ⁠עָנֹ֖ת מִ⁠פָּנָ֑⁠י

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Particularly, it means the presence of his judgment (the plagues). Alternate translation: “Until when will you refuse to be humble when I judge you” or “Until when will you refuse to be humble before me” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 10:4

הִנְ⁠נִ֨י

Here, behold me adds emphasis to what is said next. Alternate translation: “beware”

אַרְבֶּ֖ה

Here, locust is a singular noun referring to the group as one. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 10:5

וְ⁠כִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ וְ⁠לֹ֥א יוּכַ֖ל לִ⁠רְאֹ֣ת אֶת־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ

These parallel statements have a similar meaning. They are used to emphasize the great number of locusts that are coming. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: Parallelism)

וְ⁠כִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ

Alternate translation: “And it will cover the land from sight”

וְ⁠כִסָּה֙…וְ⁠אָכַ֣ל…וְ⁠אָכַל֙

Here the pronoun it agrees in number with the collective singular “locust” in the previous verse. Insects are often referred to without gender in English, but you will need to use whatever number, gender, or noun class is required in your language to agree with the word for “locust” that you used in the previous verse. See the UST. (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 10:6

מִ⁠יּ֗וֹם הֱיוֹתָ⁠ם֙ עַל־הָ֣⁠אֲדָמָ֔ה עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה

Here, on the earth could either mean “on the planet” or “on the land” (Egypt). Either way, the entire phrase is meant to emphasize an extremely long time, with the intended meaning being “never.” (See: Hyperbole)

וַ⁠יִּ֥פֶן

Verse 3 says that Aaron came in to see the king with Moses. It is implied that he left with him as well. You may make this explicit if it would help your readers. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 10:7

עַד־מָתַי֙ יִהְיֶ֨ה זֶ֥ה לָ֨⁠נוּ֙ לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֔שׁ

Pharaoh’s servants ask this question to show Pharaoh that he is stubbornly causing the destruction of Egypt. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We must not let this man continue to cause trouble for us!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

הָ֣⁠אֲנָשִׁ֔ים

Here, men may be literal or it may refer to the Israelites, including the women and children. In verse 10 the king rejects the idea of letting the women and children go, and in verse 11 he specifically says that the men can go. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

הֲ⁠טֶ֣רֶם תֵּדַ֔ע כִּ֥י אָבְדָ֖ה מִצְרָֽיִם

Pharaoh’s servants ask this question to bring Pharaoh to recognize what he refuses to see. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should realize that Egypt is destroyed!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

כִּ֥י אָבְדָ֖ה מִצְרָֽיִם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that these plagues have destroyed Egypt” or “that their God has destroyed Egypt” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 10:8

וַ⁠יּוּשַׁ֞ב אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֤ה וְ⁠אֶֽת־אַהֲרֹן֙ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֔ה

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And a servant brought Moses and Aaron back to Pharaoh” (See: Active or Passive)

מִ֥י וָ⁠מִ֖י

Alternate translation: “Who all”

Exodus 10:9

נֵלֵ֑ךְ…נֵלֵ֔ךְ

We means the Israelites and does not include Pharaoh or the Egyptians. Use an exclusive form here if your language has this distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Exodus 10:10

יְהִ֨י כֵ֤ן יְהוָה֙ עִמָּ⁠כֶ֔ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר אֲשַׁלַּ֥ח אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠אֶֽת־טַפְּ⁠כֶ֑ם

May Yahweh be with you is usually a blessing but is almost certainly not a blessing here. It likely means something like “It will take Yahweh’s power to make me let you and your children go,” or “May Yahweh be as favorable to you as I am to the idea of letting your children go.” Pharaoh is saying that it will take Yahweh to make him do what Moses wants, but he does not think that will happen. Alternate translation: “It will be clear that Yahweh is with you if I let you and your children go”

רְא֕וּ כִּ֥י רָעָ֖ה נֶ֥גֶד פְּנֵי⁠כֶֽם

The phrase for evil is before your faces could either be a warning from Pharaoh that Moses’ actions will lead to evil for the Israelites, or it could mean that Pharaoh thinks the Israelites plan something that he considers evil. Faces is a metonym for the whole person. Alternate translations: “I see that you plan evil” or “Be careful! Your actions will have bad consequences” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 10:11

הַ⁠גְּבָרִים֙

This interjection clarifies who may go. Alternate translation: “the leaders”

מֵ⁠אֵ֖ת פְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹֽה

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of Pharaoh. Alternate translation: “from his presence” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 10:12

וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה

There is a minor scene change here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

יָדְ⁠ךָ֜

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

בָּֽ⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה

Locust is a collective singular noun referring to the group as one. See how you translated this in 10:4. Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: Collective Nouns)

וְ⁠יַ֖עַל…וְ⁠יֹאכַל֙

Here, the pronoun it agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in 10:5 (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 10:13

מַטֵּ⁠הוּ֮

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

ר֥וּחַ קָדִים֙

The wind blew from east to west.

הָ⁠אַרְבֶּֽה

See how you translated this in 10:4. Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 10:14

הָֽ⁠אַרְבֶּ֗ה…אַרְבֶּה֙

See how you translated this in 10:4. Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 10:15

וַ⁠יְכַ֞ס…וַ⁠יֹּ֜אכַל

Here the pronoun it agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in 10:5 (See: Collective Nouns)

וַ⁠יְכַ֞ס אֶת־עֵ֣ין כָּל־הָ⁠אָרֶץ֮

See how you translated this in 10:5.

וַ⁠יֹּ֜אכַל אֶת־כָּל־עֵ֣שֶׂב הָ⁠אָ֗רֶץ וְ⁠אֵת֙ כָּל־פְּרִ֣י הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוֹתִ֖יר הַ⁠בָּרָ֑ד וְ⁠לֹא־נוֹתַ֨ר כָּל־יֶ֧רֶק בָּ⁠עֵ֛ץ וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵ֥שֶׂב הַ⁠שָּׂדֶ֖ה בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם

These parallel statements reinforce one another. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: Parallelism)

Exodus 10:16

אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠לָ⁠כֶֽם

Here, you and your are plural. These could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 10:17

שָׂ֣א

Alternate translation: “take away”

אַ֣ךְ הַ⁠פַּ֔עַם…רַ֖ק

Pharaoh could either be desperate and using just this once … only to attempt to make his request as small as possible to increase the chances of it being granted, or he could be still too proud to admit guilt beyond this single incident (which is probably his bold statement about Yahweh being with the Israelites in 10:10). The former seems more likely given that he terms this plague “this death.” If your culture has a way of making a request seem as small as possible, you may want to use it to translate Pharaoh’s request.

אֱלֹהֵי⁠כֶ֑ם

Here, your is plural. This could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה

The word death here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people, because there would be no crops. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: Metonymy)

הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה

The word death here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people because there would be no crops. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this destruction that will lead to our deaths” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 10:18

וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֖א

Moses and Aaron were summoned to the king in 10:16, so some translations will need to say that they both left.

Exodus 10:19

רֽוּחַ־יָם֙ חָזָ֣ק מְאֹ֔ד

Alternate translation: “a very strong west wind” or “a very strong wind from the west”

וַ⁠יִּשָּׂא֙ אֶת־הָ֣⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה

Alternate translation: “and it moved the locust upward”

הָ֣⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה…אַרְבֶּ֣ה

See how you translated this in 10:4. Alternate translation: “the locusts … of the locusts” (See: Collective Nouns)

וַ⁠יִּתְקָעֵ֖⁠הוּ

Here, the first it refers to the wind; the second it agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in 10:5 (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 10:20

וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֥ק יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה

This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in 4:21. Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 10:21

וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה

A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. This is the start of the third plague sequence. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

מִצְרָ֑יִם וְ⁠יָמֵ֖שׁ חֹֽשֶׁךְ

This is a somewhat puzzling construction which describes the darkness. Most English translations take it as a passive, which restated actively means, “people will feel the darkness,” meaning metaphorically what is expressed in different ways in the UST and the alternate translation here. Another option is to view the Hebrew verb form as causative and translate as such: “and the darkness will cause people to feel,” meaning people will have to feel where they are going because they will not be able to see. A final option would be a personification of darkness such that the darkness gropes around, filling in every place in the land. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Egypt, an extremely oppressive darkness” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 10:22

יָד֖⁠וֹ

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת

Alternate translation: “for 3” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 10:23

לֹֽא־רָא֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ אֶת־אָחִ֗י⁠ו

This phrase means that people could not see the people who lived closest to them, whether or not that person was literally their brother. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “No one could see the people who lived with them” (See: Metonymy)

אִ֣ישׁ…אִ֥ישׁ

Here, man refers to any human in general. Alternate translation: “person” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת

Alternate translation: “for 3” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 10:24

לְכוּ֙ עִבְד֣וּ…צֹאנְ⁠כֶ֥ם וּ⁠בְקַרְ⁠כֶ֖ם…טַפְּ⁠כֶ֖ם…עִמָּ⁠כֶֽם

Every instance of you and your, as well as the imperative verb forms in this verse, are plural. They refer to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 10:25

גַּם־אַתָּ֛ה תִּתֵּ֥ן בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ זְבָחִ֣ים וְ⁠עֹל֑וֹת

The construction here is difficult. Based on context, Moses is probably not saying that Pharaoh needs to provide his own animals to the Israelites. He is asking Pharaoh to let the Israelites take their own animals with them. Give in our hands means to take with them, by whatever means, which may include holding a rope in the hand to lead the animals or any other means of herding the animals. See the UST. (See: Metonymy)

זְבָחִ֣ים וְ⁠עֹל֑וֹת

Here, sacrifices and burnt offerings refers to the animals of their flocks and herds that they must take. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “animals for sacrifices and burnt offerings” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠עָשִׂ֖ינוּ לַ⁠יהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ

Here, do means “do the sacrifices and burnt offerings.” Alternate translation: “and we will make those sacrifices and burnt offerings to Yahweh our God”

בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ…וְ⁠עָשִׂ֖ינוּ…אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ

Here, we and us refers to the Israelites (same group as the speaker’s) while excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians (listeners’ group). If your language distinguishes between forms of we and us based on who is included, be sure to use the one appropriate to the described group. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Exodus 10:26

מִקְנֵ֜⁠נוּ…עִמָּ֗⁠נוּ…נִקַּ֔ח…אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ וַ⁠אֲנַ֣חְנוּ…נֵדַ֗ע…נַּעֲבֹד֙…בֹּאֵ֖⁠נוּ

Here, we, our, and us each refers to the Israelites (same group as the speaker’s) while excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians (listeners’ group). If your language distinguishes between forms of we, our, and us based on who is included, be sure to use the one appropriate to the described group. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

לֹ֤א תִשָּׁאֵר֙ פַּרְסָ֔ה

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We cannot leave behind a single animal” (See: Active or Passive)

פַּרְסָ֔ה

Here the word hoof refers to the entire animal. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a single animal” (See: Synecdoche)

שָֽׁמָּ⁠ה

The destination is unspecified. Previous context suggests it would be at the mountain of God (see 3:1, especially 3:12, and 4:27), which would take three days of travel to reach (see 3:18 and 5:3).

Exodus 10:27

וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֥ק יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה

This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in 4:21. Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠לֹ֥א אָבָ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁלְּחָֽ⁠ם

Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh would not consent to let them go”

Exodus 10:28

הִשָּׁ֣מֶר לְ⁠ךָ֗

Here, the listener, Moses, is both the subject and object of the sentence. He is the person told to look (subject) and he himself is what he is told to look at (object). Different languages have different methods of marking this. Alternate translation: “You watch yourself” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

הִשָּׁ֣מֶר לְ⁠ךָ֗

This is an idiom. Pharaoh is not telling Moses literally to keep looking at himself. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: Idiom)

תָּמֽוּת

Pharaoh means he will have Moses killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

פָּנַ֔⁠י…פָנַ֖⁠י

Here, face refers to the whole person. See the UST. (See: Synecdoche)

Exodus 10:29

כֵּ֣ן דִּבַּ֑רְתָּ

With these words, Moses emphasizes that Pharaoh has spoken the truth. Alternate translation: “What you have said is true” (See: Idiom)

פָּנֶֽי⁠ךָ

Here, face refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “you” (See: Synecdoche)

Exodus 11

Exodus 11 General Notes

Structure and Formatting\r

Chapter 11 is a transition point in the book. The previous nine plagues (in their three sequences of three) have come to an end and the last plague, the death of the firstborn, is about to occur, along with the Passover and the Exodus itself. It is difficult to know if the events in chapter 11 all are recorded in the order in which they happened. For translation, you should follow the order of the text if it will not confuse your readers.

It may be helpful to think that after the end of chapter 10, Yahweh spoke to Moses immediately, before he actually left Pharaoh’s presence (v. 1-2). Verse 3 is a comment suggesting that the Egyptians will be willing to do as the Israelites are told to ask them to do in v. 2. In verses 4-7 Moses gives Pharaoh and his officials a message from Yahweh that Yahweh is giving to Moses right at that moment. At the end of v. 8 Moses leaves Pharaoh’s presence (completing the interaction from the end of ch. 10). Verse 9 may either be Yahweh telling Moses what is going to happen, or it could be part of the summary that occurs in v. 10. Verse 10 summarizes what has happened in chs. 5-10 (especially the plagues in chs. 7-10) in preparation for the great last plague.

Exodus 11:1

אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה

After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of 11:2. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

כְּ⁠שַׁ֨לְּח֔⁠וֹ…יְגָרֵ֥שׁ

These verbs (lets go and drive away) are meant to immediately follow one another. When you translate, make sure they are almost simultaneous in time; the letting go happens and then immediately the driving away happens. (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

כָּלָ֕ה גָּרֵ֛שׁ יְגָרֵ֥שׁ

The wording here is very forceful. Use strong words, forms, or phrasing when you are translating.

אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם…אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם

Each occurrence of the word you in this verse is plural and refers to Moses and the rest of the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 11:2

נָ֖א

Here, now conveys urgency, indicating that Moses should speak soon, without delaying for other things. If you have a way of giving a command that shows that it is important for someone to do it quickly, it would be better to translate in that way than in a way that means “now” in a time sense (versus earlier or later).

בְּ⁠אָזְנֵ֣י הָ⁠עָ֑ם

Alternate translation: “so the people hear you” or “when all the people are listening”

כְּלֵי־כֶ֖סֶף וּ⁠כְלֵ֥י זָהָֽב

These could be any sort of thing made from silver or gold (for instance: utensils, cups, pitchers, plates, candleholders), not just jewelry.

וְ⁠יִשְׁאֲל֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ׀ מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת רֵעֵ֗⁠הוּ וְ⁠אִשָּׁה֙ מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת רְעוּתָ֔⁠הּ כְּלֵי־כֶ֖סֶף וּ⁠כְלֵ֥י זָהָֽב

Exodus 3:22 contains similar instructions; see how you translated there.

Exodus 11:3

וַ⁠יִּתֵּ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־חֵ֥ן הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם גַּ֣ם׀ הָ⁠אִ֣ישׁ מֹשֶׁ֗ה גָּד֤וֹל מְאֹד֙ בְּ⁠אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י עַבְדֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הָ⁠עָֽם

In this verse the author interjects a comment about the situation. Some translations choose to put the verse in parenthesis to indicate this. You may mark it in a way that is natural to your language. (See: Aside)

חֵ֥ן הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם

Here, in the eyes of the Egyptians is an idiom for the Egyptian’s feelings or opinion. Favor means those feelings are positive. Taken together, this means that when the Egyptians see the Israelites leaving Egypt, they will gladly help them. (Because the Egyptians have suffered under God’s judgment, the Egyptians want so badly to see them leave). If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. See how you translated this in 3:21. (See: Idiom)

בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י עַבְדֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הָ⁠עָֽם

Here, in the eyes of the servants of Pharaoh and in the eyes of the people is an idiom for their feelings or opinions. If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. See how you translated a similar idiom in 3:21. (See: Idiom)

וַ⁠יִּתֵּ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־חֵ֥ן הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם

Exodus 3:21 contains a related phrase; see how you translated it there.

Exodus 11:4

כֹּ֖ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה

This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See 4:intro for more information.

Exodus 11:5

בְּכוֹר֮…מִ⁠בְּכ֤וֹר…בְּכ֣וֹר…בְּכ֥וֹר

The “firstborn” always refers to the oldest male offspring.

מִ⁠בְּכ֤וֹר פַּרְעֹה֙ הַ⁠יֹּשֵׁ֣ב עַל־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שִּׁפְחָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָ⁠רֵחָ֑יִם וְ⁠כֹ֖ל בְּכ֥וֹר בְּהֵמָֽה

This is a merism. First, two extremes are mentioned: the highest of society (Pharaoh, who sits on his throne) and the lowest (the slave girl who is behind the mill). Then the animals (beasts) are added making it a three-item list of parts of society and even the economy to show the totality of the coming judgment. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: Merism)

אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָ⁠רֵחָ֑יִם

Alternate translation: “who is grinding at the handmill” or “who is behind the handmill grinding grain”

Exodus 11:6

אֲשֶׁ֤ר כָּמֹ֨⁠הוּ֙ לֹ֣א נִהְיָ֔תָה וְ⁠כָמֹ֖⁠הוּ לֹ֥א תֹסִֽף

This phrase uses the extremes of past and future to emphasize the concept of “never.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “such as has never been and never will be” (See: Merism)

Exodus 11:7

לֹ֤א יֶֽחֱרַץ…לְשֹׁנ֔⁠וֹ

This means to make an unfriendly noise. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will not growl” (See: Idiom)

תֵּֽדְע֔וּ⁠ן

Here, you is plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

אֲשֶׁר֙ יַפְלֶ֣ה יְהוָ֔ה בֵּ֥ין מִצְרַ֖יִם וּ⁠בֵ֥ין יִשְׂרָאֵֽל

See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 9:4.

Exodus 11:8

וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּֽחֲוּוּ־לִ֣⁠י

This does not mean to bow for worshiping. They will bow to Moses to beg him to leave. They will do this to show how desperate they will be for Moses and the Israelites to go. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Symbolic Action)

וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּֽחֲוּוּ־לִ֣⁠י

They will bow to Moses to beg him to leave. They will do this to show how desperate they will be for Moses and the Israelites to go. If this action would not mean the same thing in your culture, you may need to make the reason they are bowing explicit. Alternate translation: “and they will bow down to me to beg” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עָ֣ם אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠רַגְלֶ֔י⁠ךָ

Here, the people are figuratively pictured as below Moses, which means they are his followers. The reference to feet also can mean they go the same place he goes, again, meaning “follower.” If your language uses a similar image to mean follower, you can translate the image; if not, you may use another image from your culture or translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “and all the people who are following you” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠אַחֲרֵי־כֵ֖ן אֵצֵ֑א

This means that Moses and the Israelites will leave Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “After that I will leave here” or “After that I will go out from Egypt” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בָּ⁠חֳרִי־אָֽף

This is an idiom meaning that Moses is angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “enraged” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 11:10

וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן עָשׂ֛וּ אֶת־כָּל־הַ⁠מֹּפְתִ֥ים הָ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֑ה וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה וְ⁠לֹֽא־שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ

This verse is summarizing and wrapping up the story of the plagues. If your language has a way of summarizing information at the end of a story, try to translate this verse (and possibly verse 9 - see the introductory notes to this chapter) in this way. (See: End of Story)

וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה

This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in 4:21. Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 12

Exodus 12 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

The events of this chapter are known as the Passover. They are remembered in the celebration of Passover. (See: Passover) 1. Instruction v. 1-28 * v. 1-20: Yahweh gives instructions * v. 1-11: how to eat this Passover * v. 12-13: description of the plague * v. 14-20: directions for future celebration of Passover * v. 21-28: Moses repeats Yahweh’s instructions to Israelites 2. Narrative v. 29-42: Passover and Exodus 3. Instruction v. 43-49: which foreigners may eat Passover 4. Summary Narrative v. 50-51

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Unleavened bread

The concept of unleavened bread is introduced in this chapter. Its significance stems from its connection to the events in this chapter. (See: unleavened bread)

Ethnic segregation

The Hebrew people were to be separate from the rest of the world. Because of this, they separated themselves from other people groups. At this time, these foreigners were looked upon as unholy. (See: holy, holiness, unholy, sacred)

Potential Translation Issues:

Passover

Pronoun usage

In the long quotation (verses 3-20) that Yahweh tells Moses and Aaron to convey to the Israelites, he speaks of them in the third person (“they must”) in verses 3–4 and verses 7–8 and to them in the second person (“you must”) for all the rest of the instruction. Some languages may need to keep the pronoun person consistent throughout the quotation.

You plural

In this chapter, almost every occurrence of “you” or “your” is plural. Each one refers to all the Israelites. Those that are not will be marked. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form throughout unless otherwise noted. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 12:2

הַ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם רֹ֣אשׁ חֳדָשִׁ֑ים

The start of this verse is the beginning of a direct quote which continues until the end of verse 20. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

הַ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם רֹ֣אשׁ חֳדָשִׁ֑ים רִאשׁ֥וֹן הוּא֙ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם לְ⁠חָדְשֵׁ֖י הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה

These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that the month in which the events of this chapter take place will be the beginning of their calendar year. (See: Parallelism)

רִאשׁ֥וֹן הוּא֙ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם לְ⁠חָדְשֵׁ֖י הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה

The first month of the Hebrew calendar includes the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. It marks when Yahweh rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote. (See: Hebrew Months)

Exodus 12:3

דַּבְּר֗וּ

The command here is to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses a different form if two are people addressed, use a dual form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

וְ⁠יִקְח֣וּ לָ⁠הֶ֗ם אִ֛ישׁ שֶׂ֥ה לְ⁠בֵית־אָבֹ֖ת שֶׂ֥ה לַ⁠בָּֽיִת

This seems to be indicating that if multiple families live in one house, the man who is the leader of the family group that lives there should take one lamb for that whole household. Alternate translation: “the father of each household must take a lamb for his household, one per household”

שֶׂ֥ה לַ⁠בָּֽיִת

Alternate translation: “one lamb per house”

שֶׂ֥ה…שֶׂ֥ה

The word lamb literally means “of the flock,” and it could also be translated as a sheep or a goat. Here, the ULT uses lamb (a young sheep), because verse 5 specifies that it must be one year old. “Kid” (a young goat) would be equally valid as verse 5 also says that it could be either a sheep or a goat. You may translate it as either sheep or goat, whichever would be most familiar.

Exodus 12:4

וְ⁠אִם־יִמְעַ֣ט הַ⁠בַּיִת֮ מִ⁠הְיֹ֣ת מִ⁠שֶּׂה֒

This means that there are not enough people in the family to eat an entire lamb. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If there are not enough people in the household to eat an entire lamb” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּ⁠שְׁכֵנ֛⁠וֹ הַ⁠קָּרֹ֥ב אֶל־בֵּית֖⁠וֹ בְּ⁠מִכְסַ֣ת נְפָשֹׁ֑ת

The phrase by the number of people helps to clarify which sort of neighbor near to his house the Israelite should choose. They should count their own household and another household and try to have a group that is the right number to eat an entire lamb. Alternate translation: “and his neighbor who lives near him and whose family is the right size to share a lamb with”

אִ֚ישׁ

Here man refers to each person, whether man, woman, or child. Alternate translation: “each family member” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Exodus 12:6

בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּֽיִם

This refers to the time of evening after the sun has set but while there is still some light.

Exodus 12:7

עַל־שְׁתֵּ֥י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֖ת וְ⁠עַל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁק֑וֹף עַ֚ל הַ⁠בָּ֣תִּ֔ים

Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house” or “on the top and sides of the frame around the door into the house”

Exodus 12:8

מְרֹרִ֖ים

These are edible but strong-tasting leaves, seeds, and other parts of plants.

Exodus 12:9

אַל־תֹּאכְל֤וּ מִמֶּ֨⁠נּוּ֙ נָ֔א

Alternate translation: “Do not eat the lamb or goat uncooked”

Exodus 12:11

חֲגֻרִ֔ים

Here, belts are strips of leather or fabric for tying around the waist.

וַ⁠אֲכַלְתֶּ֤ם אֹת⁠וֹ֙ בְּ⁠חִפָּז֔וֹן

Alternate translation: “And you must eat it quickly”

פֶּ֥סַח ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה

It refers to eating the animal on the tenth day of the month. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This observance is Yahweh’s Passover” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 12:12

וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־אֱלֹהֵ֥י מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֥ה שְׁפָטִ֖ים

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 12:13

לְ⁠מַשְׁחִ֔ית

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of destruction, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to destroy you” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִֽהְיֶ֨ה בָ⁠כֶ֥ם נֶ֨גֶף֙

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and I will not put the plague on you” (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם

Yahweh is going to strike the people and animals who live in the land of Egypt. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “on everything living in the land of Egypt” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 12:14

וְ⁠הָיָה֩ הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֤ה

Verses 14-20 are instructions for the Israelites’ future celebration of the Passover. If your language makes a distinction between near and far future events or between near and general commands, you may need to make clear that these verses primarily have a later application.

הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֤ה

Here, this day means the tenth day of the first month of every year. On this day every year, they must celebrate the Passover. (See: Hebrew Months)

Exodus 12:15

אַ֚ךְ

Alternate translation: “Surely” or “Indeed”

וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל

The metaphor cut off could mean: (1) the person must leave. Alternate translation: “he must be sent away” (2) the person is no longer an Israelite. Alternate translation: “he will no longer be considered to be one of the people of Israel” (3) the person must die. Alternate translation: “he must be killed” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל

As noted in the previous note, the metaphor cut off has at least three possible meanings. By whom that person will be cut off is not specified; it could be the Israelites or Yahweh. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The following alternate translations express those: (1) “the people of Israel must send him away” or (2) “I will no longer consider him to be one of the people of Israel” or (3) “the people of Israel must kill him” (See: Active or Passive)

מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל

Israel is a collective noun referring to the nation or people group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from the Israelites” (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 12:16

וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֤וֹם הָ⁠רִאשׁוֹן֙ מִקְרָא־קֹ֔דֶשׁ וּ⁠בַ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י מִקְרָא־קֹ֖דֶשׁ יִהְיֶ֣ה לָ⁠כֶ֑ם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And on the first day and on the seventh day, you shall have an assembly of holiness” (See: Active or Passive)

מִקְרָא־קֹ֔דֶשׁ…מִקְרָא־קֹ֖דֶשׁ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a holy assembly … a holy assembly” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֤וֹם הָ⁠רִאשׁוֹן֙…וּ⁠בַ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And on day one of the month … and on day seven of the month” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

כָּל־מְלָאכָה֙ לֹא־יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה בָ⁠הֶ֔ם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You will do no work on these days” (See: Active or Passive)

ה֥וּא לְ⁠בַדּ֖⁠וֹ יֵעָשֶׂ֥ה לָ⁠כֶֽם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which must be the only work that you do” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 12:17

צִבְאוֹתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם

The term hosts refers to a large group of people, often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in Exodus 6:26. Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 12:18

בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙…עַ֠ד י֣וֹם הָ⁠אֶחָ֧ד וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “In month one, on day fourteen … until day twenty-one of the month” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙…עַ֠ד י֣וֹם הָ⁠אֶחָ֧ד וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. (See: Ordinal Numbers)

בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙

This is the first month of the Hebrew calendar. The fourteenth day is near the beginning of April on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: Hebrew Months)

י֣וֹם הָ⁠אֶחָ֧ד וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ

This is near the middle of April on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: Hebrew Months)

Exodus 12:19

שְׂאֹ֕ר לֹ֥א יִמָּצֵ֖א בְּ⁠בָתֵּי⁠כֶ֑ם

This means there should not be any yeast in their houses. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Note that the UST more accurately conveys the meaning here, as the alternate translation in this note could be understood to mean that you must simply hide the yeast very well. Alternate translation: “Yahweh must not find any yeast in your houses” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מֵ⁠עֲדַ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל

See how you translated cut off in Exodus 12:15. (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מֵ⁠עֲדַ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל

See how you translated cut off in Exodus 12:15. (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 12:21

A new scene begins at this verse, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Exodus 12:22

אֲגֻדַּ֣ת אֵז֗וֹב

Hyssop is a woody plant with small leaves that can be used for sprinkling liquids by dipping the leaves in the liquid and then shaking them or brushing them over the target. If this plant is unknown, you can use a descriptor phrase. Alternate translation: “part of a plant with small branches and many leaves” (See: Translate Unknowns)

אֶל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁקוֹף֙ וְ⁠אֶל־שְׁתֵּ֣י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֔ת

Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house.” See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 12:7.

לֹ֥א…אִ֥ישׁ

Here, man includes women and children. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Exodus 12:23

וּ⁠פָסַ֤ח יְהוָה֙ עַל־הַ⁠פֶּ֔תַח

Here the word door implies the entire house. This means that God will spare the Israelites in houses with blood on the door frames. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh will pass over the house” (See: Synecdoche)

עַל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁק֔וֹף וְ⁠עַ֖ל שְׁתֵּ֣י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֑ת

Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house” See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 12:7.

Exodus 12:24

הַ⁠דָּבָ֣ר הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה

These words refer to the Passover or Festival of Unleavened Bread. Observing the Passover was an act of worshiping Yahweh.

לְ⁠ךָ֥ וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנֶ֖י⁠ךָ

Here, you and your are singular but they refer to the whole nation. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: Singular Pronouns that refer to Groups)

וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנֶ֖י⁠ךָ

Here, sons includes everyone. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Exodus 12:25

הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּֽאת

Here, this service refers to the Passover or Festival of Unleavened Bread. Observing the Passover was an act of worshiping Yahweh.

Exodus 12:26

בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֑ם

Here, your sons refers to all children, as in the UST. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם…מָ֛ה הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּ֖את לָ⁠כֶֽם

After you, a second-level quotation begins. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “to you what this ritual means to you,” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

Exodus 12:27

וְ⁠אֶת־בָּתֵּ֣י⁠נוּ הִצִּ֑יל

This means that Yahweh spared the Israelites’ firstborn sons. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “He did not kill the firstborn sons in our houses” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 12:28

כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֥ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֖ן כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ

Alternate translation: “everything that Yahweh told Moses and Aaron to do”

Exodus 12:29

The next few verses are the climax of this part of Exodus. A number of literary features mark it out. First, it is specially introduced with and so it happened, which is used to mark major breaks in the narrative. Second, it uses repetition: firstborn is repeated four times in verse 29 so that the reader cannot possibly miss what is happening. Night is repeated in verse 29, 30, and 31. Got up/get up is repeated in verse 30 and 31. In verses 31 and 32 “also” occurs five times (it is translated as “both” once in the ULT). Third, the places of both Pharaoh and the captive are elaborated on to slow the pace and create a vivid mental image for the reader. In verse 30 there is the listing of sorts of people who got up; note the use of the double negative for emphasis. Your translation should attempt to use the same or similar literary features of your own language that slow down the pace, create vivid imagery, and emphasize that this is a climax point.

מִ⁠בְּכֹ֤ר פַּרְעֹה֙ הַ⁠יֹּשֵׁ֣ב עַל־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֔י אֲשֶׁ֖ר בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠בּ֑וֹר וְ⁠כֹ֖ל בְּכ֥וֹר בְּהֵמָֽה

This phrase indicates that there was no person or household excluded from Yahweh’s judgment. It both speaks of extreme parts of society and then makes this into a list by including the animals. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the firstborn of Pharaoh who sits on the throne and the firstborn of the captive who was in the house of the pit and the firstborn of everyone in between was struck; even all the firstborn of the beasts were struck” (See: Merism)

בְּכוֹר֮…מִ⁠בְּכֹ֤ר…בְּכ֣וֹר…בְּכ֥וֹר

In these usages, firstborn always refers to the oldest male offspring. See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 11:5.

עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֔י אֲשֶׁ֖ר בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠בּ֑וֹר

Alternate translation: “to the firstborn of people in the house of the pit” This refers to prisoners in general and not to a specific person in prison.

Exodus 12:30

כִּֽי־אֵ֣ין בַּ֔יִת אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֵֽין־שָׁ֖ם מֵֽת׃

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “because someone was dead in every house” (See: Double Negatives)

Exodus 12:31

אַתֶּ֖ם…כְּ⁠דַבֶּרְ⁠כֶֽם

Here, Pharaoh speaking is to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses a different form if two are people addressed, use a dual form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 12:33

כֻּלָּ֥⁠נוּ מֵתִֽים

The Egyptians were afraid that they would die if the Israelites did not leave Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “We will all die if you do not leave” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 12:34

מִשְׁאֲרֹתָ֛⁠ם צְרֻרֹ֥ת בְּ⁠שִׂמְלֹתָ֖⁠ם עַל־שִׁכְמָֽ⁠ם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “They tied up their bread-making bowls in their clothes and placed them on their shoulders” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 12:36

אֶת־חֵ֥ן הָ⁠עָ֛ם בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י מִצְרַ֖יִם

Here, in the eyes of the Egyptians is an idiom for the Egyptian’s feelings or opinion. Favor means that those feelings are positive. Taken together, this means that when the Egyptians saw the Israelites leaving Egypt, they gladly helped them (because they wanted them to leave so badly due to the Egyptians suffering under God’s judgment). If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. See how you translated this in 3:21. (See: Idiom)

Exodus 12:37

מֵ⁠רַעְמְסֵ֖ס

Rameses was a major Egyptian city where grain was stored. See how you translated this in Exodus 1:11. (See: How to Translate Names)

כְּ⁠שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֨וֹת אֶ֧לֶף

Alternate translation: “about six hundred thousand” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 12:39

כִּֽי־גֹרְשׁ֣וּ מִ⁠מִּצְרַ֗יִם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Egyptians had driven them out of Egypt” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 12:40

שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים…וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת

Alternate translation: “four hundred thirty” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 12:41

שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים…וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת

Alternate translation: “four hundred thirty” (See: Numbers)

צִבְא֥וֹת

The term hosts refers to a large group of people, often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in Exodus 6:26. Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 12:42

לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה שִׁמֻּרִ֛ים לְ⁠כָל־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לְ⁠דֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם

Alternate translation: “for all the sons of Israel throughout their generations to observe for Yahweh”

Exodus 12:44

וְ⁠כָל־עֶ֥בֶד אִ֖ישׁ

Alternate translation: “But any slave of an Israelite”

וּ⁠מַלְתָּ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ אָ֖ז

This is a hypothetical situation. You will need to use whatever form your language uses to mark something as potentially true. (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

וּ⁠מַלְתָּ֣ה

Here you is singular. It refers to a specific man and his slave. It might make more sense to use the third person here. Alternate translation: “if he circumcised” (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

Exodus 12:46

בְּ⁠בַ֤יִת אֶחָד֙ יֵאָכֵ֔ל

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must eat it in one house” (See: Active or Passive)

לֹא־תוֹצִ֧יא

Here, you is singular, however it is used to address a crowd. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: Singular Pronouns that refer to Groups)

Exodus 12:48

וְ⁠כִֽי־יָג֨וּר אִתְּ⁠ךָ֜ גֵּ֗ר וְ⁠עָ֣שָׂה פֶסַח֮ לַ⁠יהוָה֒

This is a two-part hypothetical situation. It describes the circumstance and desire of the sojourner; the next portion says what he must do. You will need to use whatever form your language uses to mark something as potentially true. (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

אִתְּ⁠ךָ֜

Here, you is singular, however it is used to address a crowd. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: Singular Pronouns that refer to Groups)

הִמּ֧וֹל ל֣⁠וֹ כָל־זָכָ֗ר

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone must circumcise all males in his household” (See: Active or Passive)

הִמּ֧וֹל ל֣⁠וֹ כָל־זָכָ֗ר וְ⁠אָז֙ יִקְרַ֣ב לַ⁠עֲשֹׂת֔⁠וֹ

The sojourner will be circumcised in order to draw near to keep the Passover. Some languages may need to place the purpose clause first. Alternate translation: “in order draw near to keep it all his males must be circumcised” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

כְּ⁠אֶזְרַ֣ח הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ

Here, land refers to Canaan—which is the land that the Israelites will soon live in. The expression a native of the land means a person who is a native Israelite. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “those who are Israelites by birth” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠כָל־עָרֵ֖ל לֹֽא־יֹ֥אכַל בּֽ⁠וֹ

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “And only a circumcised person may eat it” (See: Double Negatives)

Exodus 12:51

וַ⁠יְהִ֕י בְּ⁠עֶ֖צֶם הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה

This phrase is used here to mark an important event in the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.

צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם

The term hosts refers to a large group of people often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in Exodus 6:26. Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 13

Exodus 13 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Instruction
   • v. 1-2: First mention of setting apart the firstborn
   • v. 3-10: Reiteration of the Passover instructions from 12:14-20 and 24-27, with a focus on telling to Yahweh’s deeds to the future generations of Israelites
   • v. 11-13: More details on setting apart the firstborn
   • v. 14-16: Reiteration of purpose: telling to future generations
2. Narrative
   
   • v. 17-22: Some details of the exodus

Special concepts in this chapter

• There are several concepts that will be important to understand and translate with care (some have already been encountered in Exodus). They are: set apart, sign, symbol, redemption, and sacrifice.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

• There are a number of names of people groups and places in this chapter. However, many have been translated in earlier passages.
• Transporting the bones of Joseph may be an unknown concept in some places.
• It may take some time to decide on a good translation for the pillars of fire and cloud that lead the Israelites.

Exodus 13:2

קַדֶּשׁ־לִ֨⁠י כָל־בְּכ֜וֹר פֶּ֤טֶר כָּל־רֶ֨חֶם֙ בִּ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם וּ⁠בַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֑ה לִ֖⁠י הֽוּא

This entire verse is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 13:3

מִ⁠בֵּ֣ית עֲבָדִ֔ים

Moses speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the place where you were slaves” (See: Metaphor)

בְּ⁠חֹ֣זֶק יָ֔ד

Here, hand refers to power. See how you translated “strong hand” in Exodus 6:1. (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠לֹ֥א יֵאָכֵ֖ל חָמֵֽץ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 13:4

הָ⁠אָבִֽיב

This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: Hebrew Months)

Exodus 13:5

וְ⁠הָיָ֣ה כִֽי־יְבִֽיאֲ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֡ה אֶל־אֶ֣רֶץ…וְ⁠עָבַדְתָּ֛ אֶת־הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּ֖את בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּֽה

When the Israelites live in Canaan, they must celebrate the Passover on this day each year. See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 12:25.

לַ⁠אֲבֹתֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙

Here, fathers figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “to your ancestors” (See: Metonymy)

אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ

The same description occurs in Exodus 3:8. See how you translated it there and in the several notes for it.

Exodus 13:6

שִׁבְעַ֥ת

Alternate translation: “7” (See: Numbers)

וּ⁠בַ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “and on day 7” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Exodus 13:7

מַצּוֹת֙ יֵֽאָכֵ֔ל

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must eat unleavened bread” (See: Active or Passive)

שִׁבְעַ֣ת

Alternate translation: “7” (See: Numbers)

וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָאֶ֨ה לְ⁠ךָ֜ חָמֵ֗ץ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you may not have any bread with yeast among you” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָאֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֛ שְׂאֹ֖ר

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You may not have any yeast” (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠כָל־גְּבֻלֶֽ⁠ךָ

Alternate translation: “inside any of the borders of your land”

Exodus 13:8

בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠ה֖וּא לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר בַּ⁠עֲב֣וּר זֶ֗ה עָשָׂ֤ה יְהוָה֙ לִ֔⁠י בְּ⁠צֵאתִ֖⁠י מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם

The quotation can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “on that day that this is because of what Yahweh did for you when you came out of Egypt” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

Exodus 13:9

וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לְ⁠ךָ֨ לְ⁠א֜וֹת עַל־יָדְ⁠ךָ֗ וּ⁠לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ

This phrase compares the Festival of Unleavened bread to two different types of physical reminders that help people not forget something important. (See: Parallelism)

לְ⁠ךָ֨ לְ⁠א֜וֹת עַל־יָדְ⁠ךָ֗

Moses speaks of celebrating the festival as if it were an object one could tie around their hands to remind them of what Yahweh had done. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like something you tie around your hand as a reminder” (See: Metaphor)

וּ⁠לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ

Moses speaks of celebrating the festival as if it were an object one could tie on their foreheads to remind them of what Yahweh had done. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and like something you tie around your head as a reminder” (See: Metaphor)

לְמַ֗עַן תִּהְיֶ֛ה תּוֹרַ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠פִ֑י⁠ךָ

Here, in your mouth refers to the words that they speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “so you may always be speaking of the law of Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

בְּ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה

Here, hand refers to power. See how you translated “strong hand” in Exodus 6:1. (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 13:10

מִ⁠יָּמִ֖ים יָמִֽימָ⁠ה

Alternate translation: “for all time” (See: Merism)

Exodus 13:11

וְ⁠לַֽ⁠אֲבֹתֶ֑י⁠ךָ

Here, fathers figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “to your ancestors” (See: Metonymy)

וּ⁠נְתָנָ֖⁠הּ לָֽ⁠ךְ

Alternate translation: “when he gives the land of the Canaanites to you”

Exodus 13:12

וְ⁠הַעֲבַרְתָּ֥

This is a deliberate word-play with Exodus 12:12 and Exodus 12:23 because these memorial sacrifices are to be reminders of what happened at the first Passover. It would be good to make a similar word-play in your translation, if possible, but following the meaning as in the UST is fine.

Exodus 13:13

בְ⁠שֶׂ֔ה…וַ⁠עֲרַפְתּ֑⁠וֹ

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make explicit that either the lamb or donkey must be killed, as in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה

Alternate translation: “you do not ransom the donkey”

Exodus 13:14

כִּֽי־יִשְׁאָלְ⁠ךָ֥ בִנְ⁠ךָ֛ מָחָ֖ר לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר מַה־זֹּ֑את וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֔י⁠ו

The first quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “when your son asks you later what this means, then you are to tell him” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

בְּ⁠חֹ֣זֶק יָ֗ד

Here, hand represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in Exodus 6:1. Alternate translation: “With his powerful works” (See: Metonymy)

מִ⁠בֵּ֥ית עֲבָדִֽים

Moses speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. See how you translated this in Exodus 13:3. Alternate translation: “from the place where you were slaves” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 13:15

כִּֽי־הִקְשָׁ֣ה פַרְעֹה֮ לְ⁠שַׁלְּחֵ⁠נוּ֒

If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This means he was stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he were hard. Alternate translation: “that when Pharaoh resisted letting us go” (See: Metaphor)

מִ⁠בְּכֹ֥ר אָדָ֖ם וְ⁠עַד־בְּכ֣וֹר בְּהֵמָ֑ה

This is a figure of speech used to emphasize the extent of the plague, nothing was exempt. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “whether he was a person or an animal” (See: Merism)

Exodus 13:16

וְ⁠הָיָ֤ה לְ⁠אוֹת֙ עַל־יָ֣דְ⁠כָ֔ה וּ⁠לְ⁠טוֹטָפֹ֖ת בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֑י⁠ךָ

This expresses two ways to remember the importance of the Passover event. See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 13:9. (See: Parallelism)

בְּ⁠חֹ֣זֶק יָ֔ד

Here, hand represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in Exodus 6:1. Alternate translation: “with his powerful works” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 13:17

Verses 17-19 provide background information about the Israelites process of leaving Egypt. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

וַ⁠יְהִ֗י

This marks the transition from instruction to narrative. You should mark the resumption of the narrative in a natural way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וְ⁠לֹא־נָחָ֣⁠ם אֱלֹהִ֗ים דֶּ֚רֶךְ אֶ֣רֶץ פְּלִשְׁתִּ֔ים כִּ֥י קָר֖וֹב ה֑וּא

The route on which God took the Israelites was not the expected route. In some languages you may need to put the portion that describes the expectation first. Alternate translation: “although it was nearby, God did not lead them by way of the land of the Philistines.” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

פֶּֽן־יִנָּחֵ֥ם הָ⁠עָ֛ם בִּ⁠רְאֹתָ֥⁠ם מִלְחָמָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁ֥בוּ מִצְרָֽיְמָ⁠ה

In some languages you may need to put the reason before the hypothetical result. Alternate translation: “When they see war, they may repent and return to Egypt” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

Exodus 13:18

וַ⁠חֲמֻשִׁ֛ים

The meaning of this term (by fives) is uncertain. Many English translations opt for something like “prepared for battle,” because this seems to be the meaning in Numbers 32:17 and the related verses in Joshua 1:14 and 4:12. Because of what the previous verse said about war, it may mean that they went out in formation—like an army would march—but perhaps not armed. Alternate translation: “And … in formation like an army”

Exodus 13:19

וַ⁠יִּקַּ֥ח מֹשֶׁ֛ה אֶת־עַצְמ֥וֹת יוֹסֵ֖ף עִמּ֑⁠וֹ

See Joshua 24:32 regarding the burial of Joseph’s bones.

פָּקֹ֨ד יִפְקֹ֤ד אֱלֹהִים֙ אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠הַעֲלִיתֶ֧ם אֶת־עַצְמֹתַ֛⁠י מִ⁠זֶּ֖ה אִתְּ⁠כֶֽם

This is an almost exact quote of what Joseph said in Genesis 50:25; reference your translation there when translating this.

Exodus 13:20

מִ⁠סֻּכֹּ֑ת וַ⁠יַּחֲנ֣וּ בְ⁠אֵתָ֔ם

Alternate translation: “from a place named Succoth, and they camped at a place named Etham”

בְ⁠אֵתָ֔ם

Etham was possibly located south of the route heading toward the Philistines, at the border of the wilderness. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 13:21

וַֽ⁠יהוָ֡ה הֹלֵךְ֩ לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֨ם

Here, before their faces means “in front of the people.” Alternate translation: “And Yahweh led them by going in front of them” (See: Metonymy)

בְּ⁠עַמּ֤וּד עָנָן֙…בְּ⁠עַמּ֥וּד אֵ֖שׁ

The possessive here indicates characteristic. The cloud and fire looked like a pillar. Alternate translation: “in a cloud that looked like a pillar … in a fire that looked like a pillar” or “in a pillar-shaped cloud … in a pillar-shaped fire”

לְ⁠הָאִ֣יר לָ⁠הֶ֑ם

Alternate translation: “to be light for them”

אֵ֖שׁ לְ⁠הָאִ֣יר לָ⁠הֶ֑ם לָ⁠לֶ֖כֶת יוֹמָ֥ם וָ⁠לָֽיְלָה

They could travel either by day or night because God provided light at night. You could reorder the cause and effect if that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fire. They could go by day or by night because he was light to them.” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 13:22

עַמּ֤וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ יוֹמָ֔ם וְ⁠עַמּ֥וּד הָ⁠אֵ֖שׁ לָ֑יְלָה

See how you translated this in 13:21.

לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י הָ⁠עָֽם

Here, from the face of the people means “from in front of the people” where they could see it. Alternate translation: “from where they could see it” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 14

Exodus 14 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

This whole chapter is the record of an important event in the history of Israel known as the “parting of the sea of reeds (Red Sea).” Throughout this chapter and chapter 15, the word “sea” is used. Exodus 13:18 and 15:22 show that this is the sea of reeds (Red Sea). Since the text does not explicitly say that though, the ULT will only say “sea.” In your translation, it may help people to be more specific than the text if just using “sea” is confusing.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Pharaoh’s chariots

These chariots were a fighting force. Pharaoh took an army to kill the Hebrew people. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Rhetorical Questions

The Israelites asked a few rhetorical questions of Moses. These questions were not really directed at Moses, but at Yahweh. This showed their lack of faith in Yahweh. (See: Rhetorical Question and faith)

Exodus 14:2

דַּבֵּר֮

This verse begins a direct quote which continues into verse 4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: Quote Markings)

פִּ֣י הַחִירֹ֔ת…מִגְדֹּ֖ל…בַּ֣עַל צְפֹ֔ן

These are locations on Egypt’s eastern border. (See: How to Translate Names)

בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵל֒ וְ⁠יָשֻׁ֗בוּ וְ⁠יַחֲנוּ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ פִּ֣י הַחִירֹ֔ת בֵּ֥ין מִגְדֹּ֖ל וּ⁠בֵ֣ין הַ⁠יָּ֑ם לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ בַּ֣עַל צְפֹ֔ן

The portion after that could be translated as a direct quotation. That would make a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the sons of Israel, ‘Turn and camp before the face of Pi Hahiroth, between Migdol and the sea, before the face of Baal Zephon.’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

תַחֲנ֖וּ

Here, you is plural and refers to Moses and the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 14:3

וְ⁠אָמַ֤ר פַּרְעֹה֙ לִ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל נְבֻכִ֥ים הֵ֖ם בָּ⁠אָ֑רֶץ סָגַ֥ר עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם הַ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh will say that the Israelites are confused in the land, and the wilderness has closed in on them” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

סָגַ֥ר עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם הַ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר

Pharaoh speaks of the wilderness as a person who has trapped the Israelites. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “It is as if the wilderness is closing in on them.” (See: Personification)

Exodus 14:4

וְ⁠חִזַּקְתִּ֣י אֶת־לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֮

This means God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in 4:21. Alternate translation: “But I will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠רָדַ֣ף אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶם֒

Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh will pursue the Israelites”

וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And people will glorify me” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ

Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh and to all his army” (See: Ellipsis)

וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂוּ־כֵֽן

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what they did explicitly. Alternate translation: “So the Israelites turned and camped as Yahweh had instructed them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 14:5

וַ⁠יֻּגַּד֙ לְ⁠מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then someone told the king of Egypt” (See: Active or Passive)

בָרַ֖ח

Alternate translation: “had run away”

וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם

Here, heart refers to their attitudes toward the Israelites. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants changed their attitude about the people” (See: Metonymy)

וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants turned their hearts to the people” (See: Active or Passive)

אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם

Alternate translation: “against the Israelites”

מַה־זֹּ֣את עָשִׂ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־שִׁלַּ֥חְנוּ אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠עָבְדֵֽ⁠נוּ

They asked this question to show they thought they had done a foolish thing. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We should not have let the Israelites go free from working for us!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל

This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 14:7

שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת

Alternate translation: “six hundred” (See: Numbers)

וְ⁠שָׁלִשִׁ֖ם

The precise meaning of this term is not known. Alternate translations: “and officers” or “and shield-bearers” or “and three men”

Exodus 14:8

וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֣ק יְהֹוָ֗ה אֶת־לֵ֤ב פַּרְעֹה֙

This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were “strong.” If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in 4:21. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

בְּ⁠יָ֥ד רָמָֽה

Alternate translation: “boldly” or “defiantly”

Exodus 14:9

כָּל־סוּס֙ רֶ֣כֶב פַּרְעֹ֔ה וּ⁠פָרָשָׁ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠חֵיל֑⁠וֹ

It is unclear exactly what the groupings are here. Horses of the chariots (probably meaning “horse-drawn chariots”) and horsemen could be two groups or two references to the same group. Army could mean another group, perhaps on foot (see 15:19), or it could be a summary grouping. Furthermore, most translations render horses of the chariots as “horses and chariots,” suggesting four total groups (possibly because of v. 23). Alternate translation: “all the horse-drawn chariots of Pharaoh and his horsemen and his foot soldiers”

אוֹתָ⁠ם֙

Here, them refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

פִּי֙ הַֽחִירֹ֔ת…בַּ֥עַל צְפֹֽן

These are places on Egypt’s eastern border. See how you translated them in Exodus 14:2. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 14:10

וּ⁠פַרְעֹ֖ה הִקְרִ֑יב

Here, Pharaoh represents the entire Egyptian army. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Then Pharaoh and his army approached” (See: Synecdoche)

וַ⁠יִּשְׂאוּ֩ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֨ל אֶת־עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֜ם

Alternate translation: “and the sons of Israel looked up” or “and the sons of Israel looked back”

וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה

Here, behold is used to draw attention to alarming information that follows. Use a word, phrase, or structure in your language that indicates that the next information is very alarming.

Exodus 14:11

הַֽ⁠מִ⁠בְּלִ֤י אֵין־קְבָרִים֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם לְקַחְתָּ֖⁠נוּ לָ⁠מ֣וּת בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֑ר

The Israelites ask this question to express their frustration and fear of dying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There were plenty of graveyards in Egypt for us to be buried in. You did not have to take us into the wilderness to die!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

מַה־זֹּאת֙ עָשִׂ֣יתָ לָּ֔⁠נוּ לְ⁠הוֹצִיאָ֖⁠נוּ מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם

The Israelites ask this question to rebuke Moses for bringing them to the desert to die. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have endangered us like this by bringing us out of Egypt!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Exodus 14:12

הֲ⁠לֹא־זֶ֣ה הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר אֲשֶׁר֩ דִּבַּ֨רְנוּ אֵלֶ֤י⁠ךָ בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙

The Israelites ask this question to emphasize that this is what they had told Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is exactly what we told you while we were in Egypt” (See: Rhetorical Question)

בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר חֲדַ֥ל מִמֶּ֖⁠נּוּ וְ⁠נַֽעַבְדָ֣ה אֶת־מִצְרָ֑יִם

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the portion following saying as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “in Egypt? We told you to leave us alone so we could serve the Egyptians.” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Exodus 14:13

וּ⁠רְאוּ֙ אֶת־יְשׁוּעַ֣ת יְהוָ֔ה אֲשֶׁר־יַעֲשֶׂ֥ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם הַ⁠יּ֑וֹם

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and see what Yahweh will do for you today, he will save you” (See: Abstract Nouns)

לֹ֥א תֹסִ֛יפוּ לִ⁠רְאֹתָ֥⁠ם ע֖וֹד עַד־עוֹלָֽם

This statement is very extended for emphasis on its certainty. Alternate translation: “you will not see them again forever”

Exodus 14:14

יְהוָ֖ה יִלָּחֵ֣ם

The form Yahweh himself emphasizes what Yahweh will do in contrast to what the Israelites will do. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “As for Yahweh, he will fight” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

תַּחֲרִישֽׁוּ⁠ן

Here, silent could mean “still.” The Israelites’ lack of action is in contrast to Yahweh’s fighting. It is not a total lack of motion or sound. Alternate translation: “you will not fight”

Exodus 14:15

מַה־תִּצְעַ֖ק אֵלָ֑⁠י

Moses apparently had been praying to God for help, so God uses this question to compel Moses to act. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not call out to me any longer, Moses.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Exodus 14:16

הָרֵ֣ם אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֗ וּ⁠נְטֵ֧ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֛

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding hand and staff.

וּ⁠בְקָעֵ֑⁠הוּ

Alternate translation: “and divide the sea into two parts”

Exodus 14:17

וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י הִנְ⁠נִ֤י

Here, behold me is an expression meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. In this case, Yahweh is drawing attention to his next actions. Alternate translation: “Look at what I will do”

מְחַזֵּק֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב מִצְרַ֔יִם

This means that God will make them stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their hearts were “strong.” If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in 4:21. Alternate translation: “I will cause the Egyptians to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠יָבֹ֖אוּ אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶ֑ם

Alternate translation: “so that the Egyptians will go into the sea after the Israelites”

וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו

Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 4 Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh, all his army, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: Ellipsis)

וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And people will glorify me” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 14:18

בְּ⁠הִכָּבְדִ֣⁠י

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when I cause people to glorify me” (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠הִכָּבְדִ֣⁠י בְּ⁠פַרְעֹ֔ה בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו

Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 4 Alternate translation: “when I get glory because of what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” or “when I show my glory by what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: Ellipsis)

Exodus 14:19

לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ מַחֲנֵ֣ה…מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם

Here, face means “front.” Alternate translation: “in front of the camp of … from in front of them” (See: Metonymy)

עַמּ֤וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙

See how you translated this in 13:21.

יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל

This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 14:20

יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל

This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: Collective Nouns)

וַ⁠יְהִ֤י הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁךְ וַ⁠יָּ֖אֶר אֶת־הַ⁠לָּ֑יְלָה

Alternate translation: “And the cloud became dark on one side and light on the other side all night”

Exodus 14:21

וַ⁠יֵּ֨ט מֹשֶׁ֣ה אֶת־יָד⁠וֹ֮ עַל־הַ⁠יָּם֒

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

בְּ⁠ר֨וּחַ קָדִ֤ים

An east wind originates in the east and blows towards the west.

וַ⁠יִּבָּקְע֖וּ הַ⁠מָּֽיִם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh divided the waters” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 14:24

בְּ⁠אַשְׁמֹ֣רֶת הַ⁠בֹּ֔קֶר

This is the last third of the night. It is approximately the three hours before sunrise. Alternate translation: “very early in the morning” or “in the time before the sun rises” (See: Translate Unknowns)

בְּ⁠עַמּ֥וּד אֵ֖שׁ וְ⁠עָנָ֑ן

See how you translated this in 13:21.

מַחֲנֵ֣ה מִצְרַ֔יִם…מַחֲנֵ֥ה מִצְרָֽיִם

Alternate translation: “the army of the Egyptians … the army of the Egyptians”

Exodus 14:25

מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל

Here, the face of Israel means the presence of Israel. See the UST. (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 14:26

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֑ם וְ⁠יָשֻׁ֤בוּ הַ⁠מַּ֨יִם֙ עַל־מִצְרַ֔יִם עַל־רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠עַל־פָּרָשָֽׁי⁠ו׃

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Yahweh told Moses to reach out with his hand over the sea so that the waters would come back onto the Egyptians, their chariots, and their horsemen.” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֑ם

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

עַל־רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠עַל־פָּרָשָֽׁי⁠ו

Here, his refers to Pharaoh, king of Egypt. Alternate translation: “on Pharaoh’s chariots and on Pharaoh’s horsemen” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 14:27

וַ⁠יֵּט֩ מֹשֶׁ֨ה אֶת־יָד֜⁠וֹ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֗ם

See note in the introduction to chapter 8 regarding the hand and staff.

לִ⁠פְנ֥וֹת בֹּ֨קֶר֙

Here, before the face of means “before the occurrence of.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “before it was morning” (See: Metonymy)

וַ⁠יְנַעֵ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מִצְרַ֖יִם בְּ⁠ת֥וֹךְ הַ⁠יָּֽם

Here, Yahweh is pictured as acting toward the Egyptians as if they were dirt or dust on his clothing that he shakes to be rid of them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh threw the Egyptians back into the middle of the sea” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 14:28

לֹֽא־נִשְׁאַ֥ר בָּ⁠הֶ֖ם עַד־אֶחָֽד

This negative statement is meant to strongly convey the idea that all the Egyptians were gone. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Every one of them was gone” (See: Litotes)

Exodus 14:30

יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל

This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: Collective Nouns)

מִ⁠יַּ֣ד מִצְרָ֑יִם

Here, hand refers to power. Alternate translation: “from the Egyptians’ power” (See: Metonymy)

עַל־שְׂפַ֥ת הַ⁠יָּֽם

Alternate translation: “on the land along the edge of the sea”

Exodus 14:31

יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל

This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: Collective Nouns)

אֶת־הַ⁠יָּ֣ד הַ⁠גְּדֹלָ֗ה

Here, hand refers to power. Alternate translation: “the great power” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 15

Exodus 15 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Verses 1b-18 and 21b of chapter 15 are poetry. They are a song of praise to Yahweh because he defeated and destroyed the Egyptian army (Exodus 14:26-28). Translating poetry should be done by someone who is a skilled poet in the target language. Because the forms of poetry are so different in different languages, a translation that is good poetry in the target language may seem very different from the original poem. The structure may look quite different. The poet will be well served by looking at the entire poem from multiple perspectives. He will need to know the meaning of the poem, the themes and discourse structure of the poem, and the feelings that the poem is supposed to create in the reader at each point (UST, tNotes). He will need to understand how that was accomplished by the original form and structure (ULT). Then he will need to compose the translated poem using forms and structures that have the same or similar meaning, themes, discourse elements, and feelings in his own language. Unlike in many other places, most notes in this chapter will not advise towards expressing meaning in non-figurative ways or combining parallel phrases as that advice would be too simplistic for handling poetry.

Structure

This song follows a basic AB structure which is given to us in verse 1b-c and 21b-c:

• A - praise to Yahweh - he is magnificent (expressed in various words)
• B - because he defeats our enemies

The song can be divided into three major sections, each of which is patterned as: AB(a)b. Each section starts with an AB portion which is characterized by fewer verbal forms (especially the A portion). The section then elaborates on each. Note that there are other possible analyses of the structure of the poem.

Here is an outline of the structure according to this model:

• Section 1 (see alternate breakdown below):
• 1b: A “Let me sing to Yahweh, for he has triumphantly triumphed;”
• 1c: B “the horse and the one riding it he threw into the sea.”
• 2-3: a
• 4-5: b
• Section 2:
• 6a: A
• 6b: B
• 7a: a “And in the abundance of your majesty”
• 7a-10: b “you overthrow those who rise up against you … ”
• Section 3:
• 11: A
• 12: B
• 13a: a (possibly) “In your covenant loyalty”
• 13a-17: b
• 18: finale

Alternate breakdown of section 1: it is possible to view 1b-c as the introduction and divide verse 2 such that:

• 2a: A “Yah is my strength and my song”
• 2b: B “and he has become my salvation”
• 2c-3: a
• 4-5: b

Themes:

There are several images and themes that are throughout the song as well as some that are throughout an individual section.

• “High” versus “low”: Yahweh is high, while his enemies are low.
• The following words are all related to the idea of being high or rising up: triumph (v1), exalt (v2), majestic (v6, v11), majesty (v7), and the mountain of \[Yahweh’s\] possession (v17). In the last case, Yahweh’s people are brought to a high place with him.
• In contrast, his enemies are low. Note in verse 7, Yahweh overthrows those who rise up against \[him\]. Ideas of being low are as follows: sank (v4, v10), deeps (v5), descended into the depths (v5), melted away (v15), and fall on them (v16).
• The strength of Yahweh in verses 2, 6, and 13.
• The effectiveness of Yahweh’s hand versus the enemy’s hand. Yahweh’s hand (and arm) is effective in verses 6, 12, 16, and 17 but the enemy’s hand is ineffective despite his boasting in verse 9.
• There is parallel imagery near the end of each section. The enemy is compared three times by simile to a heavy, inert object. In verses 5 and 16 that is a stone, in verse 10 that is lead.
• More parallel imagery occurs at the end of sections one (v5) and two (v10): that of the enemy sinking in the water and being covered by it.
• In sections two and three the water (v8) and the other peoples (v16) are made still by Yahweh.
• Section two begins and ends with majestic (v6, v10) and that word is picked up in the beginning of section three (v11).
• In section two (v9), the enemies seek to dispossess (or disinherit) the Israelites; in section three (v16), the Israelites come to live in the land of Yahweh’s possession (or inheritance).
• In verse 11, three themes for the third section are introduced. These are each expanded on in that section.
• Holiness occurs again in verses 13 and 16
• Fear is vividly described in verses 14-16 (shake, terror, panic, trembling, melted away, dread)
• Yahweh does miracles to protect and build a home for his people
• Verses 14-16a are a chiasm, a complex parallel structure where concepts are repeated in reverse order:
• A: 14a: peoples (nations) become afraid
• B: 14b: inhabitants of Philistia are afraid
• C: 15a: rulers of Edom are afraid
• C’: 15b: rulers of Moab are afraid
• B’: 15c: inhabitants of Canaan are afraid
• A’: 16a: people become afraid
• In section three, there is another parallel structure:
• v13: you led this people => v16: your people pass by
• v13: this people you redeemed => v16: this people you acquired (or purchased or ransomed)
• v13: you led them to the home => v17: you will bring them … \[to\] the place … you made
• v13: of your holiness => v17: the Holy Place

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The Israelite’s discontent

In verse 24 the word murmur is introduced for the first time. This is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers.

Yahweh’s laws

In verses 24-26, there is an introductory revelation of the requirement that Israel keep the covenant by obeying the law of Moses. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God and reveal, revealed, revelation)

Exodus 15:1

גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly over whom Yahweh triumphed. Alternate translation: “he has achieved a glorious victory over the army of Egypt” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה

Alternate translation: “he is highly exalted” or “he is extremely high” or “he is exaltedly exalted”

ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ רָמָ֥ה בַ⁠יָּֽם

Moses sang about God causing the sea to cover and drown the horse and rider as if God had thrown them into the sea. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he has made the horse and rider drown in the sea” (See: Metaphor)

ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ

This refers to many or all of the Egyptian horses and riders that were chasing the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the horses and their riders” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ

Here, rider could either refer to a person who sits on a horse or who travels in a chariot that a horse is pulling.

Exodus 15:2

עָזִּ֤⁠י…יָ֔הּ

Moses is expressing the help that he gets from Yahweh by equating Yahweh with strength. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh’s strengthening help. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yah is the one who gives me strength” or “Yah is the strong one who protects me” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠זִמְרָת֙ יָ֔הּ

Moses calls Yahweh his song because Yahweh is the one he sings about or because Yahweh causes him to sing. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh being a song of joy. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yah is … the one I sing about” or “Yah … makes me sing joyfully” (See: Metaphor)

וַֽ⁠יְהִי־לִ֖⁠י לִֽ⁠ישׁוּעָ֑ה

Moses calls Yahweh his salvation because Yahweh saved him. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh’s saving power. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and he has saved me” or “and he is the one who saves me” (See: Metaphor)

זֶ֤ה אֵלִ⁠י֙ וְ⁠אַנְוֵ֔⁠הוּ אֱלֹהֵ֥י אָבִ֖⁠י וַ⁠אֲרֹמְמֶֽ⁠נְהוּ

These lines are expressing very similar ideas for emphasis. If that is a normal way to make an emphatic (poetic) statement or if it would be understood in your language, you can translate in a similar way. If, however, repetition like this would create a different meaning, find a structure in your language that would fit. (See: Parallelism)

Exodus 15:3

יְהוָ֖ה אִ֣ישׁ מִלְחָמָ֑ה

Moses calls Yahweh a man of war because he powerfully fought against the Egyptians and won. Alternate translation: “Yahweh is like a warrior” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 15:4

מַרְכְּבֹ֥ת פַּרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠חֵיל֖⁠וֹ יָרָ֣ה בַ⁠יָּ֑ם וּ⁠מִבְחַ֥ר שָֽׁלִשָׁ֖י⁠ו טֻבְּע֥וּ בְ⁠יַם־סֽוּף

These lines are synonymous parallels where the second strengthens what is said in the first. Alternate translation: “He threw all of Pharaoh’s army into the sea, including the chariots; even his chosen officers sank in the sea of reeds” (See: Parallelism)

מַרְכְּבֹ֥ת פַּרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠חֵיל֖⁠וֹ יָרָ֣ה בַ⁠יָּ֑ם

Moses sings about Yahweh causing the sea to cover Pharaoh’s chariots and army as if Yahweh had thrown them into the sea. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “He has made Pharaoh’s chariot riders and army drown in the sea” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 15:5

תְּהֹמֹ֖ת יְכַסְיֻ֑⁠מוּ יָרְד֥וּ בִ⁠מְצוֹלֹ֖ת כְּמוֹ־אָֽבֶן׃

These lines are synonymous parallels where the second clarifies what is said in the first. Alternate translation: “The deeps covered them because they had descended into the depths like a stone” (See: Parallelism)

יָרְד֥וּ בִ⁠מְצוֹלֹ֖ת כְּמוֹ־אָֽבֶן

This comparison is that just like a stone does not float but sinks to the bottom of the sea, the enemy soldiers sank to the bottom of the sea. Alternate translation: “they went down into the deep water like a stone sinking to the bottom of the sea” (See: Simile)

Exodus 15:6

יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּ⁠כֹּ֑חַ יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב׃

These lines are synonymous parallels where the second takes the abstract idea in the first and makes it concrete (though still with poetic imagery). Alternate translation: “Yahweh, you show how majestic in power your right hand is by shattering the enemy” (See: Parallelism)

יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּ⁠כֹּ֑חַ יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב

Moses speaks of Yahweh as if Yahweh had hands. The right hand refers to Yahweh’s power or the things Yahweh does powerfully. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, your power is glorious; Yahweh, your power has shattered the enemy” or “Yahweh, what you do is gloriously powerful; Yahweh, by your power you have shattered the enemy” (See: Metonymy)

תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב

Moses speaks of the enemy as if it were fragile and could be shattered like glass or pottery. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “completely destroys the enemy” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 15:7

תַּהֲרֹ֣ס קָמֶ֑י⁠ךָ תְּשַׁלַּח֙ חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔ יֹאכְלֵ֖⁠מוֹ כַּ⁠קַּֽשׁ

These lines are synonymous parallels where the second takes the abstract idea in the first portion (you overthrow those who rise up against you) and makes it concrete (though still with poetic imagery). Alternate translation: “you overthrow those who rise up against you by sending out your heat to devour them like stubble” (See: Parallelism)

וּ⁠בְ⁠רֹ֥ב גְּאוֹנְ⁠ךָ֖

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of abundance and majesty, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You are abundantly majestic and” or “Because you are abundantly majestic,” (See: Abstract Nouns)

קָמֶ֑י⁠ךָ

Rebelling against Yahweh is spoken of as rising up against him. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “those who rebel against you” or “your enemies” (See: Metaphor)

חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔

Alternate translation: “your wrath” or “your fury”

תְּשַׁלַּח֙ חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔

Moses speaks of Yahweh’s wrath (literally heat) as if it were a servant that Yahweh sent out to do something. Alternate translation: “You show your wrath” or “You act according to your wrath” (See: Personification)

יֹאכְלֵ֖⁠מוֹ כַּ⁠קַּֽשׁ׃

Moses speaks of God’s wrath as if it were fire that could completely burn up things. His enemies were completely destroyed like stubble in a fire. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “it completely destroys your enemies like a fire that burns up straw” (See: Metaphor)

יֹאכְלֵ֖⁠מוֹ כַּ⁠קַּֽשׁ

Here the enemies (or those who rise up against Yahweh) are pictured as if they were a highly flammable piece of dried grass. Alternate translation: “it devours the enemy as if they were stubble” (See: Simile)

Exodus 15:8

וּ⁠בְ⁠ר֤וּחַ אַפֶּ֨י⁠ךָ֙

Moses speaks of God as if God had a nose, and he speaks of the wind as if God blew the wind from his nose. Alternate translation: “You blew on the sea and” (See: Personification)

וּ⁠בְ⁠ר֤וּחַ אַפֶּ֨י⁠ךָ֙ נֶ֣עֶרְמוּ מַ֔יִם נִצְּב֥וּ כְמוֹ־נֵ֖ד נֹזְלִ֑ים

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The blast from your nostrils piled the waters up and made the flowing waters stand upright in a heap” (See: Active or Passive)

נֶ֣עֶרְמוּ מַ֔יִם נִצְּב֥וּ כְמוֹ־נֵ֖ד נֹזְלִ֑ים קָֽפְא֥וּ תְהֹמֹ֖ת בְּ⁠לֶב־יָֽם

These lines are synonymous parallels where each line means basically the same thing, but each gives the reader a different poetic image. (See: Parallelism)

בְּ⁠לֶב־יָֽם

The center or deepest part of the sea is spoken of as if the sea had a heart. Alternate translation: “in the center of the sea” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 15:9

תִּמְלָאֵ֣⁠מוֹ נַפְשִׁ֔⁠י

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will satisfy my desire on them” (See: Active or Passive)

תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י

The meaning of this phrase is unclear. The word translated dispossess could also mean “possess” or “inherit.” What seems clear is that the Egyptians plan to use their power to prevent the Israelites from possessing good things. Whether this is a reference back to plunder earlier in the verse or to recapturing them as slaves or to taking over the Israelites’ place in the land of Goshen or to keeping them from reaching the promised land (of Yahweh’s possession, see verse 17 regarding where Yahweh will bring his people) or something else is not so clear. It could also refer to taking away their life and breath. Dispossess was chosen rather than another term because the verb is in a causative form here. Alternate translation: “my hand will possess them” or “my hand will inherit them” or “my hand will kill them”

תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י

Here hand is used figuratively of the Egyptians’ power (that is, their military strength). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will dispossess them” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 15:10

נָשַׁ֥פְתָּ בְ⁠רוּחֲ⁠ךָ֖

Moses spoke about God making the wind blow as if God blew the wind through his nose or mouth. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “But you made the wind blow” (See: Metaphor)

צָֽלֲלוּ֙ כַּֽ⁠עוֹפֶ֔רֶת בְּ⁠מַ֖יִם אַדִּירִֽים

Lead is a heavy metal that is commonly used to make things sink in water. It is used here to show how quickly God’s enemies were destroyed. Alternate translation: “sank as fast as a heavy piece of metal in the deep turbulent waters” (See: Simile)

Exodus 15:11

מִֽי־כָמֹ֤⁠כָה בָּֽ⁠אֵלִם֙ יְהוָ֔ה

Moses uses this question to show how great God is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “O Yahweh, no one is like you among the gods!” or “Yahweh, none of the gods is like you!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

מִ֥י כָּמֹ֖⁠כָה נֶאְדָּ֣ר בַּ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ נוֹרָ֥א תְהִלֹּ֖ת עֹ֥שֵׂה פֶֽלֶא

Moses uses this question to show how great God is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one is like you. No one is majestic in holiness as you are, no one is honored in praises as you are, and no one does miracles as you do!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

נֶאְדָּ֣ר בַּ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “majestic and holy” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 15:12

יְמִ֣ינְ⁠ךָ֔

The phrase right hand represents the strong power of God. Alternate translation: “with your strong power” (See: Metonymy)

נָטִ֨יתָ֙ יְמִ֣ינְ⁠ךָ֔

Moses speaks about God causing something to happen as if God reached out with his* hand*. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “With your strong power you made it happen” (See: Metaphor)

תִּבְלָעֵ֖⁠מוֹ אָֽרֶץ

Moses personifies the earth as if it could swallow or devour with its mouth. Alternate translation: “the earth devours them” (See: Personification)

Exodus 15:13

נָחִ֥יתָ בְ⁠חַסְדְּ⁠ךָ֖ עַם־ז֣וּ גָּאָ֑לְתָּ נֵהַ֥לְתָּ בְ⁠עָזְּ⁠ךָ֖

These lines are structural parallels where the lines are saying similar things, but the parallelism is more in the construction of the lines. In your is repeated and the concepts of led and guided are very similar to one another. (See: Parallelism)

קָדְשֶֽׁ⁠ךָ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 15:14

Verses 14-16a form a complex parallel structure where things are repeated in reverse. (See the introduction to chapter 15 and Parallelism)

יִרְגָּז֑וּ⁠ן

This means to shake with fear. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

חִ֣יל אָחַ֔ז יֹשְׁבֵ֖י פְּלָֽשֶׁת

Moses speaks of anguish as if it were a person that could forcefully grab hold of someone and make them extremely afraid. Alternate translation: “the inhabitants of Philistia will be afraid” (See: Personification)

Exodus 15:15

אֵילֵ֣י מוֹאָ֔ב יֹֽאחֲזֵ֖⁠מוֹ רָ֑עַד

Moses speaks of trembling as if it were a person that could forcefully grab hold of someone and make them extremely afraid. Alternate translation: “the leaders of Moab will be afraid” (See: Personification)

נָמֹ֕גוּ

Moses uses the phrase, melted away, to speak of people becoming weak because of their fear. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “became weak from fear” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 15:16

תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָ⁠ה֙ וָ⁠פַ֔חַד

Terror and dread form a doublet meaning “extremely fearful.” If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “They will become extremely fearful” (See: Doublet)

תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָ⁠ה֙ וָ⁠פַ֔חַד

Terror and dread are pictured as physical objects that could fall on people. The image might be of them crushing people or being a heavy weight that people struggle under (however, the image is not specified). It means that the people will feel the emotions of terror and dread very strongly. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “They will be overwhelmed with feelings of terror and dread” (See: Metaphor)

בִּ⁠גְדֹ֥ל זְרוֹעֲ⁠ךָ֖

Yahweh’s arm represents his great strength. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Because of your great strength” (See: Metonymy)

יִדְּמ֣וּ כָּ⁠אָ֑בֶן

This could mean: (1) “they will be silent like stone” or (2) “they will be motionless as stone” (See: Simile)

Exodus 15:17

תְּבִאֵ֗⁠מוֹ וְ⁠תִטָּעֵ֨⁠מוֹ֙

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express where God would bring them explicitly. Alternate translation: “You will take your people to Canaan and plant them there” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

תְּבִאֵ֗⁠מוֹ

Since Moses was not already in Canaan, some languages would use “take” rather than bring. Alternate translation: “You will take them” (See: Go and Come)

וְ⁠תִטָּעֵ֨⁠מוֹ֙ בְּ⁠הַ֣ר

Moses speaks about God giving his people the land to live in as if they were a plant that God was planting. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you will settle them on the mountain of” or “and you will let them live on the mountain of” (See: Metaphor)

בְּ⁠הַ֣ר נַחֲלָֽתְ⁠ךָ֔

This refers to Mount Zion in the land of Canaan.

בְּ⁠הַ֣ר נַחֲלָֽתְ⁠ךָ֔

Moses speaks about God promising to give his people the mountain forever as if he were giving it to them as an inheritance. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “on the mountain that you have given them as an inheritance” (See: Metaphor)

כּוֹנְנ֥וּ יָדֶֽי⁠ךָ׃

The phrase your hands refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “that you have built by your power” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 15:18

יְהוָ֥ה׀ יִמְלֹ֖ךְ לְ⁠עֹלָ֥ם וָ⁠עֶֽד

Alternate translation: “Yahweh reigns forever and ever”

Exodus 15:20

הַ⁠תֹּ֖ף…בְּ⁠תֻפִּ֖ים

A tambourine is a hand-held musical instrument like a small drum that also has pieces of metal around the side that make a metallic rattling sound when shaken. Alternate translation: “timbrel” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וַ⁠תֵּצֶ֤אןָ כָֽל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ אַחֲרֶ֔י⁠הָ בְּ⁠תֻפִּ֖ים וּ⁠בִ⁠מְחֹלֹֽת

Here, all may be a generalization; it may not have been every woman. It could be better to translate as a restrictive clause as in the UST. Alternate translation: “and every woman who went out after her had a tambourine and danced” (See: Hyperbole)

Exodus 15:21

גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly over whom Yahweh triumphed. See how you translated this in Exodus 15:1. Alternate translation: “he has achieved a glorious victory over the army of Egypt” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ רָמָ֥ה בַ⁠יָּֽם

Miriam sang about God causing the sea to cover and drown the horse and the one riding it as if God had thrown them into the sea. See how you translated this in Exodus 15:1. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he has made the horse and rider drown in the sea” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 15:22

יִשְׂרָאֵל֙

The word Israel represents the people of Israel. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Moses led the Israelite people” (See: Collective Nouns)

מִדְבַּר־שׁ֑וּר

We do not know the exact location of this place. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 15:23

מָרָ֔תָ⁠ה

We do not know the exact location of Marah. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 15:24

וַ⁠יִּלֹּ֧נוּ הָ⁠עָ֛ם עַל־מֹשֶׁ֥ה

Murmur is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers. Alternate translation: “And the people complained against Moses” or “And the people grumbled at Moses”

Exodus 15:26

לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ

Yahweh is speaking about his own voice. Alternate translation: “to my voice” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ

Yahweh’s voice represents what he says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּשָׁ֤ר בְּ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֙ תַּעֲשֶׂ֔ה

The eyes represent seeing, and seeing represents thoughts or judgment. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and do what Yahweh considers to be right” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠הַֽאֲזַנְתָּ֙ לְ⁠מִצְוֺתָ֔י⁠ו

The ear represents listening, and listening represents obeying. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you carefully obey his commands” (See: Idiom)

כָּֽל־הַ⁠מַּֽחֲלָ֞ה אֲשֶׁר־שַׂ֤מְתִּי בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֹא־אָשִׂ֣ים עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ

God speaks of causing people to have diseases as putting diseases on them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will not cause any of you to have the diseases that I cause the Egyptians to have” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 15:27

אֵילִ֔מָ⁠ה

Elim is an oasis in the desert, a place with water and shade trees. (See: How to Translate Names)

וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֣ים

Alternate translation: “and seventy” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 16

Exodus 16 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

This entire chapter is the story of the Israelites complaining about food and Yahweh providing food. Verses 22-30 introduce the Sabbath.

Special concepts in this chapter

Complaints

After complaining about the water, the Israelites complained that they had less food than in Egypt. This is intended to show their ungratefulness and their sinful view of Yahweh. (See: sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Prohibition against storing food

The people were not allowed to store the food, called manna, that Yahweh provided to them. This is because they were to trust in Yahweh to provide for their needs every day. (See: trust, trusted, trustworthy, trustworthiness)

Sabbath

This is the first recorded celebration of the Sabbath rest. (See: Sabbath)

Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Bread as food

Yahweh speaks of the food that he will send as if it were bread. The manna he gave them was perhaps not literally bread. The Israelites would eat this food every day, just as they had eaten bread every day before this. Alternate translations: “food” or “food like bread” (See: bread and Metaphor)

Chronology

Verses 34-36 are written from a much later perspective. Translators will need to find a way to show that this portion gives background information from a much later point (at least 40 years).

Box of the Covenant

Related to the chronology issue, although the covenant has not yet been made, it is referenced in Exodus 16:34. This is probably an editorial comment made after these events. (See: covenant)

Wilderness of Sin

Sin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with sinning. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 16:1

סִ֔ין

The word Sin here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. It is not the English word “sin.” (See: How to Translate Names)

בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י

This time coincides with the end of April and the beginning of May on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: Hebrew Months)

בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 15 of month 2” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Exodus 16:2

וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֧ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל

Here, all is a generalization. Alternate translation: “And many of the community of the sons of Israel murmured” (See: Hyperbole)

וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ

Alternate translation: “And … spoke angrily”

Exodus 16:3

מִֽי־יִתֵּ֨ן מוּתֵ֤⁠נוּ

This is a way of saying that they wished that they had died. It is a hypothetical past statement. Translate it in a way that makes it clear that this did not actually happen. Alternate translation: “We wish that we had died” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

בְ⁠יַד־יְהוָה֙

The phrase the hand of Yahweh represents Yahweh’s action. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by Yahweh’s action” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 16:4

מַמְטִ֥יר לָ⁠כֶ֛ם לֶ֖חֶם מִן־הַ⁠שָּׁמָ֑יִם

God speaks of food coming down from heaven as if it were rain. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “make bread come down from heaven like rain” or “make bread fall to you from the sky” (See: Metaphor)

בְּ⁠תוֹרָתִ֖⁠י

Alternate translation: “in my instruction”

Exodus 16:5

וְ⁠הָיָה֙ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י וְ⁠הֵכִ֖ינוּ

Alternate translation: “It will happen on the sixth day that they will prepare” or “On the sixth day they will prepare”

בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 6” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

מִשְׁנֶ֔ה

two times

Exodus 16:7

וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה כִּ֥י תלונו עָלֵֽי⁠נוּ

Moses and Aaron used this question to show the people that it was foolish to complain against them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We are not powerful enough for you to complain against us.” or “It is foolish to complain against us, because we cannot do what you want.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Exodus 16:8

וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה

Moses used this question to show the people that he and Aaron did not have the power to give them what they wanted. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Aaron and I cannot give you what you want.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה לֹא־עָלֵ֥י⁠נוּ תְלֻנֹּתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם כִּ֥י עַל־יְהוָֽה

The people were complaining against Moses and Aaron, who were Yahweh’s servants. So by complaining against them, the people were really complaining against Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Your complaints are not really against us; they are against Yahweh, because we are his servants” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 16:9

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן אֱמֹ֗ר אֶֽל־כָּל־עֲדַת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל קִרְב֖וּ

There are two layers of quotations here. You may want to translate one or the other as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “And Moses told Aaron to tell all of the congregation of the sons of Israel, “Approach” or “And Moses told Aaron, “Tell all of the congregation of the sons of Israel to approach” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

Exodus 16:10

וַ⁠יְהִ֗י

This phrase is used here to mark an important event in the story. The important event here is the people seeing Yahweh’s glory. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.

וְ⁠הִנֵּה֙

The word behold here shows that the people saw something extraordinary.

Exodus 16:13

וַ⁠יְהִ֣י

This phrase is used here to mark an important part of the events. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.

הַ⁠שְּׂלָ֔ו

The word quail means a type of small, plump game bird. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 16:14

כַּ⁠כְּפֹ֖ר

Frost is frozen dew that forms on the ground. It is very fine. (See: Translate Unknowns)

כַּ⁠כְּפֹ֖ר

The original readers knew what frost is like, so this phrase would help them understand what the flakes were like. Alternate translation: “flakes that looked like frost” or “flakes that were fine like frost” (See: Simile)

Exodus 16:16

אִ֖ישׁ לְ⁠פִ֣י אָכְל֑⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “according to how much each will eat”

עֹ֣מֶר

2 liters (See: Biblical Volume)

עֹ֣מֶר לַ⁠גֻּלְגֹּ֗לֶת מִסְפַּר֙ נַפְשֹׁ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם אִ֛ישׁ לַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בְּ⁠אָהֳל֖⁠וֹ תִּקָּֽחוּ

Alternate translation: “take an omer per person according to how many people are in the gatherer’s tent”

Exodus 16:19

אִ֕ישׁ אַל

A man refers to people in general, not to one particular man. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “No one” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

Exodus 16:20

וַ⁠יָּ֥רֻם תּוֹלָעִ֖ים

Alternate translation: “and it decayed with worms”

Exodus 16:21

אִ֖ישׁ כְּ⁠פִ֣י אָכְל֑⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “everyone according to how much they would eat” or “everyone according to how many people they had to feed”

Exodus 16:22

וַ⁠יְהִ֣י

This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. Verses 16:22-30 tell about what the people did concerning the manna on the sixth and seventh days of the week. If your language has a way for marking this as a new part of the story, you could consider using it here. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֗י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 6” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

מִשְׁנֶ֔ה

Alternate translation: “two times as much”

לֶ֨חֶם֙

This refers to the bread that appeared as thin flakes on the ground each morning.

Exodus 16:23

שַׁבָּת֧וֹן שַׁבַּת־קֹ֛דֶשׁ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֖ה

Alternate translation: “is a day to stop working completely and dedicate to Yahweh”

שַׁבַּת־קֹ֛דֶשׁ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a holy Sabbath” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 16:24

וְ⁠לֹ֣א הִבְאִ֔ישׁ

Alternate translation: “And it did not smell rotten”

Exodus 16:25

כִּֽי־שַׁבָּ֥ת הַ⁠יּ֖וֹם לַ⁠יהוָ֑ה

Alternate translation: “today is a Sabbath, a day to honor Yahweh by not working”

Exodus 16:26

וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֧וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֛י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Exodus 16:27

וְ⁠לֹ֖א מָצָֽאוּ

Alternate translation: “but they did not find any manna”

Exodus 16:28

עַד־אָ֨נָה֙ מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖⁠י וְ⁠תוֹרֹתָֽ⁠י

God used this question to scold the people because they did not obey his laws. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You people still do not keep my commandments and laws!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם

Yahweh speaks to Moses, but the word you refers to the people of Israel in general. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: Singular Pronouns that refer to Groups)

לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖⁠י וְ⁠תוֹרֹתָֽ⁠י

Alternate translation: “to obey my commandments and my laws”

Exodus 16:29

כִּֽי־יְהוָה֮ נָתַ֣ן לָ⁠כֶ֣ם הַ⁠שַּׁבָּת֒

Yahweh speaks about teaching people to rest on the Sabbath as if the Sabbath were a gift. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, have taught you to rest on the Sabbath” (See: Metaphor)

בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֖י…בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִֽי

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 6 … on day 7” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

לֶ֣חֶם

This refers to the bread that appeared as thin flakes on the ground each morning.

יוֹמָ֑יִם

Alternate translation: “for 2 days”

Exodus 16:31

כְּ⁠זֶ֤רַע גַּד֙ לָבָ֔ן

Coriander is an herb also known as cilantro. People eat both the leaves and seeds. People dry the seeds, grind them into a powder, and put it in food to add flavor. Alternate translation: “like a small white seed” (See: Translate Unknowns)

כְּ⁠צַפִּיחִ֥ת

Wafers are very thin biscuits or crackers.

Exodus 16:33

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 16:34

Verses 34-36 provide a later commentary on the chapter. If your language has a way of marking background information you may want to use it starting from verse 34 or verse 35. You may want to leave verse 34 more connected to verse 33 even though it references the Covenant, which has not been given yet. (See: Background Information)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָ⁠עֵדֻ֖ת

Here, face figuratively represents being near the Covenant. Alternate translation: “near the Covenant” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 16:36

וְ⁠הָ⁠עֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥ית הָ⁠אֵיפָ֖ה הֽוּא

An omer and an ephah are both units of dry measurement. An ephah is approximately equal to a bushel, and an omer is one-tenth of an ephah. The original readers would have known how much an ephah was. This sentence would help them know how much an omer was. (See: Biblical Volume)

וְ⁠הָ⁠עֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥ית הָ⁠אֵיפָ֖ה הֽוּא

For languages that do not use fractions, this can be reworded. Alternate translation: “Now ten omers equal one ephah” (See: Fractions)

Exodus 17

7# Exodus 17 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• v. 1-7: the Israelites complain and Yahweh gives them water
• v. 8-16: Israel defeats Amalek in battle

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Rhetorical questions

Moses uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. The purpose of these questions is to convince people of their sin. Likewise, the people’s rhetorical question shows their ignorance. (See: Rhetorical Question and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Wilderness of Sin

Sin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is not the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with the act of sinning. (See: How to Translate Names)

Naming

As in the last couple of chapters, places and things are named for what happens in that location. In this chapter is Massah (which means “test”), Meribah (“arguing”), and an altar named “Yahweh is my Banner,” because Yahweh will be at war with the Amalekites forever.

Exodus 17:1

וַ֠⁠יִּסְעוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֨ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל

A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

סִ֛ין

The word Sin here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. It is not the English word “sin.” See how you translated this in Exodus 16:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

עַל־פִּ֣י יְהוָ֑ה

Here, mouth refers figuratively to Yahweh’s commands (that is, what he says to do). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “at the command of Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

בִּ⁠רְפִידִ֔ים

Rephidim means “the resting place,” a place to rest on long journeys through the wilderness. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 17:2

מַה־תְּרִיבוּ⁠ן֙ עִמָּדִ֔⁠י מַה־תְּנַסּ֖וּ⁠ן אֶת־יְהוָֽה

Moses uses these questions to scold the people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why are you speaking against me? And why are you trying to test whether Yahweh is able to give you what you need?” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Exodus 17:3

לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ הֶעֱלִיתָ֣⁠נוּ מִ⁠מִּצְרַ֔יִם לְ⁠הָמִ֥ית אֹתִ֛⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־בָּנַ֥⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־מִקְנַ֖⁠י בַּ⁠צָּמָֽא

The people use this question to accuse Moses of wanting to kill them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why did you bring us up out of Egypt? Did you bring us here to cause us and our children and animals to die because we have no water to drink?” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Exodus 17:6

לְ⁠פָנֶ֨י⁠ךָ

Here, before your face means “in front of you.” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 17:7

מַסָּ֖ה

Massah is a place in the desert whose name means “testing” in Hebrew. (See: How to Translate Names)

וּ⁠מְרִיבָ֑ה

Meribah is a place in the desert whose name means “complaining” in Hebrew. (See: How to Translate Names)

אִם־אָֽיִן

In some languages it may be unnatural to explicitly have the negative option included in this question or to have it at the end. It may be omitted or relocated in the question if that is the case.

Exodus 17:8

וַ⁠יָּבֹ֖א עֲמָלֵ֑ק

A new scene begins here which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

עֲמָלֵ֑ק…יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל

Amalek and Israel both refer to the nations (people groups) descended from that individual by simply using the name of the ancestor. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Amalekites … the Israelites” (See: Metonymy)

עֲמָלֵ֑ק…יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל

Amalek and Israel are both collective nouns that refer to the nations (people groups) descended from that individual. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Amalekites … the Israelites” (See: Collective Nouns)

עֲמָלֵ֑ק

Amalek or the Amalekites are a completely new participant in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

בִּ⁠רְפִידִֽם

Rephidim was the name of a place in the desert. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 17:9

יְהוֹשֻׁ֨עַ֙

Joshua is a completely new participant in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Later he becomes a major character, but not really in the book of Exodus. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Exodus 17:10

וַ⁠יַּ֣עַשׂ יְהוֹשֻׁ֗עַ כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר אָֽמַר־ל⁠וֹ֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה לְ⁠הִלָּחֵ֖ם בַּ⁠עֲמָלֵ֑ק

Joshua represents himself and the Israelites that he led into battle. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And, as Moses instructed, Joshua and the men he chose fought against the Amalekites” (See: Synecdoche)

וְ⁠ח֔וּר

Hur was the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

וְ⁠ח֔וּר

Hur is a new participant in the story, which you may need to point out in your translation. However, he is a very minor character. He only appears in this passage and once much later in the book, so you may not need to highlight him at all. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Exodus 17:11

וְ⁠גָבַ֣ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…וְ⁠גָבַ֥ר עֲמָלֵֽק

The words Israel and Amalek represent the fighters from those groups. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Israelite fighters were winning … the Amalekite fighters would begin to win” (See: Synecdoche)

Exodus 17:12

וִ⁠ידֵ֤י מֹשֶׁה֙ כְּבֵדִ֔ים

The author writes of Moses’ arms becoming tired as if his hands became heavy. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And Moses’ arms became tired” (See: Idiom)

מִ⁠זֶּ֤ה אֶחָד֙ וּ⁠מִ⁠זֶּ֣ה אֶחָ֔ד

Alternate translation: “one on one side, and one on the other”

Exodus 17:13

לְ⁠פִי־חָֽרֶב

The sword represents battle. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in combat” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 17:14

מָחֹ֤ה אֶמְחֶה֙ אֶת־זֵ֣כֶר עֲמָלֵ֔ק

God speaks of destroying Amalek as if he were removing people’s memory of Amalek. When a group of people is completely destroyed, there is nothing to remind people about them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will completely destroy Amalek” (See: Metaphor)

עֲמָלֵ֔ק

The Amalekites are referred to by naming their ancestor. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: Amalekites” (See: Metonymy)

מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם

This phrase makes an intentionally broad image and represents all people everywhere. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from all people everywhere” (See: Hyperbole)

Exodus 17:15

נִסִּֽ⁠י

A banner is something lifted up high, perhaps like a flag, that people can see from a distance and follow. Alternate translation: “is my military standard” or “is my guidon”

Exodus 17:16

כִּֽי־יָד֙ עַל־כֵּ֣ס יָ֔הּ

The Hebrew here is very difficult, and there are a variety of opinions regarding the meaning. Questions include: (1) Whose hand is referred to? Amalek’s, Yahweh’s, or Moses’? (2) What is the hand on (or against)? Yahweh’s throne or banner? (3) What is the meaning of the Hebrew preposition meaning on, against, or above? What does that signify? Rebellion, or taking an oath, or holding onto a symbol of power? If there is another translation in your region, it may be best to simply follow the interpretation it gives. Alternate translation: “Because a hand was on the throne of Yah” or “Because a hand was on the banner of Yah”

מִלְחָמָ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה בַּֽ⁠עֲמָלֵ֑ק

This phrase has no verbs in Hebrew. You may need to translate the noun war as a verb. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will make war with Amalek” or “Yahweh will war against Amalek”

Exodus 18

Exodus 18 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• v. 1-12: Jethro visits Moses and hears all that Yahweh has done
• v. 13-27: Jethro observes Moses and advises him to set up a subsidiarity leadership structure; Moses does so

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Leadership lessons

Jethro taught Moses an important leadership lesson in this chapter. Many scholars look at this chapter for important leadership lessons. Moses delegated some of his responsibilities to other godly men so that he would not become worn out by all the demands made of him. (See: godly, godliness, ungodly, godless, ungodliness, godlessness)

Possible Translation Difficulties

Order of events

The timing of the events in verse 2 is not clear and, whatever their timing, may be difficult to translate. The question: Is Jethro’s taking Zipporah related to the past event of Moses sending her back to him at some otherwise unmentioned point in time, or is Jethro’s taking related to his coming to meet Moses in verse 5.

Verse 11

Verse 11 is difficult in the original and requires interpretation.

God and Yahweh

In this chapter, God, who is named Yahweh in much of the rest of the book, is mostly referred to as God instead of by his name as is usual. Translations should not suggest that they are not different beings.

Kinship: Father-in-law

Jethro is the father of Moses’ wife. Some languages may make a distinction between that and a woman’s father-in-law. If that is the case, note it in verses: 1-2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. (See: Kinship)

Participant reference

Jethro is often referred to simply as the father-in-law of Moses in this chapter. He is also named explicitly (referred to by name) an unusually high number of times (it would be more usual to have more pronouns referring to him). Frequent use of his name is likely to emphasize his familial ties and authority (or honored status). Some languages may need to alter the way he is referred to for naturalness or to convey the same sense of familial ties and authority (or honored status).

Exodus 18:1

חֹתֵ֣ן מֹשֶׁ֔ה

The label, father-in-law of Moses refers to the father of the wife of Moses. If your language uses a different term for a man’s father-in-law than for a woman’s father-in-law, choose the appropriate one here. Note the use of this term also in verses: 2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. Alternate translation: “the father of the wife of Moses” (See: Kinship)

Exodus 18:2

וַ⁠יִּקַּ֗ח יִתְרוֹ֙ חֹתֵ֣ן מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶת־צִפֹּרָ֖ה אֵ֣שֶׁת מֹשֶׁ֑ה

This could mean: (1) Jethro took Zipporah to Moses, or (2) Jethro had earlier welcomed back Zipporah.

אַחַ֖ר שִׁלּוּחֶֽי⁠הָ

This is something Moses had done earlier. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after Moses had sent her home to her father” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 18:3

וְ⁠אֵ֖ת שְׁנֵ֣י בָנֶ֑י⁠הָ

This is the ending of the sentence that begins with the words Jethro … took Zipporah in verse 2. This could mean: (1) Jethro took Zipporah and her two sons to Moses, or (2) Jethro had earlier welcomed back Zipporah and her two sons.

גֵּֽרְשֹׁ֔ם

Gershom is a son of Moses and Zipporah; his name means “foreigner.” See 2:22. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 18:4

אֱלִיעֶ֑זֶר

Eliezer is a son of Moses and Zipporah; his name means “God is the one who helps me.” (See: How to Translate Names)

מֵ⁠חֶ֥רֶב פַּרְעֹֽה

The phrase from the sword of Pharaoh represents being killed by Pharaoh or Pharaoh’s army. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from being killed by Pharaoh” or “from being killed by Pharaoh’s army” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 18:5

וּ⁠בָנָ֥י⁠ו

Alternate translation: “with his sons”

Exodus 18:7

וַ⁠יִּשְׁתַּ֨חוּ֙ וַ⁠יִּשַּׁק־ל֔⁠וֹ

These were symbolic acts that were the normal way that people showed great respect and devotion in that culture. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Symbolic Action)

Exodus 18:8

עַ֖ל אוֹדֹ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל

The word Israel represents the Israelite people. Alternate translation: “in order to help the Israelite people” (See: Metonymy)

כָּל־הַ⁠תְּלָאָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר מְצָאָ֣תַ⁠ם

Moses writes of hardships happening to them as if hardships had discovered where they were. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “all the hardships that had happened to them” or “how they had many hard experiences” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 18:9

מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרָֽיִם

The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians were doing to them” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 18:10

מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרַ֖יִם וּ⁠מִ⁠יַּ֣ד פַּרְעֹ֑ה…מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת יַד־מִצְרָֽיִם

The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians and from the power of Pharaoh … from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians and Pharaoh were doing to you … from what the Egyptians were doing to you” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 18:11

כִּ֣י בַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר

Here, because of the matter probably refers back to Yahweh’s rescue of Israel. Alternate translation: “because of what he did”

אֲשֶׁ֥ר זָד֖וּ עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם

The most natural referent for they is the gods, who, perhaps through their agents (Pharaoh and the Egyptians), fought against Yahweh and oppressed the Israelites (them). This would connect back to Exodus 12:12 where Yahweh declares that he is bringing judgment on the gods of Egypt. You may need to make some part of this explicit. Alternate translation: “in which they proudly fought Yahweh by oppressing Israel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 18:12

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of God. In this case it likely means that this was a worship event. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 18:13

וַ⁠יְהִי֙ מִֽ⁠מָּחֳרָ֔ת

A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֖ה לִ⁠שְׁפֹּ֣ט

Sitting was symbolic of having a position of authority. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses sat down as a judge” (See: Symbolic Action)

מִן־הַ⁠בֹּ֖קֶר עַד־הָ⁠עָֽרֶב

Alternate translation: “all day”

Exodus 18:14

מָֽה־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠זֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר אַתָּ֤ה עֹשֶׂה֙ לָ⁠עָ֔ם

Jethro uses this question to show Moses that what he was doing was not good. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing all of this for the people!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

מַדּ֗וּעַ אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ וְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עָ֛ם נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ מִן־בֹּ֥קֶר עַד־עָֽרֶב

Jethro used this question to show Moses that he was doing too much. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why are you doing all this for the people? Why are you doing this by yourself, and why are all the people standing around you from morning until evening, asking you to make decisions for them?” (See: Rhetorical Question)

אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ

The word sit here is a metonym for “judge.” Judges would sit while they listened to people’s complaints. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “do you judge alone” or “are you the only one who judges the people” (See: Metonymy)

נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ

The people came to be near Moses so that they could get a chance for him to hear their petitions. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “petition you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 18:18

נָבֹ֣ל תִּבֹּ֔ל

Alternate translation: “You will surely make yourself very tired”

כָבֵ֤ד מִמְּ⁠ךָ֙

Jethro speaks of the hard work that Moses is doing as if it were a physical burden that Moses was carrying. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “is too hard for you” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 18:19

אִיעָ֣צְ⁠ךָ֔

Alternate translation: “I will guide you” or “I will instruct you”

וִ⁠יהִ֥י אֱלֹהִ֖ים עִמָּ֑⁠ךְ

Jethro speaks of God helping Moses as if God would be with Moses. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “God will help you” or “God will give you wisdom” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠הֵבֵאתָ֥ אַתָּ֛ה אֶת־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים אֶל־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים

Jethro speaks of Moses telling God about their disputes as if they were something that Moses was bringing to God. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you tell God about their disputes” or and “you tell God what they are arguing about” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 18:20

וְ⁠הוֹדַעְתָּ֣ לָ⁠הֶ֗ם אֶת־הַ⁠דֶּ֨רֶךְ֙ יֵ֣לְכוּ בָ֔⁠הּ

Jethro speaks of living or behaving like walking. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You must show them how to live” or “You must show them how to behave” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 18:21

וְ⁠אַתָּ֣ה תֶחֱזֶ֣ה

Alternate translation: “As for you, search out” or “You must also search out”

וְ⁠שַׂמְתָּ֣ עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֗ם

Jethro speaks of giving them authority over people as putting them over people. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You should select leaders for the people” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠שַׂמְתָּ֣ עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֗ם

Here, them refers to the Israelites. Moses is advised to place good men in charge of groups of Israelites. Alternate translation: “And you must appoint these men over the Israelites” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

שָׂרֵ֤י אֲלָפִים֙ שָׂרֵ֣י מֵא֔וֹת שָׂרֵ֥י חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֥י עֲשָׂרֹֽת

This could mean: (1) these numbers represent the exact amount of people in each group. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of groups of 1,000 people, groups of 100 people, groups of 50 people, and groups of 10 people” or (2) these numbers are not exact, but represent groups of people of various sizes. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of very small groups, small groups, large groups, and very large groups” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 18:22

כָּל־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠גָּדֹל֙ יָבִ֣יאוּ אֵלֶ֔י⁠ךָ

By every great situation they will bring to you, Jethro is recommending that the new leaders should pass the most difficult cases to Moses for him to judge them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the difficult cases they will tell you about” or “when there are difficult cases, they will tell you about them so you can judge them” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠הָקֵל֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ וְ⁠נָשְׂא֖וּ אִתָּֽ⁠ךְ

Jethro speaks of the hard work that they would do as if it were something that they would carry beside Moses and make lighter for Moses by helping him. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and lessen your work by having them do the hard work with you” or “and make your work easier by having them help you do the hard work” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 18:23

וְ⁠יָֽכָלְתָּ֖ עֲמֹ֑ד

Alternate translation: “then you will not wear yourself out”

כָּל־הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה עַל־מְקֹמ֖⁠וֹ יָבֹ֥א בְ⁠שָׁלֽוֹם

Here, getting to their place could mean each person’s home tent or it could mean the whole group gets to the promised land. If you cannot leave it ambiguous, it would be best to indicate something like “harmony in the camp.” Alternate translation: “all these people will live in harmony”

Exodus 18:25

רָאשִׁ֖ים עַל־הָ⁠עָ֑ם

Moses writes of the leaders of people as if they were the head of a body. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “leaders over the people” (See: Metaphor)

אַנְשֵׁי־חַ֨יִל֙

If it would be helpful to your readers, what sort of ability they had can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “men who were able to lead” or “men who were able to judge” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

שָׂרֵ֤י אֲלָפִים֙ שָׂרֵ֣י מֵא֔וֹת שָׂרֵ֥י חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֥י עֲשָׂרֹֽת

This could mean: (1) these numbers represent the exact amount of people in each group. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of groups of 1,000 people, groups of 100 people, groups of 50 people, and groups of 10 people” or (2) these numbers are not exact, but represent groups of people of various sizes. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of very small groups, small groups, large groups, and very large groups” See how you translated this in Exodus 18:21. (See: Numbers)

Exodus 18:26

וְ⁠שָׁפְט֥וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֑ת

Alternate translation: “They judged the people most of the time” or “They judged the people in all regular circumstances”

אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠קָּשֶׁה֙ יְבִיא֣וּ⁠ן אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה

The author writes of telling Moses about the difficult cases as bringing him the difficult cases. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “They told Moses about the difficult cases” or “When there were difficult cases, they told Moses about them so that he would judge them” (See: Metaphor)

הַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠קָּטֹ֖ן

Alternate translation: “easy case”

Exodus 19

Exodus 19 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

This chapter consist of a series of Moses going up Mount Sinai, talking to Yahweh, coming down, and talking to the people. He is being the intermediary, carrying messages between Yahweh and the people. - v. 1-2: Arrival at Sinai - v. 3-8: First cycle of Moses going up and down for instruction and response - v. 9-15: Second cycle, people get ready to hear God - v. 16-19: God speaks to the people from the mountain - v. 20-25: Third cycle

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“A kingdom of priests”

The function of the priests was to intercede for the people. The Levites were the only priests in Israel; this is a metaphor indicating that the nation was to intercede for the world as a whole. They were also to be holy, or set apart, from the rest of the world. (See: priest, priesthood and Metaphor and holy, holiness, unholy, sacred)

Revealing the law

The events of this chapter are concerned with preparing the people to receive the law of Moses. The people go through all of this to prepare themselves for the law, which shows the great importance of this event for Israel. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

Boundaries between Yahweh and the people

Moses is told to make the people holy in preparation for meeting Yahweh, then boundaries are set up to keep the people separate from Yahweh, and then the priests are told to make themselves holy. The theme of a holy separation is beginning to be developed that will become much of the law code.

Exodus 19:1

בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֔י…בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה

This means they arrived at the wilderness on the first day of the month just as they left Egypt on the first day of the month. The first day of the third month on the Hebrew calendar is near the middle of May on Western calendars. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “In the month 3 … on the day 1 of the month” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Exodus 19:2

מֵ⁠רְפִידִ֗ים

Rephidim is an area on the edge of the wilderness of Sinai where the people of Israel had been camping. See how you translated this name in Exodus 17:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 19:3

תֹאמַר֙ לְ⁠בֵ֣ית יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠תַגֵּ֖יד לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל

These two phrases have exactly the same meaning. This may be for poetic effect, as Yahweh’s statement here through verse 6 is somewhat artfully crafted. You may need to use a strategy other than parallelism to achieve a similar poetic effect in your language. (See: Parallelism)

Exodus 19:4

אַתֶּ֣ם רְאִיתֶ֔ם

The word you here refers to the Israelites. Yahweh is telling Moses what to tell the Israelites. If your language has a plural form of you, you would need it here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

וָ⁠אֶשָּׂ֤א אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ עַל־כַּנְפֵ֣י נְשָׁרִ֔ים

God speaks of caring for his people while they traveled as if he were an eagle and carried them on his wings. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “ how I helped you travel like an eagle that carries her babies on her wings” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 19:5

בְּ⁠קֹלִ֔⁠י

God’s voice represents what he says. Alternate translation: “to what I say” or “to my words” (See: Metonymy)

וּ⁠שְׁמַרְתֶּ֖ם אֶת־בְּרִיתִ֑⁠י

Alternate translation: “and do what my covenant requires you to do”

סְגֻלָּה֙

Alternate translation: “treasure”

Exodus 19:6

לִ֛⁠י מַמְלֶ֥כֶת כֹּהֲנִ֖ים

God speaks of his people as if they were priests. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “my kingdom of people who are like priests” or “my kingdom of people who do what priests do” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 19:7

וַ⁠יָּ֣שֶׂם לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֗ם אֵ֚ת כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה

Moses setting the words before them means that he was telling people things. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And he told them all these words” (See: Metaphor)

לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֗ם

Here, face means the person. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: Metonymy)

כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוָּ֖⁠הוּ יְהוָֽה

Alternate translation: “all that Yahweh had commanded him”

Exodus 19:8

וַ⁠יָּ֧שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֛ה אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם

If it would be helpful to your readers, where Moses went can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses went back up the mountain to report the words of the people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם

Here, words refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 19:9

אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם

Here, words refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 19:10

וְ⁠קִדַּשְׁתָּ֥⁠ם

This may mean instruct the people, or it may mean Moses will have a role as well. Alternate translation: “and tell them to dedicate themselves to me” or “and help them to purify themselves for me”

Exodus 19:11

לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י

Here, before the eyes means “so they can see.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 19:12

וְ⁠הִגְבַּלְתָּ֤

The boundary was either a mark or some kind of barrier.

לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר הִשָּׁמְר֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֛ם

A second-level direct quotation begins with watch. It is not clear where this command that Moses is to give the Israelites ends. Most English translations end it in verse 13 before the last sentence. For that reason, it may be most helpful to translate the instruction as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them to watch themselves” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

הִשָּׁמְר֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֛ם עֲל֥וֹת בָּ⁠הָ֖ר וּ⁠נְגֹ֣עַ בְּ⁠קָצֵ֑⁠הוּ

Here, the negative command is implied from the watch yourselves command. Alternate translation: “Watch yourselves against climbing on the mountain or touching on its edge”

כָּל־הַ⁠נֹּגֵ֥עַ בָּ⁠הָ֖ר מ֥וֹת

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must surely put to death any person who touches the mountain” or “You must surely kill anyone who touches the mountain” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 19:13

לֹא־תִגַּ֨ע בּ֜⁠וֹ יָ֗ד

Here, hand is a metonym for any part of a person. Alternate translation: “No person shall touch that one” (See: Metonymy)

סָק֤וֹל יִסָּקֵל֙ אוֹ־יָרֹ֣ה יִיָּרֶ֔ה

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly stone or shoot him” (See: Active or Passive)

יָרֹ֣ה יִיָּרֶ֔ה

This refers to being killed by someone who shoots arrows from a bow.

יַעֲל֥וּ

If you translate this with come or go, consider which would be the correct perspective for your language and the text context. Yahweh is speaking, so “come up” is valid; however, the people will be the ones moving, so “go up” is valid as well. (See: Go and Come)

Exodus 19:15

אַֽל־תִּגְּשׁ֖וּ אֶל־אִשָּֽׁה

This is a polite way of talking about sexual relations. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “do not sleep with your wives” (See: Euphemism)

אִשָּֽׁה

This word means both “woman” and “wife.” Context dictates the correct translation. Since wife would make it a narrower command, woman was chosen here.

Exodus 19:18

יָרַ֥ד…יְהוָ֖ה

Alternate translation: “Yahweh came down”

כְּ⁠עֶ֣שֶׁן הַ⁠כִּבְשָׁ֔ן

This shows that it was a very large amount of smoke. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like the smoke from a very large fire” (See: Simile)

Exodus 19:19

הוֹלֵ֖ךְ וְ⁠חָזֵ֣ק מְאֹ֑ד

Alternate translation: “continued to become louder and louder”

בְ⁠קֽוֹל

The word voice here refers to a sound that God made. This could mean: (1) “by speaking loudly like thunder” or (2) “by speaking” or (3) “by causing thunder to sound” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 19:20

וַ⁠יֵּ֧רֶד…וַ⁠יַּ֥עַל

You may need to consider your language’s rules for perspective regarding going or coming up or down in this verse. (See: Go and Come)

Exodus 19:21

פֶּן־יֶהֶרְס֤וּ

God spoke about walking past the boundary as if they might break down a barrier and walk through it. See how you translated “set bounds” in Exodus 19:12. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “not to go beyond the boundary” or “not to go through the barrier” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠נָפַ֥ל

Here, fall refers to dying. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. (See: Euphemism)

Exodus 19:22

יִפְרֹ֥ץ בָּ⁠הֶ֖ם יְהוָֽה

Yahweh’s anger and judgment are pictured as something that will burst through a boundary. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yahweh kills them in anger” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 19:23

בָּ֨⁠נוּ֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר הַגְבֵּ֥ל אֶת־הָ⁠הָ֖ר וְ⁠קִדַּשְׁתּֽ⁠וֹ

This quoted command could be translated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “us to set boundaries on the mountain to keep it separate” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

Exodus 19:24

לֶךְ־רֵ֔ד

Alternate translation: “Go down”

אַל־יֶֽהֶרְס֛וּ

God spoke about walking past the boundary as if they might break down a barrier and walk through it. See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 19:21. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “must not go beyond the boundary” or “must not go through the barrier” (See: Metaphor)

יִפְרָץ־בָּֽ⁠ם

Yahweh’s anger and judgment are pictured as something that will burst forth from him. See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 19:22. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he kill them in anger” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 20

Exodus 20 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• v. 1-17: Yahweh gives the Ten Commandments
• v. 18-21: the people react
• v. 22-26: Yahweh gives a little more explanation about idols and altars

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Covenant

Yahweh’s covenant faithfulness is now based on the covenant he made with Abraham as well as the covenant he is making with Moses. (See: covenant faithfulness, covenant loyalty, covenant love and covenant)

Form of you

The singular form of you is used in the commandments; however, the commandments applied to the whole Israelite community. There is both a singular and a corporate aspect to them. You may need to choose between singular and plural if your language makes that distinction. (See: Singular Pronouns that refer to Groups)

Exodus 20:2

מִ⁠בֵּ֥ית עֲבָדִֽים

Yahweh speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. See how you translated this in Exodus 13:3. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “from the place where you were slaves” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 20:3

לֹֽ֣א יִהְיֶֽה־לְ⁠ךָ֛ אֱלֹהִ֥ים אֲחֵרִ֖ים עַל־פָּנָֽ⁠יַ

Alternate translation: “You must not worship any other gods besides me”

Exodus 20:4

וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר בַּ⁠שָּׁמַ֨יִם֙ מִ⁠מַּ֔עַל וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בָּ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠תָּ֑חַת וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בַּ⁠מַּ֖יִם מִ⁠תַּ֥חַת לָ⁠אָֽרֶץ

This list means all created things wherever they are. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nor anything that looks like anything created, whether that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or that is in the water under the earth” (See: Merism)

וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of likeness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “nor anything looking like something” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 20:5

לָ⁠הֶ֖ם

Here, them refers to carved figures or idols. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

בָּנִ֛ים עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים

Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by sons, therefore third and fourth refers to the grandchildren and great-grandchildren. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the sons down to the third and fourth generations” or “and even on the grandchildren and great-grandchildren” (See: Ellipsis)

עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “to generations 3 and 4”(See: Ordinal Numbers)

Exodus 20:6

וְ⁠עֹ֥שֶׂה חֶ֖סֶד לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים לְ⁠אֹהֲבַ֖⁠י

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faithfulness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I am faithful to the covenant with thousands of those who love me” (See: Abstract Nouns)

לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים

Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by the previous verse. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply necessary words from the context. Alternate translation: “to the thousandth generation” or “for a thousand generations” (See: Ellipsis)

לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים לְ⁠אֹהֲבַ֖⁠י

Here, thousands may mean: (1) “forever,” that is, “to all descendants forever” (2) a number too many to count. Alternate translation: “for every generation” or “forever to innumerable people who love me” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 20:7

תִשָּׂ֛א…יִשָּׂ֥א

To lift up, take, or use the name of Yahweh (with emptiness, i.e. improperly) covers many sorts of speaking or invoking his name or making a claim to him or attempting to manipulate him or misrepresenting him. A broad word should be used in translation of this term.

לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֛א אֶת־שֵֽׁם־יְהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֶ֖י⁠ךָ

Alternate translation: “You must not use the name of Yahweh your God”

לַ⁠שָּׁ֑וְא…לַ⁠שָּֽׁוְא

Alternate translation: “carelessly” or “without proper respect”

לֹ֤א יְנַקֶּה֙

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. . Alternate translation: “I will certainly consider guilty” (See: Double Negatives)

Exodus 20:8

לְ⁠קַדְּשֽׁ⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “to make it holy to me” or “to consecrate it to me”

Exodus 20:9

מְלַאכְתֶּֽ⁠ךָ

Alternate translation: “your occupation” or “your livelihood”

Exodus 20:10

בִּ⁠שְׁעָרֶֽי⁠ךָ

Cities often had walls around them to keep out enemies, and gates for people to go in and out. Anyone who was inside the gates was part of the community. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “within your community” or “inside your city” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 20:11

בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֑י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day seven” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Exodus 20:14

לֹ֖א תִּנְאָֽף

Alternate translation: “You must not have sex with anyone other than your spouse”

Exodus 20:16

לֹֽא־תַעֲנֶ֥ה בְ⁠רֵעֲ⁠ךָ֖ עֵ֥ד שָֽׁקֶר

Alternate translation: “You must not speak a false report against your neighbor”

Exodus 20:17

לֹ֥א תַחְמֹ֖ד

Alternate translation: “You must not strongly want to have” or “You must not want to take”

Exodus 20:18

הָ⁠הָ֖ר עָשֵׁ֑ן

Alternate translation: “the smoky mountain”

וַ⁠יָּנֻ֔עוּ

Alternate translation: “and they shook with fear”

וַ⁠יַּֽעַמְד֖וּ מֵֽ⁠רָחֹֽק

Alternate translation: “and stood far away”

Exodus 20:20

וּ⁠בַ⁠עֲב֗וּר תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛⁠וֹ עַל־פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֥י תֶחֱטָֽאוּ

Alternate translation: “so that you will honor him and not sin”

תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛⁠וֹ עַל־פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם

Here, fear is spoken of as something that could be above their faces. This means that they would be continually thinking about honoring God. It is similar to the image in Exodus 13:16. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you will live always reverencing him” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 20:21

וּ⁠מֹשֶׁה֙ נִגַּ֣שׁ

Alternate translation: “and Moses moved closer,”

Exodus 20:23

אֱלֹ֤הֵי כֶ֨סֶף֙ וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י זָהָ֔ב

Alternate translation: “gods made out of silver or gold” or “idols made out of silver or gold”

Exodus 20:24

מִזְבַּ֣ח אֲדָמָה֮

The phrase an altar of earth means an altar made of materials from the ground, such as stone, soil, or clay.

אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔⁠י

Here, name is a metonym for God’s being. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I cause myself to be remembered” (See: Metonymy)

אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔⁠י

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I choose for you to remember me” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 20:26

וְ⁠לֹֽא־תַעֲלֶ֥ה בְ⁠מַעֲלֹ֖ת עַֽל־מִזְבְּחִ֑⁠י

If you need to connect this statement more explicitly to the previous statements regarding building the alter, you could add a phrase about building steps. Alternate translation: “Do not build steps up to the altar and go up to it on those steps” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

אֲשֶׁ֛ר לֹֽא־תִגָּלֶ֥ה עֶרְוָתְ⁠ךָ֖ עָלָֽי⁠ו

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you do not expose your nakedness over it” (See: Active or Passive)

עֶרְוָתְ⁠ךָ֖

Alternate translation: “your private parts”

Exodus 21

Exodus 21 General Notes

This chapter begins to give the Israelite civil case law, that is, the explanation of how to apply the principles condensed in the ten commandments.

Structure:

• 1: Introduction
• 2-6: Laws regarding male slaves
• 7-11: Laws regarding female slaves
• 12-17: Capital crimes
• 18-36: Liability laws
  • 18-27: Regarding human violence
  • 28-36: Regarding damage done by or to animals

Translation Issues in this Chapter

Hypothetical situations

Throughout the case law, a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” It is followed by a description of the situation; then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will have these hypothetical situations. See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).

Passive construction

Many portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: Active or Passive.

Daughters sold as servants

The section from verses 7-11 may be somewhat confusing because a daughter that is sold as a servant is seamlessly connected to her becoming someone’s wife. It seems the two things could be closely related.

Ransom payment

In verse 30 a man whose bull killed someone may evade the death penalty by paying a ransom price, but the conditions for that happening are not clear.

Exodus 21:1

Yahweh continues speaking to Moses. There is no quote break between chapters.

תָּשִׂ֖ים

Alternate translation: “you must give” or “you must tell”

לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶֽם

Here, faces figuratively represents the presence of the nation. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 21:2

Here Yahweh begins telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.

כִּ֤י תִקְנֶה֙ עֶ֣בֶד עִבְרִ֔י

This is the first of many hypothetical situations, introduced by “when” or if, which you will encounter over the next several chapters. See the introduction to chapter 21. You will need to translate these consistently in a manner that expresses that these situations have not happened. (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

Exodus 21:3

אִם־בְּ⁠גַפּ֥⁠וֹ יָבֹ֖א בְּ⁠גַפּ֣⁠וֹ יֵצֵ֑א

What by himself means can be stated clearly. Some languages require that the additional condition, that he marries while a slave, be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “If he became a slave while he had no wife, and if he marries while he is a slave, the master need only free the man” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בְּ⁠גַפּ֥⁠וֹ…בְּ⁠גַפּ֣⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “alone” or “without a wife”

אִם־בַּ֤עַל אִשָּׁה֙ ה֔וּא

Alternate translation: “if he was married when he became a slave” or “if he came as a married man”

Exodus 21:5

אָמֹ֤ר יֹאמַר֙

Alternate translation: “makes a statement, saying”

לֹ֥א אֵצֵ֖א חָפְשִֽׁי

Alternate translation: “I do not want my master to set me free”

Exodus 21:6

הָ֣⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים

The word for God at its most literal means “great ones.” Here it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. Texts other than the standard Hebrew text support this reading. See Exodus 22:8-9 for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠רָצַ֨ע…אֶת־אָזְנ⁠וֹ֙

Alternate translation: “and … will put a hole in his ear”

בַּ⁠מַּרְצֵ֔עַ

An awl is a pointed tool used to make a hole

לְ⁠עֹלָֽם

Alternate translation: “until the end of his life” or “until he dies”

Exodus 21:8

This verse is the first of three possible situations between a master and his female slave.

יְעָדָ֖⁠הּ

Alternate translation: “has chosen her”

וְ⁠הֶפְדָּ֑⁠הּ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “then he must allow her father to buy her back” (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠בִגְד⁠וֹ־בָֽ⁠הּ

Alternate translation: “since he has deceived her”

Exodus 21:9

This verse is the second of three possible situations between a master and his female slave.

לִ⁠בְנ֖⁠וֹ יִֽיעָדֶ֑⁠נָּה

Alternate translation: “he decides that she is the one who will be his son’s wife”

כְּ⁠מִשְׁפַּ֥ט הַ⁠בָּנ֖וֹת יַעֲשֶׂה־לָּֽ⁠הּ

Alternate translation: “he must do to her according to the manner in which daughters are customarily treated”

Exodus 21:10

This verse and the next are the third of three possible situations between a master and his female slave.

שְׁאֵרָ֛⁠הּ כְּסוּתָ֥⁠הּ וְ⁠עֹנָתָ֖⁠הּ לֹ֥א יִגְרָֽע

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he must give the first wife the same food, clothing, and marital rights she had before” (See: Double Negatives)

וְ⁠עֹנָתָ֖⁠הּ

This term only occurs here in the Bible. It probably means things that a husband must do for his wife. Most commentators believe it specifically means having sexual relations with her, possibly so that she can bear children. Alternate translation: “or her right to intimacy” or “or her childbearing rights” (See: Euphemism)

Exodus 21:12

מַכֵּ֥ה אִ֛ישׁ

Alternate translation: “Whoever attacks a man”

מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly execute that person” or “you must certainly kill that person” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 21:13

וַ⁠אֲשֶׁר֙ לֹ֣א צָדָ֔ה

Alternate translation: “But if he did not plan to do it” or “But if he did not do it on purpose”

וְ⁠שַׂמְתִּ֤י לְ⁠ךָ֙ מָק֔וֹם אֲשֶׁ֥ר יָנ֖וּס שָֽׁמָּ⁠ה

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the purpose for choosing a place explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will choose a place to which he can run away to be safe” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 21:14

בְ⁠עָרְמָ֑ה

Alternate translation: “after thinking carefully about it”

תִּקָּחֶ֖⁠נּוּ

The word “him” refers to the one who killed his neighbor.

לָ⁠מֽוּת

Alternate translation: “to execute him”

Exodus 21:15

וּ⁠מַכֵּ֥ה אָבִ֛י⁠ו וְ⁠אִמּ֖⁠וֹ מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If anyone hits his father or mother, you must surely put him to death” or “You must surely kill anyone who hits his father or mother” (See: Active or Passive)

מ֥וֹת

Alternate translation: “certainly”

Exodus 21:16

מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must kill that kidnapper” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 21:17

וּ⁠מְקַלֵּ֥ל אָבִ֛י⁠ו וְ⁠אִמּ֖⁠וֹ מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must surely kill anyone who curses his father or his mother” (See: Active or Passive)

וּ⁠מְקַלֵּ֥ל

The word translated acts contemptuously means the opposite of “honor” (as in the commandment to honor one’s parents). Alternate translation: “Whoever acts dishonorably toward”

Exodus 21:19

יָק֞וּם

Alternate translation: “he gets better”

וְ⁠נִקָּ֣ה

Alternate translation: “then … is innocent”

שִׁבְתּ֛⁠וֹ

This refers to a situation when someone cannot work to earn money. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the time he could not work” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠רַפֹּ֥א יְרַפֵּֽא

Alternate translation: “and for his medical costs” or “and for his costs for healing”

Exodus 21:20

תַּ֣חַת יָד֑⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “because of the injury” or “because the master hit him”

נָקֹ֖ם יִנָּקֵֽם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly punish that man” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 21:21

כִּ֥י כַסְפּ֖⁠וֹ הֽוּא

A common view is that the loss of the valuable property, the slave, is itself a punishment. It may be that the master loses the slave for a time and also has to pay for his healing, or it may be that the slave dies after a few days. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that the servant was valuable to his master explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he has already lost his servant who was valuable to him” or “because he has already lost his servant’s work for a time and had to pay for his healing” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 21:22

וְ⁠יָצְא֣וּ יְלָדֶ֔י⁠הָ וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִהְיֶ֖ה אָס֑וֹן

It is not clear in the passage what happens to the child. The text is simply as in the ULT. Some have taken it to mean that the child dies because of premature birth, and the serious injury only relates to the woman. In this case, a fine is imposed for the loss of the child. However, the text could also mean that the child is born safely. A fine is still imposed because of the great danger to the two lives. Then the next few verses give consequences for any injury either to mother or child.

אָס֑וֹן

Alternate translation: “hurt”

עָנ֣וֹשׁ יֵעָנֵ֗שׁ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly fine the guilty man” or “the guilty man must pay a fine” (See: Active or Passive)

בִּ⁠פְלִלִֽים

Alternate translation: “what the judges decide”

Exodus 21:23

וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֥ה נֶ֖פֶשׁ תַּ֥חַת נָֽפֶשׁ

This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you must take the killer’s life for the murdered person’s life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 21:24

עַ֚יִן תַּ֣חַת עַ֔יִן

This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the striker’s eye for the injured person’s eye” (and repeated in like manner for each example throughout this and the next verse) (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 21:26

אִ֜ישׁ

Here, man refers to the owner of a slave.

תַּ֥חַת

Alternate translation: “as payment for”

Exodus 21:28

יִגַּ֨ח שׁ֥וֹר

Alternate translation: “an ox injures with its horns”

סָק֨וֹל יִסָּקֵ֜ל הַ⁠שּׁ֗וֹר

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely stone the ox to death” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠לֹ֤א יֵאָכֵל֙ אֶת־בְּשָׂר֔⁠וֹ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you must not eat its flesh” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 21:29

וְ⁠הוּעַ֤ד בִּ⁠בְעָלָי⁠ו֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִשְׁמְרֶ֔⁠נּוּ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state its owner was warned in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and someone warned its owner but he did not keep it in” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠הוּעַ֤ד בִּ⁠בְעָלָי⁠ו֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִשְׁמְרֶ֔⁠נּוּ

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the content of the warning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and its owner was warned that it gores but he did not keep it in” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠גַם־בְּעָלָ֖י⁠ו יוּמָֽת

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you must also kill its owner” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 21:30

אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑י⁠ו וְ⁠נָתַן֙ פִּדְיֹ֣ן נַפְשׁ֔⁠וֹ כְּ⁠כֹ֥ל אֲשֶׁר־יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽי⁠ו

The text does not specify who will impose a ransom on the ox’s owner. Since other texts indicate that justice is retributive and performed by the dead person’s family, that is one option. Another option is that the judges will impose it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express one of these explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑י⁠ו…יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽי⁠ו

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. However, you must make a decision regarding who is imposing the ransom or use an unspecified pronoun, if that is possible in your language (this second option would not make sense in English). Alternate translation: “If the judges impose a ransom on him … they impose on him” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 21:31

יִגָּ֖ח…יִגָּ֑ח

Alternate translation: “it injures with its horns … it injures with its horns”

לּֽ⁠וֹ

Here, him probably refers to the ox’s owner. Alternate translation: “to the owner” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 21:32

כֶּ֣סֶף׀ שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים שְׁקָלִ֗ים

In ancient times, a silver shekel weighed about 11 grams or about a third of an ounce. You could try to express the equivalent in terms of modern money values, but if you did, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. Instead, you could say something general like “30 silver coins” or give the equivalent weight or use the biblical term in the text and explain the weight in a footnote. Alternate translation: “330 grams of silver” (See: Biblical Money)

אִם־עֶ֛בֶד יִגַּ֥ח הַ⁠שּׁ֖וֹר

Because they are to kill the ox, the slave must have died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If an ox kills a male servant” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠הַ⁠שּׁ֖וֹר יִסָּקֵֽל

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must kill the ox by stoning it” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 21:33

יִפְתַּ֨ח…בּ֗וֹר

Alternate translation: “uncovers a hole in the ground” or “takes a cover off a hole in the ground”

Exodus 21:34

כֶּ֖סֶף יָשִׁ֣יב לִ⁠בְעָלָ֑י⁠ו

The owner must be paid for the loss of his animal. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he must pay the owner for the dead animal” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

יְשַׁלֵּ֔ם

Alternate translation: “must make restitution”

וְ⁠הַ⁠מֵּ֖ת יִֽהְיֶה־לּֽ⁠וֹ

The one who paid for the loss of the animal will become the owner of the dead animal and can do what he wants with it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the dead animal will belong to the owner of the pit” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 21:35

וְ⁠חָצ֣וּ אֶת־כַּסְפּ֔⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “and divide the money” or “and divide the money they receive”

Exodus 21:36

א֣וֹ נוֹדַ֗ע

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: Active or Passive)

נַגָּ֥ח הוּא֙ מִ⁠תְּמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם

Alternate translation: “the ox had gored other animals before”

וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִשְׁמְרֶ֖⁠נּוּ בְּעָלָ֑י⁠ו

This means that the owner did not keep his ox safely where it could not wander to hurt other animals. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and its owner did not keep it inside a fence” or “and its owner did not tie it securely” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

שַׁלֵּ֨ם יְשַׁלֵּ֥ם שׁוֹר֙ תַּ֣חַת הַ⁠שּׁ֔וֹר

The owner of the ox that killed must give an ox to the man who lost his ox. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the owner of the ox that killed must surely give a living ox to the owner of the ox that died” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 22

Exodus 22 General Notes

Structure

This chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. We will not attempt to provide an outline since almost every verse is about a different case.

Translation Issues in this Chapter

Hypothetical situations

Throughout the case law a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” Then there is a description of the situation, and then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will contain these hypothetical situations. See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).

Passive construction

Many portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: Active or Passive.

Exodus 22:1

Yahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.

כִּ֤י יִגְנֹֽב־אִישׁ֙ שׁ֣וֹר אוֹ־שֶׂ֔ה וּ⁠טְבָח֖⁠וֹ א֣וֹ מְכָר֑⁠וֹ

This is the first of many hypothetical situations in this chapter, introduced by “when” or if, which you will encounter over the next several chapters. See the introduction. You will need to translate these consistently in a manner that expresses that these situations have not actually happened. (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה…וְ⁠אַרְבַּע

Alternate translation: “5 … and 4” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 22:2

אִם־בַּ⁠מַּחְתֶּ֛רֶת יִמָּצֵ֥א הַ⁠גַּנָּ֖ב

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If anyone finds a thief while he is breaking in” (See: Active or Passive)

בַּ⁠מַּחְתֶּ֛רֶת

Alternate translation: “while using force to enter a house”

וְ⁠הֻכָּ֣ה וָ⁠מֵ֑ת

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if anyone strikes the thief so that he dies” (See: Active or Passive)

אֵ֥ין ל֖⁠וֹ דָּמִֽים

Alternate translation: “no one will be guilty of murdering him”

Exodus 22:3

אִם־זָרְחָ֥ה הַ⁠שֶּׁ֛מֶשׁ עָלָ֖י⁠ו

Alternate translation: “But if it is light before he breaks in” or “But if he breaks in and it is after sunrise”

וְ⁠נִמְכַּ֖ר בִּ⁠גְנֵבָתֽ⁠וֹ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must sell him as a slave in order to pay for what he stole” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 22:4

אִֽם־הִמָּצֵא֩ תִמָּצֵ֨א בְ⁠יָד֜⁠וֹ הַ⁠גְּנֵבָ֗ה…חַיִּ֑ים

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If they find that he still has the live animal that he stole” (See: Active or Passive)

שְׁנַ֖יִם יְשַׁלֵּֽם

The meaning of compensate double is not entirely clear. Most interpretations follow the UST, that is, two animals total must be given, the stolen one and one more. Some interpret double to mean the thief must pay two animals for every animal that he took, so three total. It would be best to leave double as ambiguous as possible. Alternate translation: “he must compensate twice what he stole”

Exodus 22:5

יַבְעֶר…וּ⁠בִעֵ֖ר

Alternate translation: “causes to eat plants … and it eats plants”

בְּעִיר֔וֹ

Livestock is a collective singular noun that could refer to cows, goats, sheep, or basically any domesticated animals. In some languages you will need to translate it as a plural. (See: Collective Nouns)

יְשַׁלֵּֽם

Alternate translation: “he must pay back the owner of that field”

Exodus 22:6

כִּֽי־תֵצֵ֨א אֵ֜שׁ וּ⁠מָצְאָ֤ה קֹצִים֙ וְ⁠נֶאֱכַ֣ל

Here, breaks out and consumes can be stated in active form or in another way that is natural in your language if your language does not use the passive form in this way. Alternate translation: “If someone starts a fire, and it spreads in thorns, and it consumes” (See: Active or Passive)

וּ⁠מָצְאָ֤ה קֹצִים֙

Alternate translation: “and moves along the ground through dry plants”

גָּדִ֔ישׁ

This is grain that has been cut and tied in bundles. Alternate translation: “bundled grain” or “harvested grain” (See: Translate Unknowns)

הַ⁠קָּמָ֖ה

This is grain that has not been cut, but it is ready to be harvested. Alternate translation: “the grain still growing in the field” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 22:7

לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֔ר

Alternate translation: “to watch over it” or “to keep it safe”

וְ⁠גֻנַּ֖ב

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone steals it” (See: Active or Passive)

אִם־יִמָּצֵ֥א הַ⁠גַּנָּ֖ב

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if you find the thief” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 22:8

אִם־לֹ֤א יִמָּצֵא֙ הַ⁠גַּנָּ֔ב וְ⁠נִקְרַ֥ב בַּֽעַל־הַ⁠בַּ֖יִת אֶל־הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים

You may need to translate these in an active voice if your language does not use passive in this way. Alternate translation: “If no one finds the thief, bring the owner of the house to God” (See: Active or Passive)

הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים

The word for God at its most literal means “great ones.” Here and in the next verse it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. See Exodus 21:6 for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: Metonymy)

שָׁלַ֛ח יָד֖⁠וֹ בִּ⁠מְלֶ֥אכֶת רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ

This is an idiom for stealing. If you have a way of saying this in your language, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “he has stolen his neighbor’s property” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 22:9

דְּבַר…דְּבַר

Alternate translation: “dispute of … the dispute of”

כִּי־ה֣וּא זֶ֔ה

Alternate translation: “This is mine” or “This is my missing property”

הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים…אֱלֹהִ֔ים

The word used here for God, at its most literal, means “great ones.” Here and in the previous verse it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. See Exodus 21:6 for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 22:10

נִשְׁבַּ֥ר אוֹ־נִשְׁבָּ֖ה

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled in the UST. (See: Active or Passive)

נִשְׁבָּ֖ה

Here, carried away means that it is not a thief but a wild animal that takes the ox or sheep away (to eat it). See verse 12 for cases where the animal is stolen while in another’s care.

Exodus 22:11

שְׁבֻעַ֣ת יְהוָ֗ה תִּהְיֶה֙ בֵּ֣ין שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם…וְ⁠לָקַ֥ח בְּעָלָ֖י⁠ו

Only the man who is accused of stealing the animal must swear the oath. The owner of the lost animal must accept the oath that has been sworn. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man who was caring for the animal must swear an oath before Yahweh … and the owner must accept that oath” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 22:12

וְ⁠אִם־גָּנֹ֥ב יִגָּנֵ֖ב מֵ⁠עִמּ֑⁠וֹ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But if someone stole the animal from him” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 22:13

אִם־טָרֹ֥ף יִטָּרֵ֖ף

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But if a wild beast tore the animal in pieces” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 22:14

שַׁלֵּ֥ם יְשַׁלֵּֽם

Alternate translation: “must certainly repay with another animal” or “must certainly pay the owner for the animal”

וְ⁠נִשְׁבַּ֣ר אוֹ־מֵ֑ת

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled in the UST.(See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 22:15

אִם־שָׂכִ֣יר

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone rented the animal” (See: Active or Passive)

בָּ֖א בִּ⁠שְׂכָרֽ⁠וֹ

The one who borrowed the animal will not have to pay the owner anything more than the hiring or rental fee. This fee will pay for the loss of the animal. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the money that someone paid to rent the animal will cover the loss of the animal” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בִּ⁠שְׂכָרֽ⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “for its rental fee” or “for the money paid to rent the animal”

Exodus 22:16

וְ⁠כִֽי־יְפַתֶּ֣ה אִ֗ישׁ בְּתוּלָ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה

Alternate translation: “If a man persuades a virgin who is not engaged that she wants to lie with him”

לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה

Alternate translation: “not promised to be married”

וְ⁠שָׁכַ֣ב

Lying with someone refers to having sex. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “if he has sex with her” (See: Euphemism)

מָהֹ֛ר יִמְהָרֶ֥⁠נָּה

The bride price was money paid to the family to compensate for the loss of their daughter.

Exodus 22:17

ל֑⁠וֹ…יִשְׁקֹ֔ל

Here, him and he refer back to the man who seduced the virgin. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 22:19

כָּל־שֹׁכֵ֥ב עִם־בְּהֵמָ֖ה

This refers to sexual relations. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “Whoever has sexual relations with an animal” (See: Euphemism)

כָּל־שֹׁכֵ֥ב עִם־בְּהֵמָ֖ה מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state be put to death in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must surely execute whoever lies with an animal” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 22:20

יָֽחֳרָ֑ם

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation (placed at the beginning of the sentence): “You must completely destroy” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 22:21

לֹא־תוֹנֶ֖ה

Alternate translation: “You must not mistreat” or “You must not cheat”

כִּֽי־גֵרִ֥ים הֱיִיתֶ֖ם בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם

The Israelites are called to remember their previous condition, that they lived as foreign guests in Egypt. They came first to avoid the famine in Jacob and Joseph’s time and were dependent on Egyptian hospitality. Later they were wronged and oppressed, and they are not to do that to those who sojourn with them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for you were wronged and oppressed as sojourners in the land of Egypt” or “for you also depended on hospitality while you lived as sojourners in Egypt” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 22:22

כָּל־אַלְמָנָ֥ה וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם לֹ֥א תְעַנּֽוּ⁠ן׃

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You must treat all widows and fatherless children fairly” (See: Double Negatives)

אַלְמָנָ֥ה

Alternate translation: “woman whose husband has died”

וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם

Alternate translation: “or child with no parents”

Exodus 22:24

וְ⁠חָרָ֣ה אַפִּ֔⁠י

This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh will be angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and I will became very angry” (See: Idiom)

בֶּ⁠חָ֑רֶב

To be killed with the sword is a metonym that means a person will die violently, perhaps while fighting in a war. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “violently” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 22:25

כְּ⁠נֹשֶׁ֑ה

Alternate translation: “like one who lends money”

לֹֽא־תְשִׂימ֥וּ⁠ן עָלָ֖י⁠ו נֶֽשֶׁךְ

Alternate translation: “you must not charge him extra money for borrowing” or “you must not charge him extra money for the loan”

Exodus 22:27

כְסוּתוֹ֙ לְ⁠בַדָּ֔⁠הּ

Alternate translation: “is his only coat” or “is his only garment to keep him warm”

בַּ⁠מֶּ֣ה יִשְׁכָּ֔ב

This question adds emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He will have nothing to wear while he sleeps!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Exodus 22:28

אֱלֹהִ֖ים לֹ֣א תְקַלֵּ֑ל

Alternate translation: “Do not insult God” or “Do not speak evil about God”

וְ⁠נָשִׂ֥יא בְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ לֹ֥א תָאֹֽר

Alternate translation: “and do not ask God to do bad things to your ruler”

Exodus 22:29

לֹ֣א תְאַחֵ֑ר

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You must bring all of your offerings” (See: Double Negatives)

Exodus 22:30

שִׁבְעַ֤ת

Alternate translation: “7” (See: Numbers)

בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁמִינִ֖י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 8” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Exodus 22:31

וְ⁠אַנְשֵׁי־קֹ֖דֶשׁ תִּהְי֣וּ⁠ן לִ֑⁠י

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “And you shall be holy men to men” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 23

Exodus 23 General Notes

Structure

This chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. It also touches on the patterns of life regarding the Sabbaths (verses 10-12) and Festivals (verses 14-19). At verse 20 Yahweh begins telling them about their future as they go to and live in the promised land.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Celebrations of feasts and festivals

The people of Israel were required to celebrate certain feasts and festivals. These were part of the law of Moses, and some are described in this chapter. Their purpose was to worship Yahweh and to remember the great things Yahweh has done for them.

Exodus 23:1

Yahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.

לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֖א שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of report and emptiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You must not report emptily” or “You must not report falsely” (See: Abstract Nouns)

שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא

Alternate translation: “a false testimony”

אַל־תָּ֤שֶׁת יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ עִם־רָשָׁ֔ע

Here, to put your hand with the wicked means to support the lies that he is telling in order to harm someone else. The image is of putting out your hand to help him, to make him stronger than he would be on his own. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You must not assist the wicked” (See: Idiom)

עֵ֥ד חָמָֽס

Here, violence can also mean “wrong.” Either way, it means to harm another person by committing injustice (violence to justice) by lying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a false witness” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 23:2

וְ⁠לֹא־תַעֲנֶ֣ה

Alternate translation: “and you also must not speak”

לֹֽא־תִהְיֶ֥ה אַחֲרֵֽי־רַבִּ֖ים לְ⁠רָעֹ֑ת

This is a metaphor that describes one’s agreeing with a group of people as if he actually walked behind that group. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You must not do the evil that the crowd wants” or “You must not agree with the majority for evil” (See: Metaphor)

לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת

The phrase “from justice” is omitted twice but should be understood in both cases. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to turn aside from justice … that turns aside from justice” (See: Ellipsis)

לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת

Here, to turn aside means to do illegal or immoral actions that result in an unjust ruling. Alternate translation: “to pervert justice … that perverts justice”

Exodus 23:6

לֹ֥א תַטֶּ֛ה מִשְׁפַּ֥ט אֶבְיֹנְ⁠ךָ֖ בְּ⁠רִיבֽ⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “Do not decide to treat a poor man unjustly in legal matters”

בְּ⁠רִיבֽ⁠וֹ

Here, in his lawsuit refers to any matter that a court decides.

Exodus 23:7

מִ⁠דְּבַר־שֶׁ֖קֶר תִּרְחָ֑ק

Here distance is used figuratively to tell the Israelites to have no part in deception. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Do not speak deceptively” or “Do not join a false matter” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠נָקִ֤י וְ⁠צַדִּיק֙

These two terms mean very similar things, both of which contrast with the wicked later in the verse. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “and … the person who has not done anything wrong or the person who always does what is right” or “and … the person who does right and not wrong” (See: Doublet)

לֹא־אַצְדִּ֖יק רָשָֽׁע

Alternate translation: “I will not find the wicked not guilty” or “I will not say that a wicked person is innocent”

Exodus 23:8

כִּ֤י הַ⁠שֹּׁ֨חַד֙ יְעַוֵּ֣ר פִּקְחִ֔ים וִֽ⁠יסַלֵּ֖ף דִּבְרֵ֥י צַדִּיקִֽים

Here, a “bribe” is described as if it could take action itself that negatively affects justice. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “for if you do, an evil person can give money to blind the clear-sighted and to pervert the words of the righteous” (See: Personification)

כִּ֤י הַ⁠שֹּׁ֨חַד֙ יְעַוֵּ֣ר פִּקְחִ֔ים וִֽ⁠יסַלֵּ֖ף דִּבְרֵ֥י צַדִּיקִֽים

To blind the clear-sighted is a metaphor that means causing those who know what is right to act like they do not. And perverts the words of the righteous could mean causes those who would speak the truth (in court) to lie or causes the judge to give an evil judgment or causes those listening to the words of the righteous to choose to act as if they had heard something different. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “for a bribe causes those who understand the right thing to do not to do it and causes good men to speak lies” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 23:9

אֶת־נֶ֣פֶשׁ הַ⁠גֵּ֔ר

Alternate translation: “the feelings of the foreigner”

Exodus 23:10

תְּבוּאָתָֽ⁠הּ

Alternate translation: “the food its plants produce”

וְ⁠שֵׁ֥שׁ

Alternate translation: “And 6” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 23:11

וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֞ת

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “But year 7” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

תִּשְׁמְטֶ֣⁠נָּה וּ⁠נְטַשְׁתָּ֗⁠הּ

This means to leave the land fallow, that is, in its natural state, unplowed, unplanted, not used to grow food. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וְ⁠אָֽכְלוּ֙ אֶבְיֹנֵ֣י עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ

The poor can eat any food that grows on its own in a field that is not cultivated. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “so the poor among your people may harvest and eat any food that grows on its own in that field” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 23:12

שֽׁוֹרְ⁠ךָ֙ וַ⁠חֲמֹרֶ֔⁠ךָ

Alternate translation: “your work animals”

שֵׁ֤שֶׁת

Alternate translation: “6” (See: Numbers)

וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “and on day 7” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

וְ⁠יִנָּפֵ֥שׁ בֶּן־אֲמָתְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠הַ⁠גֵּֽר

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and the son of your female slave and the sojourner may refresh themselves” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 23:13

תִּשָּׁמֵ֑רוּ

Alternate translation: “Do” or “Obey”

וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ

These two instructions mean almost the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Be sure never to speak the names of other gods” (See: Parallelism)

וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ

These parallel phrases probably mean praying to other gods. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not pray to other gods, never let me hear you do that” (See: Metonymy)

לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ

To be on your mouth means to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nor speak them” (See: Metonymy)

לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also see previous note. Alternate translation: “nor speak them so someone could hear them” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 23:14

שָׁלֹ֣שׁ

Alternate translation: “3” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 23:15

הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב

Aviv is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated this in Exodus 13:4. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: Hebrew Months)

שִׁבְעַ֣ת

Alternate translation: “7” (See: Numbers)

וְ⁠לֹא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖⁠י רֵיקָֽם

Understatement is used here to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You must not come to me without a proper offering” or “You must always bring an offering to me” (See: Double Negatives)

Exodus 23:16

וְ⁠חַ֤ג הַ⁠קָּצִיר֙

Elsewhere this is called the “Festival of Weeks.” See Exodus 34:22 and Deuteronomy 16:9 and following.

וְ⁠חַ֤ג הָֽ⁠אָסִף֙

This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. Alternate translation: “And the Festival of the Ingathering”

בְּ⁠צֵ֣את הַ⁠שָּׁנָ֔ה

The phrase in the exiting of the year means at the end of the year. The year is pictured as something that is leaving. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “as the year goes out” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 23:17

יֵרָאֶה֙…אֶל־פְּנֵ֖י הָ⁠אָדֹ֥ן׀ יְהוָֽה׃

Here, to appear to the face of the Lord Yahweh means to gather to worship. To the face is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 23:20

לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠ךָ

This means “in front of you.” Alternate translation: “in front of you” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 23:21

הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִ⁠פָּנָ֛י⁠ו

This means to respect him; from his face refers to his person. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Show respect to him” (See: Metonymy)

הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִ⁠פָּנָ֛י⁠ו

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to him” (See: Active or Passive)

אַל־תַּמֵּ֣ר בּ֑⁠וֹ כִּ֣י לֹ֤א יִשָּׂא֙ לְ⁠פִשְׁעֲ⁠כֶ֔ם כִּ֥י שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ׃

There are two reasons given for the instruction do not cause bitterness in him. They are connected in such a way that you could say: “Because my name is within him, he will not forgive your transgressions; therefore, do not cause bitterness in him.” The relation of the name and forgiveness is not explicit. Alternate translation: “If you provoke him, he will not pardon your sins, for my name is within him” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ

Here, name refers to God’s authority. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “he has my authority” (See: Metonymy)

וּ⁠שְׁמַ֥ע בְּ⁠קֹל֖⁠וֹ

Here, voice represents what the angel says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and obey what he says” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 23:22

אִם־שָׁמֹ֤עַ תִּשְׁמַע֙ בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ

Here, voice represents what the angel says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you carefully obey what he says” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠אָֽיַבְתִּי֙ אֶת־אֹ֣יְבֶ֔י⁠ךָ וְ⁠צַרְתִּ֖י אֶת־צֹרְרֶֽי⁠ךָ

These two phrases mean the same thing and are used for emphasis. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: Parallelism)

Exodus 23:23

לְ⁠פָנֶי⁠ךָ֒

This phrase, before your face, means “in front of you.” Alternate translation: “in front of you” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 23:24

וְ⁠לֹ֥א תַעֲשֶׂ֖ה כְּ⁠מַֽעֲשֵׂי⁠הֶ֑ם

The Israelites must not live as the people who worship other gods. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and you must not live as the people live who worship those gods” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 23:25

וּ⁠בֵרַ֥ךְ אֶֽת־לַחְמְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠אֶת־מֵימֶ֑י⁠ךָ

Here, your bread and your water is a merism that means food and drink. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and he will bless your food and drink” or “and he will bless you by giving you food and drink” (See: Merism)

וּ⁠בֵרַ֥ךְ…וַ⁠הֲסִרֹתִ֥י

Yahweh switched between the first and third pronoun to refer to himself. Here, both he and I refer to Yahweh. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 23:26

לֹ֥א תִהְיֶ֛ה מְשַׁכֵּלָ֥ה וַ⁠עֲקָרָ֖ה

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Every woman will be able to become pregnant and give birth to healthy babies” (See: Double Negatives)

מְשַׁכֵּלָ֥ה

to have a pregnancy end early and unexpectedly, resulting in the death of the baby

אֶת־מִסְפַּ֥ר יָמֶ֖י⁠ךָ אֲמַלֵּֽא

This is an idiom that means to live a long time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you a long life” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 23:27

לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠ךָ

This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “before you” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠נָתַתִּ֧י אֶת־כָּל־אֹיְבֶ֛י⁠ךָ אֵלֶ֖י⁠ךָ עֹֽרֶף

This is an idiom meaning that the enemies will turn and run away (showing the Israelites the backs of their necks). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and I will make all of your enemies flee” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 23:28

לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י⁠ךָ…מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנֶֽי⁠ךָ

This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “before you … from before you” (See: Metonymy)

הַ⁠צִּרְעָ֖ה

The hornet is a flying insect that can sting people and cause pain. (See: Translate Unknowns)

הַ⁠צִּרְעָ֖ה…וְ⁠גֵרְשָׁ֗ה

Here, hornet is used in the singular but refers to a large group of the flying, stinging insects. It agrees in number with hornet. It may be necessary to translate as a plural. Alternate translation: “hornets … and they will drive out” (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 23:29

מִ⁠פָּנֶ֖י⁠ךָ

This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: Metonymy)

פֶּן־תִּהְיֶ֤ה הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ שְׁמָמָ֔ה

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the rest of the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “lest the land become desolate because no one would be living in the land” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 23:30

מִ⁠פָּנֶ֑י⁠ךָ

This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 23:31

מִ⁠פָּנֶֽי⁠ךָ

This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 23:33

כִּֽי־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠מוֹקֵֽשׁ

This means worshiping other gods will lead the people of Israel to certain destruction, as if they were an animal caught in a hunter’s trap. It could also be saying that leaving the other people around will make it so that the Israelites see the other people’s worship and are lured (like in a trap) into worshiping the other gods, which is a sin against Yahweh. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Worshiping them will surely destroy you” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 24

Exodus 24 General Notes

Structure

• v. 1-2: Yahweh summons Moses
• v. 3-8: Moses reads the covenant and the people accept it; this is ritually marked by sacrifice and sprinkling of blood
• v. 9-11: Moses and Israelite elders go up the mountain, see God and eat
• v. 12-15: Yahweh summons Moses further up the mountain without the other elders, and he goes
• v. 16-18: Description of Yahweh’s glory, and Moses is at the top of the mountain

Potential Translation Issues

• there are a number of similes used to describe people’s encounter with God
• “covenant” appears in a variety of ways
• the mountain, the mountain of God, and Mount Sinai are all the same location

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Moses’ covenant

The people of Israel promise to obey the covenant Yahweh made with Moses. Their continued blessings were contingent upon their obedience to this covenant. (See: promise, promised and covenant)

God’s holiness

Because Yahweh is perfectly holy, he can only be approached in a certain way. Because of this, only Moses was allowed near Yahweh. This is also why Yahweh is described as a “devouring fire.” (See: holy, holiness, unholy, sacred)

Exodus 24:1

A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

נָדָ֣ב וַ⁠אֲבִיה֔וּא

Nadab and Abihu are men’s names. See how you translated these names in Exodus 6:23. (See: How to Translate Names)

אֶל־יְהוָ֗ה

Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים

Alternate translation: “and 70” (See: Numbers)

וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּחֲוִיתֶ֖ם

Here, after bow down, “to me” is implied. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and you shall bow down to me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 24:2

וְ⁠הֵ֖ם

Here, they refers to all the other people mentioned in verse 1. Alternate translation: “and Aaron, Nadab, Abihu, and the elders” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה

Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 24:3

Verses 3-8 tell of a different scene than the rest of the chapter, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. It seems that there were some preparations needed before Moses and the elders could go up to meet Yahweh. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

See Exodus 19:8 for how you translated a very similar event.

ק֤וֹל אֶחָד֙

Here, with one voice is an idiom that means the people were in complete agreement. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “together” or “in agreement” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 24:4

תַּ֣חַת הָ⁠הָ֑ר

Alternate translation: “at the base of the mountain”

וּ⁠שְׁתֵּ֤ים עֶשְׂרֵה֙…לִ⁠שְׁנֵ֥ים עָשָׂ֖ר

Alternate translation: “and 12 … according to the 12” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 24:7

סֵ֣פֶר הַ⁠בְּרִ֔ית

Here, book does not mean something in our modern format. It was likely a piece of papyrus (an early form of paper made from reeds) or animal skin that rolled up. Alternate translation: “the Covenant he had written down” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 24:8

הַ⁠דָּ֔ם

This refers to the blood that Moses had put into the bowls. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

עַ֥ל כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים הָ⁠אֵֽלֶּה׃

These words refers to what Moses just read aloud to them, that is, Yahweh’s commands. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which I just read aloud to you and you agreed to” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 24:9

A new scene begins with this verse, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. Here the narrative is connected to verse 2. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

נָדָב֙ וַ⁠אֲבִיה֔וּא

Nadab and Abihu are men’s names. See how you translated these names in Exodus 6:23. (See: How to Translate Names)

וַ⁠יַּ֥עַל

The men went up the mountain. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 24:10

וְ⁠תַ֣חַת רַגְלָ֗י⁠ו

And under his feet speaks of God as if he had human feet. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And below where God was” (See: Personification)

לִבְנַ֣ת

a hard surface for walking or riding

הַ⁠סַּפִּ֔יר

A sapphire is a gemstone that is blue in color. If there is a blue gemstone that your people are familiar with, you may use it here, as the exact gemstone is not certain. You may also describe it. Alternate translation: “a blue gemstone” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וּ⁠כְ⁠עֶ֥צֶם הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֖יִם לָ⁠טֹֽהַר

The point of this comparison is the blueness of the tile. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and it was blue like the sky” (See: Simile)

Exodus 24:11

וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ

Here, his hand refers to his judgement. This means that God did not harm the leaders. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God did not harm the Israelite leaders” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ

What would be expected is that they would die if they saw God. The Israelite elders ability to see God and live is unexpected. Be sure your translation conveys that. Alternate translation: “However, he did not send out his hand to the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

Exodus 24:12

לְ⁠הוֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם

This means so that Moses and the other Israelite leaders could teach the laws and commandments to the Israelite people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 24:13

וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ

Joshua is introduced here again. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ מְשָׁרְת֑⁠וֹ

The word translated servant here is usually associated with a higher position, like a government minister. Avoid using a word that implies a lower-class serving role. Alternate translation: “and Joshua his assistant”

Exodus 24:14

וְ⁠אֶל־הַ⁠זְּקֵנִ֤ים אָמַר֙

The structure of the Hebrew indicates but does not require that this speech by Moses happened before verse 13 (hence had said). The ULT takes this view, however, for languages where it is hard to express events out of order, the UST reflects the other grammatical possibility and says in 24:13 that Moses started up the mountain and in 24:15 that he went the rest of the way up the mountain. Following this, you can view this verse as if Moses paused and gave these final instructions as he was leaving the elders behind, thus keeping a sequential structure. Either approach is permissible by the text, but the approach of the ULT is preferred, if possible. (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

לָ֣⁠נוּ

Alternate translation: “Joshua and me”

וְ⁠חוּר֙

Hur is a man’s name. See how you translated this name in Exodus 17:10. (See: How to Translate Names)

וְ⁠הִנֵּ֨ה

Behold is used to draw attention to important information that Moses is about to tell them. It is frequently omitted. If your language uses a statement to draw attention to important information, you should consider using it here. Alternate translation: “Remember”

מִי־בַ֥עַל דְּבָרִ֖ים

This is an idiom that means that someone has a legal dispute or complaint. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever has a legal claim” or “Anyone with a law case” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 24:16

כְּבוֹד־יְהוָה֙

This was the brilliant light of Yahweh’s presence. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the brilliant light showing Yahweh’s presence” (See: Metonymy)

שֵׁ֣שֶׁת

Alternate translation: “6” (See: Numbers)

בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day number 7” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Exodus 24:17

כְּ⁠אֵ֥שׁ אֹכֶ֖לֶת

This means the glory of Yahweh was very large and seemed to burn brightly, like a fire. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like a big fire burning” (See: Simile)

לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל

Their eyes represent seeing, and seeing represents their thoughts or judgment about what they saw. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. See how you translated a similar expression in 15:26. Alternate translation: “to the Israelites” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 24:18

אַרְבָּעִ֣ים י֔וֹם וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִ֖ים לָֽיְלָה

Alternate translation: “forty days and forty nights” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 25

Exodus 25 General Notes

Structure:

• v. 1-7: Instructions for gifts the Israelites may give to help build the place where they will worship God
• v. 8-9: Introductory building instructions
• v. 10-22: Instructions for building the Box of the Testimony
• v. 23-30: Instructions for building the table
• v. 31-39: Instructions for building the lampstand
• v. 40: Summary instruction

Special Concepts in this Chapter

• The tent of meeting and Box of the Testimony are introduced in this chapter.
• Translators will need to take special care in translating the concept of atonement.

Potential Translation Issues in this Chapter:

• There are many unfamiliar items in this chapter. Fortunately they are mostly all physical items. Translators will have to try to understand what each item is and translate it into the closest equivalent in their culture. It may be helpful for translators to try to find images depicting some of the items the Israelites were to make.
• There are some biblical weights and measurements that translators may not have encountered before.
• From verse 11 until the end of chapter 30, almost every instruction regarding the construction of the tent of meeting and all the associated items are given with a singular form of “you,” as if Moses himself would make them. However, it is clear and made explicit in chapter 31 that certain skilled craftsmen will receive these instructions from Moses and make these items. In some languages you may need to change from second to third person throughout, following the pattern in 25:10. There are a few exceptions which will have their own note. See: First, Second or Third Person and Singular Pronouns that refer to Groups.

Exodus 25:2

דַּבֵּר֙

The beginning of this verse marks the start of a very long direct quote which continues until the end of Exo 30:10. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

דַּבֵּר֙ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠יִקְחוּ־לִ֖⁠י תְּרוּמָ֑ה

In some languages you may have to make and they shall take a contribution for me a direct quote. Note that this will make it a second-level quotation and you will need to mark it with second-level quotation marking if your language uses them. Alternate translation: “Say to the sons of Israel, ‘You shall take a contribution for me.’ ” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִדְּבֶ֣⁠נּוּ לִבּ֔⁠וֹ

This is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom, though the body part may vary. Alternate translation: “who wants to give one” (See: Idiom)

תִּקְח֖וּ

The word you is plural and refers to Moses and the leaders. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 25:4

וּ⁠תְכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י

This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י

A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 25:5

מְאָדָּמִ֛ים

When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish in color. It is not clear whether these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: Translate Unknowns)

תְּחָשִׁ֖ים

The meaning of this word is not known. It may refer to some water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. Sea cows on Wikipedia (See: Translate Unknowns)

שִׁטִּֽים

A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. See on Wikipedia (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 25:6

בְּשָׂמִים֙

Here, spices are things made from parts of plants that people dry and then grind into a powder to put in oil or food, giving it a particular smell or flavor. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 25:7

אַבְנֵי־שֹׁ֕הַם

An onyx is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red, or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י

Alternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “ and treasured gems for”

Exodus 25:9

אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֔

Here, you is singular and refers to Moses. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

כֵּלָ֑י⁠ו

Here, utensils is a general term that you could translate by a broad term that could encompass all of the things used in the Dwelling, as described in this and the several following chapters. Alternate translation: “its implements”

תַּעֲשֽׂוּ

Here, you is plural and refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

תַּעֲשֽׂוּ

Since Moses does not construct these items himself, you may consider shifting the instructions to the third person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “they shall make it” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 25:10

שִׁטִּ֑ים

These trees, acacias, are small trees with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in 25:5. See on Wikipedia (See: Translate Unknowns)

אַמָּתַ֨יִם וָ⁠חֵ֜צִי…וְ⁠אַמָּ֤ה וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וְ⁠אַמָּ֥ה וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 115cm … 69cm … 69cm (See: Biblical Distance)

וָ⁠חֵ֜צִי…וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי

A half means one part out of two equal parts. (See: Fractions)

Exodus 25:12

וְ⁠יָצַ֣קְתָּ לּ֗⁠וֹ אַרְבַּע֙ טַבְּעֹ֣ת זָהָ֔ב

Casting rings was a process in which gold was melted, poured into a mold that was in the shape of a ring, and then allowed to cool and harden. If this sort of metal-working process is unknown to your people, you may simply describe it, or use a word meaning “make,” as the UST does. The UST approach is preferred, as the creation process is not in focus here, and it would be cumbersome to include the description in the text. You could use a word meaning “make,” and include the description in a footnote if you are including those and your team feels it is important to understand. Alternate translation: “You shall make four rings of gold by melting the gold and pouring it into molds” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 25:13

שִׁטִּ֑ים

A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in 25:5. See on Wikipedia (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 25:15

בְּ⁠טַבְּעֹת֙ הָ⁠אָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַ⁠בַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ

These two phrases mean similar things. Yahweh is saying the same thing in two different ways to emphasize how important this command is. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The poles belong in the rings of the box; no one is ever to remove them” (See: Parallelism)

בְּ⁠טַבְּעֹת֙ הָ⁠אָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַ⁠בַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as seen in the UST. (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 25:17

אַמָּתַ֤יִם וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וְ⁠אַמָּ֥ה וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to the metric system is: 115 centimeters … 69 centimeters … 69 centimeters (See: Biblical Distance)

וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי

A half means one part out of two equal parts. (See: Fractions)

Exodus 25:19

מִן־הַ⁠כַּפֹּ֛רֶת תַּעֲשׂ֥וּ אֶת־הַ⁠כְּרֻבִ֖ים עַל־שְׁנֵ֥י קְצוֹתָֽי⁠ו

This seems to indicate that the cherubim should be formed out of the same piece of gold as the rest of the lid. It may, however, mean that at the end they should be one piece, so the gold should be heated to melting and the lid and cherubim joined together. Alternate translation: “You shall join the cherubim to the atonement lid on its two ends”

Exodus 25:22

לְ⁠ךָ֮…אִתְּ⁠ךָ֜…אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֖

Here, you is singular and refers to Moses. If you have been using a plural you for Yahweh’s commands which have been to give to others, make sure you use the singular form of “you” here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

Exodus 25:23

שִׁטִּ֑ים אַמָּתַ֤יִם אָרְכּ⁠וֹ֙ וְ⁠אַמָּ֣ה רָחְבּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַמָּ֥ה וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי קֹמָתֽ⁠וֹ

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 115 centimeters … 46 centimeters … 69 centimeters (See: Biblical Distance)

וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי

A half means one part out of two equal parts. (See: Fractions)

Exodus 25:24

This verse is almost identical to 25:11.

Exodus 25:25

טֹ֖פַח

You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A handbreadth is a measurement of approximately eight centimeters. (See: Biblical Distance)

לּ֥⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “for the table”

Exodus 25:27

לְ⁠בָתִּ֣ים

Here, to house the poles means that the rings will hold the poles. Since the rings are where the poles belong for use when carrying the table, the rings are figuratively in their house. If your language has a similar idiom meaning “place of belonging,” you may use it, or you may translate the idea. Alternate translation: “to be a place for” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 25:28

וְ⁠נִשָּׂא־בָ֖⁠ם אֶת־הַ⁠שֻּׁלְחָֽן

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And you shall carry the table with them” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 25:29

קְּעָרֹתָ֜י⁠ו וְ⁠כַפֹּתָ֗י⁠ו וּ⁠קְשׂוֹתָי⁠ו֙ וּ⁠מְנַקִּיֹּתָ֔י⁠ו

We do not know precisely what these dishes were. It is likely that the plates were mostly flat dishes for holding the bread that would be on the table. The pans may have been shallow bowls or deep plates for holding incense, or they may have been something more like a ladle or spoon. The pitchers probably held wine to be poured into the bowls for the drink offerings. You will need to translate using the closest word for each such item in your culture. (See: Translate Unknowns)

אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֻסַּ֖ךְ בָּ⁠הֵ֑ן

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “from which the priests will pour out” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 25:30

לֶ֥חֶם פָּנִ֖ים

Here, faces figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. This bread represented the presence of God. Alternate translation: “the bread of the Presence” (See: Metonymy)

לְ⁠פָנַ֥⁠י

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in front of me” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 25:31

מִקְשָׁ֞ה

Alternate translation: “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in Exodus 25:18.

תֵּעָשֶׂ֤ה

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you shall make” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 25:33

מְֽשֻׁקָּדִ֞ים

Almond blossoms are white or pink flowers with five petals. (An almond is a kind of nut.) You may want to include a short description as a footnote or in the text (if that is your translation style) the first time this object is encountered. Alternate translation: “shaped like the five-petaled almond flower” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 25:35

וְ⁠כַפְתֹּ֡ר תַּחַת֩ שְׁנֵ֨י הַ⁠קָּנִ֜ים מִמֶּ֗⁠נָּה וְ⁠כַפְתֹּר֙ תַּ֣חַת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠קָּנִים֙ מִמֶּ֔⁠נָּה וְ⁠כַפְתֹּ֕ר תַּחַת־שְׁנֵ֥י הַ⁠קָּנִ֖ים מִמֶּ֑⁠נָּה לְ⁠שֵׁ֨שֶׁת֙ הַ⁠קָּנִ֔ים הַ⁠יֹּצְאִ֖ים מִן־הַ⁠מְּנֹרָֽה

Alternate translation: “There must be a leafy base under the first pair of branches—made as one piece with it, and a leafy base under the second pair of branches—also made as one piece with it. In the same way there must be a leafy base under the third pair of branches, made as one piece with it. It must be the same for all six branches extending out from the lampstand.”

Exodus 25:36

מִקְשָׁ֥ה

Alternate translation: “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in Exodus 25:18.

Exodus 25:37

וְ⁠הֵאִ֖יר עַל־עֵ֥בֶר פָּנֶֽי⁠הָ

Here, face figuratively represents the location of the lampstand. Alternate translation: “so they shine light near it” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 25:39

כִּכָּ֛ר

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A talent weighs about 33 kilograms. (See: Biblical Weight)

Exodus 25:40

וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה

All the items described in this chapter are included in what Moses is told to see and make. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “See and make everything I have described” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה

Here, see relates to observing or overseeing. Essentially, Yahweh is telling Moses to be careful as he observes the pattern on the mountain and as he sees the craftsmen of Israel working on these items, so that they are made correctly. Alternate translation: “Observe carefully and work exactly” (See: Metonymy)

אַתָּ֥ה מָרְאֶ֖ה

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I am showing you” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 26

Exodus 26 General Notes

• The sacred tent has four layers (from inside to out): linen, goats’ hair, tanned rams’ skins, and fine leather.
• There are multiple different curtains described using three different Hebrew words: one sort of curtains to make the walls of the tent (verses 1-13), another to separate the Holy Place and Most Holy Place (also known as Holy of Holies) (verses 31-34), and another for the entrance of the sacred tent (verses 36-37). If there are words in your language that would make a distinction between these sorts of hanging cloths, it would be appropriate to make a distinction in your translation.

Structure and Formatting

This chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter. - v. 1-30: Instructions for constructing the exterior of the sacred tent * v. 1-6: Inner covering * v. 7-14: Outer covering layers * v. 15-30: Wooden framework - v. 31-35: Instructions for arranging the interior of the sacred tent - v. 36-37: Instructions for hanging the entrance curtain

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The tent of meeting

This chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of a tent where Moses would meet Yahweh and the box would be stored. This would eventually become the Dwelling. (See: tabernacle and holy, holiness, unholy, sacred)

Exodus 26:1

תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה

Yahweh is speaking to Moses, so the word you is singular. Yahweh probably expected Moses to tell someone else to do the actual work, but Moses would be the one responsible for seeing that the work was done correctly. Alternate translation: “, tell a craftsman to make” (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

וּ⁠תְכֵ֤לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָן֙ וְ⁠תֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י

This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 25:4.

וְ⁠תֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י

A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: Translate Unknowns)

שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר

This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. (See: Translate Unknowns)

חֹשֵׁ֖ב

a person who is skilled in making beautiful objects by hand

Exodus 26:2

שְׁמֹנֶ֤ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֙ בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה…אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּ⁠אַמָּ֔ה

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 12.9 meters … 184 centimeters. (See: Biblical Distance)

Exodus 26:3

חֲמֵ֣שׁ הַ⁠יְרִיעֹ֗ת תִּֽהְיֶ֨יןָ֙ חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ֑⁠הּ וְ⁠חָמֵ֤שׁ יְרִיעֹת֙ חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָֽ⁠הּ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Join five of the curtains each to another, and join five of the curtains each to another.” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 26:4

תְּכֵ֗לֶת

Alternate translation: “blue yarn” or “blue cloth”

הָ⁠אֶחָ֔ת…הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. (See: Ordinal Numbers)

בַּ⁠חֹבָ֑רֶת

Alternate translation: “in one set of five curtains”

בַּ⁠מַּחְבֶּ֖רֶת הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית

Alternate translation: “in the other set of five curtains”

Exodus 26:5

אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָֽ⁠הּ

This is an idiom meaning “to each other.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “one to the other” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 26:6

וְ⁠עָשִׂ֕יתָ חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים קַרְסֵ֣י זָהָ֑ב וְ⁠חִבַּרְתָּ֨ אֶת־הַ⁠יְרִיעֹ֜ת אִשָּׁ֤ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ⁠הּ֙

The clasps fit into the loops (verses 4 and 5) to hold the curtains together.

אִשָּׁ֤ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ⁠הּ֙

This is the same idiom as in the previous verse, meaning together. Alternate translation: “to each other” (See: Idiom)

אֶחָֽד

Alternate translation: “as though it were one piece”

Exodus 26:7

לְ⁠אֹ֖הֶל

This refers to an outer tent over the sacred tent. Alternate translation: “for an outer tent”

עַשְׁתֵּי־עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה

Alternate translation: “eleven” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 26:8

שְׁלֹשִׁים֙…אַרְבַּ֣ע…לְ⁠עַשְׁתֵּ֥י עֶשְׂרֵ֖ה

Alternate translation: “thirty … four … eleven” (See: Numbers)

שְׁלֹשִׁים֙ בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה…אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּ⁠אַמָּ֔ה

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 13.8 meter … 184 centimeters (See: Biblical Distance)

Exodus 26:9

אֶל־מ֖וּל פְּנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֹֽהֶל

Here, face is probably referring to the entrance of the tent. The opening for the protective tent and the sacred tent would have been coordinated so they were in the same place. Alternate translation: “in front of the entrance of the tent” (See: Metonymy)

הָ⁠אֹֽהֶל

As in verse 7, the tent refers to the outer tent over the sacred tent. Alternate translation: “the outer tent”

Exodus 26:10

See how you translated a very similar text in Exodus 26:4.

Exodus 26:11

הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֙

The clasps fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:6. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 26:12

חֲצִ֤י

A half means one part out of two equal parts. (See: Fractions)

Exodus 26:13

וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֤ה

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 centimeters (See: Biblical Distance)

Exodus 26:14

תְּחָשִׁ֖ים

The meaning of this word, sea cows, is not known. It may refer to a water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. Sea cows on Wikipedia See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 25:5. (See: Translate Unknowns)

מְאָדָּמִ֑ים

When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish. It is not clear if these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 25:5. Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 26:15

הַ⁠קְּרָשִׁ֖ים

Here, frames refers to open wooden structures made to hold the curtains. (See: Translate Unknowns)

שִׁטִּ֖ים

The acacias are relatively small trees with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in 25:5. See on Wikipedia (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 26:16

עֶ֥שֶׂר…וְ⁠אַמָּה֙ וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י הָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה

Alternate translation: “10 … 1.5 cubits” (See: Numbers)

עֶ֥שֶׂר אַמּ֖וֹת…וְ⁠אַמָּה֙ וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י הָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 4.6 meters … 69 centimeters. (See: Biblical Distance)

וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י

A half means one part out of two equal parts. (See: Fractions)

Exodus 26:17

יָד֗וֹת

Here, the term tenons means a part of the wood sticking out from the rest of the frame so that it can be put into a hole in another object. (See: Translate Unknowns)

אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ֑⁠הּ

This is an idiom meaning “to each other.” See how you translated this in 26:5. Alternate translation: “one to the other” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 26:19

אַדְנֵי־כֶ֔סֶף

The bases of silver were silver blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place and off the ground.

שְׁנֵ֨י אֲדָנִ֜ים תַּֽחַת־הַ⁠קֶּ֤רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָד֙ לִ⁠שְׁתֵּ֣י יְדֹתָ֔י⁠ו וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֧י אֲדָנִ֛ים תַּֽחַת־הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָ֖ד לִ⁠שְׁתֵּ֥י יְדֹתָֽי⁠ו

The effect of this is to start a list, and the hearer will assume it should be completed. Try to translate this in the way that a speaker of your language would give instructions that are meant to be carried out on a whole group of objects. This same phrasing occurs again in verse 21 and verse 25. Alternate translation: “two bases under the first frame for its two tenons, and then two bases under the next frame for its two tenons, and so on for all the frames” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 26:21

שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֗ים תַּ֚חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֣רֶשׁ הָֽ⁠אֶחָ֔ד וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָֽד

The effect of this is to start a list, and the hearer will assume it should be completed. Try to translate this in the way that a speaker of your language would give instructions that are meant to be carried out on a whole group of objects. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:19. Alternate translation: “two bases under the first frame, and then two bases under the next frame, and so on for all the frames” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 26:25

שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֗ים תַּ֚חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֣רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָ֔ד וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָֽד

The effect of this is to start a list, and the hearer will assume it should be completed. Try to translate this in the way that a speaker of your language would give instructions that are meant to be carried out on a whole group of objects. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:19. Alternate translation: “two bases under the first frame, and then two bases under the next frame, and so on for all the frames” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֣ם…אֲדָנִ֑ים…אֲדָנִ֗ים…אֲדָנִ֔ים

The bases were silver blocks that had a slot in them to keep the frame in place. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:19. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 26:26

בְרִיחִ֖ם

The crossbars are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 26:29

בָּתִּ֖ים לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם

Alternate translation: “which will hold the crossbars” or “because they will hold the crossbars”

לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם

The crossbars are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:26.

Exodus 26:30

הָרְאֵ֖יתָ בָּ⁠הָֽר

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See UST. (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 26:31

See how you translated very similar text in Exodus 26:1.

Exodus 26:33

הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֒

The clasps fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in Exodus 26:6. (See: Translate Unknowns)

קֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים

Here, Holy of Holies means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “the Most Holy Place” or “the Extraordinarily Holy Place” (See: Possession)

Exodus 26:34

בְּ⁠קֹ֖דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים

Here, Holy of Holies means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “in the Most Holy Place” or “in the Extraordinarily Holy Place” (See: Possession)

Exodus 26:35

הַ⁠שֻּׁלְחָן֙…הַ⁠מְּנֹרָה֙

This is the table Yahweh told Moses how to make in 25:23-30 and the lampstand he told him how to make in 25:31-39.

Exodus 26:36

See how you translated very similar text in Exodus 26:1.

תְּכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י

This could mean: (1) “yarn that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple, and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated this in Exodus 25:4.

וְ⁠שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֑ר

This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. (See: Translate Unknowns)

רֹקֵֽם

Alternate translation: “a person who sews decorative designs into cloth” or “a person who embroiders” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 26:37

See how you translated very similar instructions in verse 32.

Exodus 27

Exodus 27 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

This chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter. - v. 1-8: Instructions for constructing the altar - v. 9-19: Instructions for constructing the outer curtain walls forming the courtyard around the sacred tent - v. 20-21: Instructions for the lampstand

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The tent of meeting

This chapter gives specific instructions regarding building the courtyard area around the Dwelling containing the altar where priests made sacrifices to Yahweh.

Potential Translation Issues

• The verb make at the beginning of verse 9 is the only verb from verses 9-18. Some languages may be able to translate a clause chain this long without additional verbs. Others (including English), will need to supply at least a minimum number of verbs (ULT) or quite a few verbs (UST) for naturalness.
• There continue to be a number of possibly unknown terms, still all tangible objects.

Exodus 27:1

חָמֵשׁ֩ אַמּ֨וֹת…וְ⁠חָמֵ֧שׁ אַמּ֣וֹת…וְ⁠שָׁלֹ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 2.3 meters … 2.3 meters … 138 centimeters (See: Biblical Distance)

Exodus 27:4

מִכְבָּ֔ר

The grate is a frame of crossed metal bars for holding wood when burning.

וְ⁠עָשִׂ֣יתָ עַל־הָ⁠רֶ֗שֶׁת אַרְבַּע֙ טַבְּעֹ֣ת נְחֹ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ל אַרְבַּ֥ע קְצוֹתָֽי⁠ו

You may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles when translating this verse. See Exo 25:12, Exo 25:26, and Exo 25:27.

Exodus 27:5

וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֣ה אֹתָ֗⁠הּ תַּ֛חַת כַּרְכֹּ֥ב הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֖חַ מִ⁠לְּ⁠מָ֑טָּה וְ⁠הָיְתָ֣ה הָ⁠רֶ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ד חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּֽחַ

The grate was placed inside the altar. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 27:7

וְ⁠הוּבָ֥א אֶת־בַּדָּ֖י⁠ו

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And you shall put its poles” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 27:8

הֶרְאָ֥ה

Here, he refers to Yahweh in the third person. If it would be unnatural in your language for someone to refer to himself in this way, you may need to change it. Alternate translation: “I showed” or “Yahweh showed” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

יַעֲשֽׂוּ

Here, they refers to whoever will make all these items. It is an indication that even though Yahweh has been speaking to Moses in the singular throughout, these instructions are meant to be conveyed to Israelite craftsmen. See 25:intro for more. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 27:9

שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר

This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in Exodus 25:4. (See: Translate Unknowns)

מֵאָ֤ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּה֙

You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters (See: Biblical Distance)

Exodus 27:10

וְ⁠עַמֻּדָ֣י⁠ו עֶשְׂרִ֔ים וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֥ם עֶשְׂרִ֖ים נְחֹ֑שֶׁת

Here, bronze may refer to both the pillars and the bases, or just to the bases. The pillars inside the tent were of wood overlaid with gold; these may be wood overlaid with bronze.

Exodus 27:11

See how you translated many similar words in Exodus 27:9-10.

מֵ֣אָה

Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “100 cubits” (See: Ellipsis)

מֵ֣אָה

You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters (See: Biblical Distance)

Exodus 27:12

חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה

You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: Biblical Distance)

Exodus 27:13

חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים אַמָּֽה

You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: Biblical Distance)

Exodus 27:14

וַ⁠חֲמֵ֨שׁ עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה

You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 6.9 meters (See: Biblical Distance)

עַמֻּדֵי⁠הֶ֣ם

The pillars were strong pieces of wood set upright and used as supports. See how you translated these in Exodus 27:10.

וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם

The bases were metal blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:19.

Exodus 27:15

חְמֵ֥שׁ עֶשְׂרֵ֖ה

You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 6.9 meters. (See: Biblical Distance)

עַמֻּדֵי⁠הֶ֣ם

These posts were strong pieces of wood set upright and used as supports. See how you translated these in Exodus 27:10.

וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם

The bases were metal blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:19.

Exodus 27:16

See how you translated a nearly identical passage in 26:36.

עֶשְׂרִ֣ים אַמָּ֗ה

You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m (See: Biblical Distance)

Exodus 27:17

מְחֻשָּׁקִ֣ים

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Among other options not so relevant here, Wiktionary suggests that a fillet could be a “thin strip of any material, in various technical uses,” “thin featureless molding used as separation between broader decorative moldings,” or a rounded corner. Alternate translation: “you shall fillet” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 27:18

מֵאָ֨ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֜ה…חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים…חָמֵ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters … 23 meters … 2.3 meters. (See: Biblical Distance)

חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים

Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “50 cubits” (See: Ellipsis)

Exodus 27:19

יְתֵדֹתָ֛י⁠ו…יִתְדֹ֥ת

The tent pegs are strong, sharp pieces of metal driven into the ground and used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground or to secure ropes in order to create tension to stabilize something standing upright. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 27:21

הָ⁠עֵדֻ֗ת

The testimony refers to the chest that contains the sacred slabs of stone on which Yahweh had written his commandments. If it would be more clear to your readers you may include a reference to the chest. Alternate translation: “is the Box of the Testimony” (See: Synecdoche)

יַעֲרֹךְ֩ אֹת֨⁠וֹ

Here, it refers to the lamp mentioned in the previous verse and arrange means to set it up for burning, and light it. Alternate translation: “shall set up the lampstand and light it”

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in front of me” (See: Metonymy)

חֻקַּ֤ת עוֹלָם֙ לְ⁠דֹ֣רֹתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠אֵ֖ת בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל

See how you translated a similar statement in 12:14

Exodus 28

Exodus 28 General Notes

Structure

• v. 1: Introduction - Aaron and sons will become priests
• v. 2-5: General introduction of sacred clothing
• v. 6-14: Instructions for the ephod
  • v. 9-14: Instructions regarding stones on ephod
• v. 15-28: Instructions for the breastpiece
  • v. 17-21: Instructions regarding stones on breastpiece
  • v. 22-28: Instructions for mounting the breastpiece on the ephod
• v. 29-30: Aaron should wear things over his heart
• v 31-35: Instructions for making the robe with bells and pomegranates
• v. 36-38: Instructions regarding the turban
• v. 39-41: Closing general instructions regarding clothing
• v. 42-43: Instructions on making and wearing undergarments
• v. 43b: Closing statement

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Holy garments

Because Yahweh is holy, only the priests could approach him, and when they did they had to be wearing specially made clothing. (See: priest, priesthood and holy, holiness, unholy, sacred)

Potential Translation Issues

• Verses 17-20 list 12 kinds of stone. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. The UST gives the probable color of the gemstones. Translators may use names of familiar gem stones.

Exodus 28:1

וְ⁠אַתָּ֡ה

Here, you refers to Moses; in this case, it is used to highlight that he is the person who must do the next thing. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

אַהֲרֹ֨ן אָחִ֜י⁠ךָ

Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: Kinship)

נָדָ֧ב וַ⁠אֲבִיה֛וּא אֶלְעָזָ֥ר וְ⁠אִיתָמָ֖ר

These are men’s names. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 28:2

בִגְדֵי־קֹ֖דֶשׁ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “holy clothes” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 28:3

וְ⁠אַתָּ֗ה

Here, you refers to Moses; in this case, it is used to highlight that he is the person who must do the next thing. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

אֶל־כָּל־חַכְמֵי־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִלֵּאתִ֖י⁠ו ר֣וּחַ חָכְמָ֑ה

There is a little bit of parallelism here. Yahweh is clarifying who causes someone to be wise of heart. You could translate this in a more causative way if that would make more sense. Alternate translation: “to anyone whom I have filled with the spirit of wisdom, making them wise of heart” (See: Parallelism)

אֶל־כָּל־חַכְמֵי־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִלֵּאתִ֖י⁠ו ר֣וּחַ חָכְמָ֑ה

Here, heart and spirit are both referring to things innately possessed by a person that is, traits of a person. Wisdom refers to skill or talent with crafting in this case. Together wise of heart and filled with the spirit of wisdom both essentially mean “a talented craftsman.” If it would be more clear to your readers, you may consider making some of this more explicit. Alternate translation: “to every talented craftsman, those whom I have made skilled in their work” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 28:4

וּ⁠כְתֹ֥נֶת תַּשְׁבֵּ֖ץ

We do not know what word translated of woven work means, as it only occurs here and in verse 39 as a verb. Alternate translation: “and a checkered tunic” or “an embroidered garment”

מִצְנֶ֣פֶת

This is a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. You may translate it using a word commonly used for a similar item in your culture. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֑ט

The sash is a piece of cloth that people wear around their waist or across their chest. You may translate it with a word commonly used for a similar item in your culture. (See: Translate Unknowns)

בִגְדֵי־קֹ֜דֶשׁ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in 28:2. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 28:5

וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠תְּכֵ֖לֶת וְ⁠אֶת־הָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֑ן וְ⁠אֶת־תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י

This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. See how you translated this in 25:4 (See: Translate Unknowns)

תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י

A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:6

וְ⁠שֵׁ֥שׁ מָשְׁזָ֖ר

This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:36. Alternate translation: “fine twined linen” (See: Translate Unknowns)

חֹשֵֽׁב

The description skillful craftsman refers to a person who can make beautiful objects by hand.

Exodus 28:7

שְׁתֵּ֧י כְתֵפֹ֣ת חֹֽבְרֹ֗ת יִֽהְיֶה־לּ֛⁠וֹ אֶל־שְׁנֵ֥י קְצוֹתָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠חֻבָּֽר

This likely meant creating some sort of fastening up by the shoulders to attach the front of the ephod to its back. Alternate translation: “They shall make it so that the front and back attach to each other at the shoulders”

וְ⁠חֻבָּֽר

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “join it together that way” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 28:8

אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָלָ֔י⁠ו כְּ⁠מַעֲשֵׂ֖⁠הוּ מִמֶּ֣⁠נּוּ

This is saying that the sash should be attached to the ephod, perhaps cut from the same material used to make the rest of the ephod.

Exodus 28:9

אַבְנֵי־שֹׁ֑הַם

These stones of onyx are valuable stones that have layers of white and black, red, or brown. See how you translated this in Exodus 25:7. (See: Translate Unknowns)

שְׁתֵּ֖י

Alternate translation: “2” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 28:10

שִׁשָּׁה֙…הַ⁠שִּׁשָּׁ֧ה

Alternate translation: “6 of … the 6” (See: Numbers)

כְּ⁠תוֹלְדֹתָֽ⁠ם

Alternate translation: “according to their birth order”

Exodus 28:11

פִּתּוּחֵ֣י חֹתָ֗ם

Alternate translation: “in the same way a person engraves on a seal”

חָרַשׁ֮ אֶבֶן֒

A craftsman of stone is a person who cuts designs into stones. Alternate translation: “a detailed stone cutter” (See: Translate Unknowns)

חֹתָ֗ם

This is an engraved stone often set into a ring and used to stamp a design into a wax seal to authenticate an official document. (See: Translate Unknowns)

מִשְׁבְּצ֥וֹת

These are pieces of metal that hold the stones onto the ephod. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:12

זִכָּרֹ֖ן…לְ⁠זִכָּרֹֽן

The text does not specify if Yahweh or Aaron or someone else is the one being reminded by the stones. It also does not specify exactly what the reminder is of. Try to maintain this ambiguity if possible in your translation.

לִ⁠פְנֵ֧י

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 28:13

מִשְׁבְּצֹ֖ת

The ornamental settings are pieces of precious metal that surround the sides of hold each stone to hold it onto the ephod. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:11. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:14

וּ⁠שְׁתֵּ֤י שַׁרְשְׁרֹת֙ זָהָ֣ב טָה֔וֹר מִגְבָּלֹ֛ת תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה אֹתָ֖⁠ם מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת

Alternate translation: “and you shall make two chains of pure gold that are braided like cords”

Exodus 28:15

מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה חֹשֵׁ֔ב כְּ⁠מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה אֵפֹ֖ד תַּעֲשֶׂ֑⁠נּוּ

Alternate translation: “a skillful workman will make it like the ephod”

Exodus 28:16

זֶ֥רֶת…וְ⁠זֶ֥רֶת

You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A span is approximately 23 centimeters. (See: Biblical Distance)

רָב֥וּעַ יִֽהְיֶ֖ה כָּפ֑וּל

Alternate translation: “Fold it in half so it will be square”

Exodus 28:17

Twelve kinds of stones are listed in the next four verses. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. (See: Translate Unknowns)

אֹ֤דֶם פִּטְדָה֙ וּ⁠בָרֶ֔קֶת

These are precious stones. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:18

וְ⁠הַ⁠טּ֖וּר הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֑י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And row 2:” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

נֹ֥פֶךְ סַפִּ֖יר וְ⁠יָהֲלֹֽם

These are precious stones. (See: Translate Unknowns)

סַפִּ֖יר

This is a gemstone that is blue in color. See how you translated this in Exodus 24:10. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:19

וְ⁠הַ⁠טּ֖וּר הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֑י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And row 3:” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

לֶ֥שֶׁם שְׁב֖וֹ וְ⁠אַחְלָֽמָה

These are precious stones (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:20

וְ⁠הַ⁠טּוּר֙ הָ⁠רְבִיעִ֔י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And row 4:” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

תַּרְשִׁ֥ישׁ וְ⁠שֹׁ֖הַם וְ⁠יָשְׁפֵ֑ה

These are precious stones. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וְ⁠שֹׁ֖הַם

An onyx is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red, or brown. See how you translated these in Exodus 25:7. (See: Translate Unknowns)

מְשֻׁבָּצִ֥ים זָהָ֛ב יִהְי֖וּ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You shall set them in gold” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 28:21

פִּתּוּחֵ֤י חוֹתָם֙

This is an engraved stone often set into a ring and used to stamp a design into a wax seal to authenticate an official document. Here the stone is mounted on a ring. See how you translated “signet” in Exodus 28:11. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:22

שַֽׁרְשֹׁ֥ת גַּבְלֻ֖ת מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת זָהָ֖ב טָהֽוֹר

See how you translated similar phrases in Exodus 28:14. Alternate translation (should replace twisted chains): “chains that are made of pure gold and are braided like cords” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:25

אֶל־מ֥וּל פָּנָֽי⁠ו

Here, face simply refers to the object (the ephod). Alternate translation: “on its front side” (See: Metonymy)

עַל־שְׁתֵּ֣י הַֽ⁠מִּשְׁבְּצ֑וֹת

These are two settings that enclose the stones. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 28:27

פָּנָ֔י⁠ו

Here, face simply refers to the object (the ephod). Alternate translation: “on its front side” (See: Metonymy)

לְ⁠חֵ֖שֶׁב

The waistband was a cloth belt made from narrow linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:8. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:28

וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִזַּ֣ח הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁן מֵ⁠עַ֖ל

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the breastpiece shall stay attached to” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִזַּ֣ח הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁן מֵ⁠עַ֖ל

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “so that the breastpiece shall stay attached to” (See: Double Negatives)

Exodus 28:29

שְׁמ֨וֹת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל

This refers to the names of the tribes engraved on the twelve stones the breastplate as described in Exodus 28:17-21.

עַל־לִבּ֖⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “over Aaron’s heart” or “on his chest”

Exodus 28:30

הָ⁠אוּרִים֙ וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠תֻּמִּ֔ים

It is not clear what the Urim and the Thummim are. They were objects, possibly stones, that the priest used to somehow determine the will of God. Because of this, it is basically impossible to translate. In your translation, you can spell it the way it sounds in your language. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

וְ⁠נָשָׂ֣א אַ֠הֲרֹן אֶת־מִשְׁפַּ֨ט בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל עַל־לִבּ֛⁠וֹ לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה תָּמִֽיד

This phrase appears to refer to the Urim and Thummim and explain their purpose. Alternate translation: “And Aaron shall bear the decisions for the sons of Israel over his heart before Yahweh continually” (See: Translate Unknowns)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה…לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh … before Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 28:32

מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה אֹרֵ֗ג

Alternate translation: “made by a weaver”

אֹרֵ֗ג

Alternate translation: “a person who weaves” or “a person who creates cloth using thread, yarns and wool” (See: Translate Unknowns)

תַחְרָ֛א

We do not know what this term means, but the implication seems to be that the collar should be made strong. (See: Translate Unknowns)

לֹ֥א יִקָּרֵֽעַ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled in the UST. (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 28:33

תְּכֵ֤לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָן֙ וְ⁠תוֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י

This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. See how you translated this in 25:4 (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:34

פַּעֲמֹ֤ן זָהָב֙ וְ⁠רִמּ֔וֹן פַּֽעֲמֹ֥ן זָהָ֖ב וְ⁠רִמּ֑וֹן

This phrase is repeated to show the pattern of the design on the robe. Alternate translation: “alternate pomegranates and golden bells”

Exodus 28:35

וְ⁠נִשְׁמַ֣ע ק֠וֹל⁠וֹ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the bells make a sound” (See: Active or Passive)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֧י יְהוָ֛ה

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

יְהוָ֛ה

Here, Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וְ⁠לֹ֥א יָמֽוּת

The probable implication is that he would die because he did not obey Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “As a result, he will not die because of disobeying my instructions” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 28:36

צִּ֖יץ

We do not know exactly what this was. It was probably a thin piece of gold smaller than the palm of someone’s hand. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וּ⁠פִתַּחְתָּ֤ עָלָי⁠ו֙ פִּתּוּחֵ֣י חֹתָ֔ם

See how you translated similar words in Exodus 28:11 Alternate translation: “write on it in the same way a person engraves on a seal.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:37

הַ⁠מִּצְנָ֑פֶת…הַ⁠מִּצְנֶ֖פֶת

This was a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:4. (See: Translate Unknowns)

אֶל־מ֥וּל פְּנֵֽי־הַ⁠מִּצְנֶ֖פֶת

Here, face means the front. Alternate translation: “to the front of the turban” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 28:38

וְ⁠נָשָׂ֨א אַהֲרֹ֜ן אֶת־עֲוֺ֣ן הַ⁠קֳּדָשִׁ֗ים

Here, iniquity is pictured as something that can be carried or worn like the turban. It also seems to picture handing off the iniquity from the people to Aaron. Also here, iniquity actually seems to refer to the punishment for anything that might be wrong regarding the things the Israelites offer Yahweh. You may need to use a different word than bear to convey the transfer of responsibility for wrongs from the people to Aaron. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and Aaron shall be responsible for any wrong related to the holy things” (See: Metaphor)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

יְהוָֽה

Here, Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 28:39

מִצְנֶ֣פֶת

This was a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:4. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֥ט

A sash is a decorative piece of cloth that a person wears around his waist or across his chest. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:4. (See: Translate Unknowns)

רֹקֵֽם

An embroiderer is a person who sews decorative designs onto cloth. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:36. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:40

אַבְנֵטִ֑ים

The sashes are decorative pieces of cloth that people wear around the waist or across the chest. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:4. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וּ⁠מִגְבָּעוֹת֙

A headband is a decorative, narrow strip of cloth that is worn around the head above the eyes. This seems to be similar to, but perhaps smaller than the turban worn by the high priest. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 28:41

אַהֲרֹ֣ן אָחִ֔י⁠ךָ

Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: Kinship)

וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֧ אֶת־יָדָ֛⁠ם

This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and you shall ordain them” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 28:42

מִכְנְסֵי

These are articles of clothing worn under the outer clothes, next to the skin. (See: Translate Unknowns)

בְּשַׂ֣ר עֶרְוָ֑ה

This refers to the male genitalia. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “their private parts” (See: Euphemism)

Exodus 29

Exodus 29 General Notes

Large translation teams working on multiple books at the same time should note that this chapter is very similar to Leviticus 8.

Structure

As you translate, you may perceive a different structure in this chapter than what is below. Feel free to organize in a way that is clear in your language. This chapter is really one united whole; the outline below is one possible way of subdividing it. The Consecration of the Priests - v. 1-3 Preparing items - v. 4-9 Preparing Aaron and his sons - v. 10-14 Sacrificing the bull to purify the altar - v. 15-34 Sacrificing the rams * v. 15-18 The first ram wholly burned * v. 19-28 The second ram used for consecrating and divided for eating * v. 29-30 Priestly succession * v. 31-34 More instructions regarding eating the second ram - v. 35-37 Instructions to do all this for seven days - v. 38-41 Instructions for perpetual offerings - v. 42-46 Yahweh’s affirmation

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Consecrating priests

This chapter records the process of consecrating priests. The priests were to be set apart from the rest of Israel because Yahweh is holy. (See: consecrate, consecrated, consecration and priest, priesthood and holy, holiness, unholy, sacred)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Forms of you

For this chapter, it seems that the singular “you: that Yahweh has been using to give Moses general instructions for the last several chapters now actually refers to Moses himself. If you have been translating the instructions using a plural form of you or by shifting the instructions to the third person, you should switch back to a singular form referring directly to Moses for this chapter.

“I will live among the Israelites”

As God, Yahweh is everywhere and cannot be limited to a single space. This phrase indicates that he permanently remains within Israel in a special way while they have the ark.

Exodus 29:1

וְ⁠זֶ֨ה

A new scene begins here. There is a change in topic from instructions for making garments for priests to consecrating priests. This may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה

Here, you refers to Moses. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

לָ⁠הֶ֛ם

Here, they refers to Aaron and his sons. Alternate translation: “to Aaron and his sons” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

לִ֑⁠י

Here, me refers to Yahweh. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

בֶּן־בָּקָ֛ר

This is an idiom meaning young. If you do not have a similar idiom you may translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “a young one” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 29:2

בְּלוּלֹ֣ת בַּ⁠שֶּׁ֔מֶן…מְשֻׁחִ֣ים בַּ⁠שָּׁ֑מֶן

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. You may need to shorten the sentences and make the alternate translation content separate sentences or mark it off with special punctuation. Alternate translation: “(mix them with oil) … (rub them with oil)” (See: Active or Passive)

וּ⁠רְקִיקֵ֥י מַצּ֖וֹת מְשֻׁחִ֣ים בַּ⁠שָּׁ֑מֶן

These may have been rubbed with oil before or after baking.

וְ⁠חַלֹּ֤ת…וּ⁠רְקִיקֵ֥י

These are different kinds of food made from flour. While all the breads were somewhat flat because they were unleavened, the cakes were a bread enriched with oil, and the wafers were especially thin. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 29:3

אוֹתָ⁠ם֙

Alternate translation: “the bread, cakes, and wafers” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

וְ⁠הִקְרַבְתָּ֥ אֹתָ֖⁠ם בַּ⁠סָּ֑ל וְ⁠אֶ֨ת־הַ⁠פָּ֔ר וְ⁠אֵ֖ת שְׁנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֵילִֽם

Here, in the basket is almost parenthetical. You may need to restructure the sentence or use punctuation to make it clear that the bull and the two rams are connected to bring, and not to in the basket. Alternate translation: “and you shall bring them near (in the basket) along with the bull and the two rams”

Exodus 29:4

אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד

The tent of meeting is another name for the Dwelling. See how you translated this in Exodus 27:21.

Exodus 29:5

בְּ⁠חֵ֖שֶׁב

This was a cloth belt made from narrow linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:8. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 29:6

הַ⁠מִּצְנֶ֖פֶת…הַ⁠מִּצְנָֽפֶת

This was a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:4. (See: Translate Unknowns)

נֵ֥זֶר הַ⁠קֹּ֖דֶשׁ

This crown is described in Exodus 28:36 as being engraved with the words “Holy to Yahweh” and made of pure gold. There it is referred to by a different Hebrew word, which is translated as “rosette.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

אֶת־נֵ֥זֶר הַ⁠קֹּ֖דֶשׁ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the holy crown” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 29:7

שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מִּשְׁחָ֔ה

See how you translated oil of anointing in 25:6. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 29:8

בָּנָ֖י⁠ו

Alternate translation: “Aaron’s sons” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 29:9

אַבְנֵ֜ט

A sash is a decorative piece of cloth that people wear around their waist or across their chest. See how you translated this word in Exodus 28:4. (See: Translate Unknowns)

מִגְבָּעֹ֔ת

A headband is a narrow, decorative strip of cloth that is worn around the head above the eyes. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:40. (See: Translate Unknowns)

כְּהֻנָּ֖ה

Here, the priesthood means the official office of priest. Alternate translation: “the duty of being priests” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וְ⁠הָיְתָ֥ה לָ⁠הֶ֛ם כְּהֻנָּ֖ה

The duty of being priests will also belong to the descendants of Aaron’s sons. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And the priesthood will belong to them and their descendants” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לְ⁠חֻקַּ֣ת עוֹלָ֑ם

Alternate translation: “a law that will not end.” See how you translated this in Exodus 28:43.

וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו

The phrase, fill the hand, seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:41. Alternate translation: “And you shall ordain Aaron and his sons” (See: Idiom)

וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו

The phrase, fill the hand may be (1) a summary and reminder statement of the whole ordination process, (2) referring to the previous description, meaning that the priests have been ordained, or (3) referring to the following description, meaning that the priests are about to be ordained. It would probably be best to translate this in the way a mid-text summary reminder phrase would be spoken in your language, avoiding any indication that it refers only to the previous or following text.

Exodus 29:10

The purpose of the sacrifice explained here through verse 14 is to purify or cleanse the altar. This is made more clear in verses 36-37.

לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד

Here, face refers to the front of the tent. See the UST. (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠סָמַ֨ךְ אַהֲרֹ֧ן וּ⁠בָנָ֛י⁠ו אֶת־יְדֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠פָּֽר

The slaughter of the bull in the next verse occurs while the priests continue to have their hands on the bull’s head. Take care to arrange the phrases and to use words or forms that indicate that the two events happened at the same time. (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

Exodus 29:12

קַרְנֹ֥ת

These were projections that looked like ox horns attached to the four corners of the altar. See how you translated this in Exodus 27:2. (See: Translate Unknowns)

כָּל־הַ⁠דָּ֣ם

Alternate translation: “the remaining blood”

Exodus 29:13

וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֖

Alternate translation: “and burn them to make smoke”

הַ⁠כָּבֵ֔ד…הַ⁠כְּלָיֹ֔ת

The liver and kidneys are organs in the body. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 29:14

וְ⁠אֶת־בְּשַׂ֤ר הַ⁠פָּר֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עֹר֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת־פִּרְשׁ֔⁠וֹ תִּשְׂרֹ֣ף

Alternate translation: “But as for the remaining parts of the bull, including the flesh and dung, you shall burn it”

מִ⁠ח֖וּץ לַֽ⁠מַּחֲנֶ֑ה

Alternate translation: “outside the borders of where the Israelites are camped”

Exodus 29:15

וְ⁠סָ֨מְכ֜וּ אַהֲרֹ֧ן וּ⁠בָנָ֛י⁠ו אֶת־יְדֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־רֹ֥אשׁ הָ⁠אָֽיִל

The slaughter of the ram in the next verse occurs while they continue to have their hands on the ram’s head. Take care to arrange the phrases and to use words or forms that indicate that the two events happened at the same time. (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

Exodus 29:17

קִרְבּ⁠וֹ֙

Alternate translation: “the organs” See how you translated this in Exodus 29:13. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 29:18

וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֤ אֶת־כָּל־הָ⁠אַ֨יִל֙

Alternate translation: “and burn all of the ram to make smoke”

עֹלָ֥ה ה֖וּא לַֽ⁠יהוָ֑ה רֵ֣יחַ נִיח֔וֹחַ אִשֶּׁ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה הֽוּא

These phrases are in parallel, with the second expanding and clarifying the first. In some languages, you may need to use a different structure to expand and clarify the burnt offering. Alternate translation: “It is a pleasant smelling burnt offering made by fire to Yahweh” (See: Parallelism)

Exodus 29:19

הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֑י

Except for the second, this verse is identical to verse 15.

Exodus 29:20

וְ⁠שָׁחַטְתָּ֣ אֶת־הָ⁠אַ֗יִל

They killed the ram by cutting its throat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and kill the ram by cutting its throat” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 29:21

וְ⁠לָקַחְתָּ֞ מִן־הַ⁠דָּ֨ם אֲשֶׁ֥ר עַֽל־הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּחַ֮ וּ⁠מִ⁠שֶּׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מִּשְׁחָה֒ וְ⁠הִזֵּיתָ֤

Moses would mix the blood and oil. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And you shall take some of the blood that is on the altar and mix it with some of the oil of anointing and sprinkle it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 29:22

הַ⁠קֶּ֗רֶב…הַ⁠כָּבֵד֙…הַ⁠כְּלָיֹ֗ת

The entrails, liver, and kidneys refer to organs inside the body. See how you translated this in Exodus 29:13. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 29:23

וְ⁠כִכַּ֨ר לֶ֜חֶם אַחַ֗ת וַֽ⁠חַלַּ֨ת לֶ֥חֶם שֶׁ֛מֶן אַחַ֖ת וְ⁠רָקִ֣יק אֶחָ֑ד מִ⁠סַּל֙ הַ⁠מַּצּ֔וֹת אֲשֶׁ֖ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה

All of these items were in the basket mentioned in verse 2, not just the wafer. Be sure this is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “and from the basket of bread without yeast that is before the face of Yahweh: one round loaf of bread, and one cake of bread of oil, and one wafer”

וְ⁠כִכַּ֨ר לֶ֜חֶם אַחַ֗ת וַֽ⁠חַלַּ֨ת לֶ֥חֶם שֶׁ֛מֶן אַחַ֖ת וְ⁠רָקִ֣יק אֶחָ֑ד מִ⁠סַּל֙ הַ⁠מַּצּ֔וֹת

For 29:23, see how you translated similar words in Exodus 29:2.

אֲשֶׁ֖ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה

This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “that you have placed before Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 29:24

הַ⁠כֹּ֔ל

Here, all these refers to the parts of the sacrifice mentioned in the previous verses. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥

While the text reads, you shall raise, logically, it is Aaron and his sons who will raise the offerings at this point. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the third person. Alternate translation: “and they shall raise” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥ אֹתָ֛⁠ם תְּנוּפָ֖ה לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה

The act of raising the meat and bread symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out the process of handing the offering to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and they shall show that they are giving them to me by holding them up to me” (See: Symbolic Action)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה

This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 29:25

וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֥ הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֖חָ⁠ה עַל־הָ⁠עֹלָ֑ה לְ⁠רֵ֤יחַ נִיח֨וֹחַ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה אִשֶּׁ֥ה ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה

See how you translated similar phrases in verse 18.

Exodus 29:26

מֵ⁠אֵ֤יל הַ⁠מִּלֻּאִים֙

See how you translated this in verse 22. Alternate translation: “from the ram that you dedicated”

וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥ אֹת֛⁠וֹ תְּנוּפָ֖ה

The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. See how you translated this in verse 24. Alternate translation: “and show that you are giving it to me by holding it up to me” (See: Symbolic Action)

Exodus 29:27

הַ⁠תְּנוּפָ֗ה וְ⁠אֵת֙ שׁ֣וֹק הַ⁠תְּרוּמָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוּנַ֖ף וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר הוּרָ֑ם

The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. See how you translated this in verse 24. (See: Symbolic Action)

Exodus 29:28

וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֨ן וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנָ֜י⁠ו לְ⁠חָק־עוֹלָ֗ם מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא

Alternate translation: “This offering is what Aaron and his sons will always receive from the people”

מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא וּ⁠תְרוּמָ֞ה יִהְיֶ֨ה מֵ⁠אֵ֤ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ מִ⁠זִּבְחֵ֣י שַׁלְמֵי⁠הֶ֔ם תְּרוּמָתָ֖⁠ם לַ⁠יהוָֽה

The amount of repetition in this verse may make it difficult to translate smoothly. You may consider combining some phrases if that would work better in your language. Alternate translation: “for the Israelites must offer this portion from what they bring to Yahweh as peace offerings to him”

Exodus 29:29

וּ⁠בִגְדֵ֤י הַ⁠קֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in 28:2. (See: Abstract Nouns)

וּ⁠לְ⁠מַלֵּא־בָ֖⁠ם אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם

Fill their hand seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:41. Alternate translation: “to ordain them in the clothing” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 29:31

אֵ֥יל הַ⁠מִּלֻּאִ֖ים

The ram of consecration refers to the second ram, the one described in verses 19 and following.

בְּ⁠מָקֹ֥ם קָדֹֽשׁ

This is not the same as the Holy Place outside of the Most Holy Place. This probably refers to a place within the courtyard. However, its exact location is not otherwise specified. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the entrance to the tent of meeting” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 29:33

לְ⁠מַלֵּ֥א אֶת־יָדָ֖⁠ם

This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:41. Alternate translation: “to ordain them” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 29:34

לֹ֥א יֵאָכֵ֖ל

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one may eat it” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 29:35

כָּ֔כָה

Here, thus means “like this” and, as the next verses make clear, refers to the sacrificial ceremony outlined in this chapter which they must repeat seven times.

שִׁבְעַ֥ת

Alternate translation: “7” (See: Numbers)

תְּמַלֵּ֥א יָדָֽ⁠ם

This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:41. Alternate translation: “you shall ordain them” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 29:36

This verse and the next explain the purpose of the sacrifice detailed in verses 10-14.

וּ⁠פַ֨ר חַטָּ֜את תַּעֲשֶׂ֤ה לַ⁠יּוֹם֙ עַל־הַ⁠כִּפֻּרִ֔ים וְ⁠חִטֵּאתָ֙ עַל־הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֔חַ בְּ⁠כַפֶּרְ⁠ךָ֖ עָלָ֑י⁠ו

The phrase and you shall purify the altar by making atonement for it describes the purpose of offering the bull. You may want to use a stronger connector. In languages that need to put purpose first, you may need to re-order the clauses. Alternate translation: “And you shall offer a bull of purification for atonement daily, thus you shall purify the altar, by making atonement for it.” or “You shall purify the altar by making atonement for it: you shall offer a bull of purification daily for its atonement.” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Exodus 29:37

קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֔ים

Here, holiest holy means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: Possession)

יִקְדָּֽשׁ

Alternate translation: “will also become set apart”

Exodus 29:38

בְּנֵֽי־שָׁנָ֛ה

The phrase sons of a year is an idiom meaning one year old. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: Idiom)

Exodus 29:39

בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּֽיִם

The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices, it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. (See: Idiom)

Exodus 29:40

וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן…רֶ֣בַע…רְבִעִ֥ית

A tenth means one part out of ten equal parts. A fourth means one part out of four equal parts. (See: Fractions)

וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן סֹ֜לֶת

Many commentators suggest that this means one tenth of an “ephah” even though “ephah” is not written. If your translation style retains the original measurement words, you may need to insert the word you are using for “ephah” here. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן סֹ֜לֶת…רֶ֣בַע הַ⁠הִ֔ין…רְבִעִ֥ית הַ⁠הִ֖ין

The values given in the UST are approximations as the exact size of an ephah and a hin is not precisely known. An ephah (the implied measurement) may have been around 22 liters, so this is about 2.2 liters of flour. A hin may have been around 3.7 liters, so this is about one liter of both oil and wine. (See: Biblical Volume)

Exodus 29:41

בֵּ֣ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּ֑יִם

The exact meaning of the phrase between the evenings is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices, it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. See how you translated it in verse 39. (See: Idiom)

Exodus 29:42

לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם

Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in Exodus 12:14.

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה

This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 29:43

וְ⁠נִקְדַּ֖שׁ בִּ⁠כְבֹדִֽ⁠י

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “My awesome presence will dedicate the tent to me” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 30

Exodus 30 General Notes

This chapter is mostly a return to instructions for building worship equipment for the sacred tent. The forms of “you” are mostly singular. However, they again refer to the workmen that Moses will instruct, so you should return to whatever form you have been following in chapters 25-28.

Structure:

• v. 1-10: Incense altar
  • v. 1-6: Instructions for making the incense altar
  • v. 7-10: Use of the incense altar
• v. 11-16: Ransom money for taking a census
• v. 17-21: Instructions for a washbasin
• v. 22-30: Anointing oil
  • v. 22-25: Instructions for making the oil
  • v. 26-33: Instructions for using the oil v- 34-38: Making and using sacred incense

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Atonement

Through the offering of blood and money, things and people were kept in God’s favor. (See: atonement, atone, atoned)

Holiness

Some items in this chapter became so holy that they could make other things holy. (See: holy, holiness, unholy, sacred)

Unknown terms

There are a number of ingredient terms that are unknown even to scholars.

Exodus 30:1

וְ⁠עָשִׂ֥יתָ

Here, you refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 30:2

קַרְנֹתָֽי⁠ו

See how you translated horns in Exodus 27:2 (See: Translate Unknowns)

אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠אַמָּ֤ה…וְ⁠אַמָּתַ֖יִם

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46cm … 46cm … 94cm (See: Biblical Distance)

Exodus 30:3

This verse is very similar to Exodus 25:11, so see how you translated there.

Exodus 30:4

When translating this verse, you may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles. See Exo 25:12, Exo 25:26, Exo 25:27, & Exo 27:4.

לְ⁠בָתִּ֣ים

Here, the word housings means that the rings will hold the poles. Since they are where the poles belong for use, they are figuratively their house. If you have a similar idiom meaning “place of belonging,” you may use it or you may translate the idea. Alternate translation: “a place” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 30:6

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י…לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י

Here, before the face of means in front of. (See: Metonymy)

לְ⁠ךָ֖

Here, you refers to Moses. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

Exodus 30:7

בַּ⁠בֹּ֣קֶר בַּ⁠בֹּ֗קֶר

Alternate translation: “Each morning” or “Daily, in the morning”

בְּ⁠הֵיטִיב֛⁠וֹ אֶת־הַ⁠נֵּרֹ֖ת

The lamps had burned overnight and weren’t needed during the day, so he would put them out and do whatever maintenance was required for them to be ready to burn again in the evening. Alternate translation: “trims the lamps”

Exodus 30:8

וּ⁠בְ⁠הַעֲלֹ֨ת אַהֲרֹ֧ן אֶת־הַ⁠נֵּרֹ֛ת

This may indicate that in the morning Aaron had taken the lamps down, and he would light them and then put them up on the holders in the evening.

בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עֲרְבַּ֖יִם

The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. See how you translated it in 29:39. (See: Idiom)

לְ⁠דֹרֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם

Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in Exodus 12:14.

Exodus 30:9

לֹא־תַעֲל֥וּ עָלָ֛י⁠ו קְטֹ֥רֶת זָרָ֖ה וְ⁠עֹלָ֣ה וּ⁠מִנְחָ֑ה

Later, in verses 34 and following, God describes how to make the one sort of incense that he wants burnt on this altar. Alternate translation: “You shall only offer up the kind of incense I tell you. You shall not make burnt or grain offerings on it.”

Exodus 30:10

קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה

This last clause defines the purpose of the ritual described in this verse. See Exo 29:37. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternate translation: “This is to make it holy of holies to Yahweh.” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

קַרְנֹתָ֔י⁠ו

These were projections that looked like ox horns and were attached to the four corners of the altar. See how you translated this in Exodus 27:2.

לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם

Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in Exodus 12:14.

קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים

Here, holiest holy means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in Exodus 29:37. Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: Possession)

לַ⁠יהוָֽה

After Yahweh, the direct quote that began in Exo 25:2 ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

Exodus 30:12

תִשָּׂ֞א אֶת־רֹ֥אשׁ

In this context, lift up the head means to take a census. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “take a census” (See: Idiom)

תִשָּׂ֞א

This could mean: (1) you refers to Moses and the leaders of Israel in future generations when they take a census or (2) you refers to just Moses. (See: Forms of You)

אִ֣ישׁ

The leaders only counted the Israelite men.

Exodus 30:13

כָּל־הָ⁠עֹבֵר֙ עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֔ים

This is an idiom that suggests that the men were counted by walking past someone who was counting people as they walked by. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Everyone counted” (See: Idiom)

הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל…בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל…גֵּרָה֙ הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל

The shekel and the gerah are units of weight. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: Biblical Weight)

הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל…בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל

The shekel was used as both a weight and a unit of money. (See: Biblical Money)

מַחֲצִ֥ית…מַחֲצִ֣ית

A half means one part out of two equal parts. (See: Fractions)

בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ עֶשְׂרִ֤ים גֵּרָה֙ הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל

There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time. This specified which one was to be used.

Exodus 30:14

כֹּ֗ל הָ⁠עֹבֵר֙ עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֔ים

This is an idiom that suggests that the men were counted by walking past someone who was counting people as they walked by. It is the same phrase as in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Everyone counted” (See: Idiom)

מִ⁠בֶּ֛ן עֶשְׂרִ֥ים שָׁנָ֖ה

This is an idiom that refers to age. See the UST and how you translated the same idiom in Exo 7:7. (See: Idiom)

מִ⁠בֶּ֛ן עֶשְׂרִ֥ים שָׁנָ֖ה וָ⁠מָ֑עְלָ⁠ה

Larger numbers are spoken of as being up or above smaller numbers. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “from twenty years old and more” or “who is twenty years old or older” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 30:15

מִֽ⁠מַּחֲצִ֖ית הַ⁠שָּׁ֑קֶל

See how you translated this in Exodus 3:13. (See: Biblical Money)

נַפְשֹׁתֵי⁠כֶֽם

The plural form of you is used here. In many cases, since Yahweh is speaking to Moses about the people that will be counted, it may make more sense to change to the third person. However, Moses would be counted as well and would have to pay the ransom, so a form of you that could include Moses and all the other Israelite men would also be an appropriate translation. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 30:16

וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לִ⁠בְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֤ל לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה לְ⁠כַפֵּ֖ר עַל־נַפְשֹׁתֵי⁠כֶֽם

This sentence is very unclear. It is not clear who is being reminded of what. This could mean: (1) that it will remind Yahweh that the Israelites have given money for their lives, and therefore he should welcome them. (2) that it will remind the Israelites that they have given Yahweh money for their lives. Therefore, Yahweh will welcome them.

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 30:18

כִּיּ֥וֹר נְחֹ֛שֶׁת

Alternate translation: “a bronze bowl” or “a bronze tub” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וְ⁠כַנּ֥⁠וֹ

The base is what the basin would be put upon.

לְ⁠רָחְצָ֑ה

This phrase, for washing, explains the purpose for which the priests were to use the bronze basin.

Exodus 30:19

מִמֶּ֑⁠נּוּ

Alternate translation: “in the water in the basin”

Exodus 30:20

וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ

The priests might die if they do not wash because God would kill them for being defiled in his presence. If your readers would not understand this you may want to include it in a footnote or in the text. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ

Not dying is the goal of the priests’ washing. If the goal of some action needs to be placed elsewhere in the structure of your language move it to the usual location. (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Exodus 30:21

וְ⁠הָיְתָ֨ה לָ⁠הֶ֧ם חָק־עוֹלָ֛ם ל֥⁠וֹ וּ⁠לְ⁠זַרְע֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠דֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם

See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 12:17.

Exodus 30:23

בְּשָׂמִ֣ים

These are parts of dried plants (other than the leaves) which people grind into a powder and put in oil or food to give it a nice smell or flavor. See how you translated this in Exodus 25:6. (See: Translate Unknowns)

חֲמֵ֣שׁ מֵא֔וֹת…חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים וּ⁠מָאתָ֑יִם…חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים וּ⁠מָאתָֽיִם

The next verse mentions that these are shekel weight measurements. You may want to include some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “500 shekels … 250 shekels … 250 shekels” (See: Ellipsis)

וְ⁠קִנְּמָן

We know that cinnamon is a sweet spice taken from the inside of the bark of a tree that grows in south-east Asia. See Wikipeda (See: Translate Unknowns)

וּ⁠קְנֵה

This plant is unknown to scholars. Alternate translation: “and reed of” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 30:24

וְ⁠קִדָּ֕ה

It is known that cassia is a sweet spice taken from the bark of a tree that grows in east Asia. It is slightly different than the spice cinnamon in the previous verse. See Wikipeda (See: Translate Unknowns)

בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ

There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time. This specified which one was to be used. See how you translated this in Exodus 30:13. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: Biblical Weight)

הִֽין

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the quantity in modern measurements. Alternatively, to help your readers recognize that the biblical writings come from long ago when people used different measurements, you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the hin, and explain the equivalent in modern measurements in a footnote.(See: Biblical Volume)

Exodus 30:25

מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רֹקֵ֑חַ

This could mean: (1) Moses was to have an ointment mixer do the work. (2) Moses was to do the work himself the way an ointment mixer would do it.

רֹקֵ֑חַ

This is a person who is skilled in mixing spices and oils. (See: Translate Unknowns)

שֶׁ֥מֶן מִשְׁחַת־קֹ֖דֶשׁ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a holy oil of anointment” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 30:26

וּ⁠מָשַׁחְתָּ֥

Here, you may refer to Moses. (See: Forms of You)

Exodus 30:29

אֹתָ֔⁠ם

Here, them refers to the items listed in Exodus 30:26-28.

קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֑ים

Here, holiest holy means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in Exodus 29:37. Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: Possession)

Exodus 30:31

לְ⁠דֹרֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם

Alternate translation: “all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in Exodus 12:14.

שֶׁ֠מֶן מִשְׁחַת־קֹ֨דֶשׁ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in 30:25. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 30:32

עַל־בְּשַׂ֤ר אָדָם֙ לֹ֣א יִיסָ֔ךְ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You shall not pour it on the body of a man” (See: Active or Passive)

וּ⁠בְ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתּ֔⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “and … with the same ingredients” or “and … with the same items” or “and … according to this recipe”

קֹ֣דֶשׁ ה֔וּא קֹ֖דֶשׁ יִהְיֶ֥ה לָ⁠כֶֽם

The second half of this statement (it shall be holy to you) explains to the people the result of this oil being holy, which is, they must respect it as a holy thing. It may make more sense in some languages to move this whole statement to the beginning of the verse, because the rule about pouring on someone’s body is an application of the result. Alternate translation (placed at the beginning of the verse): “Because it is sacred, you must treat it like it is sacred, therefore” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 30:33

וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו

See how you translated cut off in Exodus 12:15. (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו

See how you translated cut off in 12:15. (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 30:34

נָטָ֤ף׀ וּ⁠שְׁחֵ֨לֶת֙ וְ⁠חֶלְבְּנָ֔ה

Here is a brief description of these materials, though we really do not know exactly what they are: stacte is a resin from certain gum plants, onycha is from certain shellfish or mollusks, and galbanum is another kind of gum resin. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 30:35

וְ⁠עָשִׂ֤יתָ אֹתָ⁠הּ֙ קְטֹ֔רֶת רֹ֖קַח מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רוֹקֵ֑חַ

This could mean: (1) Moses was to have a perfumer do the work or (2) Moses was to do the work himself the way a perfumer would do it. See how you translated these words in Exodus 30:25.

Exodus 30:36

וְ⁠שָֽׁחַקְתָּ֣…וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֨ה

Here, you probably refers to Moses. (See: Forms of You)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י

Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: Metonymy)

הָ⁠עֵדֻת֙

Here, testimony probably refers to the sacred chest that contained the tablets of the law. See UST. (See: Metonymy)

קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֖ים

Here, holiest holy means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in Exodus 29:37. Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: Possession)

לָ⁠כֶֽם

Here, you is plural and refers to Moses and all the people. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 30:37

תַעֲשׂ֖וּ

The word you here refers to the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

בְּ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתָּ֔⁠הּ

Alternate translation: “with the same ingredients” or “with the same items.” See how you translated this in Exodus 30:32.

קֹ֛דֶשׁ תִּהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ לַ⁠יהוָֽה

Alternate translation: “You must consider it to be most holy”

Exodus 30:38

לְ⁠הָרִ֣יחַ בָּ֑⁠הּ

This could mean: (1) to enjoy the scent for oneself (2) to wear as a perfume.

וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו

See how you translated cut off in Exodus 12:15. (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו

See how you translated cut off in 12:15. (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 31

Exodus 31 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• v. 1-11: Selection of the skilled craftsmen
• v. 12-17: Sabbath instruction
• v. 18: the end of Exodus’ recording of the law of Moses (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Sabbath

As described in this chapter, the Sabbath is more than just a day of worship or celebration. Its significance extends beyond a way to help people rest. It is a major part of the identity of the Hebrew people. (See: Sabbath)

Exodus 31:2

קָרָ֣אתִֽי בְ⁠שֵׁ֑ם

Yahweh speaks of choosing specific people as calling them by name. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I have chosen” (See: Idiom)

בְּצַלְאֵ֛ל…אוּרִ֥י…ח֖וּר

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 31:3

וָ⁠אֲמַלֵּ֥א אֹת֖⁠וֹ ר֣וּחַ אֱלֹהִ֑ים

Yahweh speaks of giving Bezalel his spirit as if Bezalel were a container and God’s spirit were a liquid. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I have given my spirit to Bezalel” (See: Metaphor)

בְּ⁠חָכְמָ֛ה

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun skill in another way. Alternate translation: “so he can work skillfully” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וּ⁠בִ⁠תְבוּנָ֥ה

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun understanding in another way. Alternate translation: “and so he can understand his work” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וּ⁠בְ⁠דַ֖עַת

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun knowledge in another way. Alternate translation: “and so he knows his work well” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְלָאכָֽה

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun craftsmanship in another way. Alternate translation: “and for making all kinds of crafts” or “and so that he can make all kinds of things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 31:6

אָהֳלִיאָ֞ב…אֲחִֽיסָמָךְ֙

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

וּ⁠בְ⁠לֵ֥ב כָּל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב נָתַ֣תִּי חָכְמָ֑ה

God speaks of making people able to make things as if he were putting the ability into their hearts. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I have given skill to all who are wise” or “I have made all who are wise able to make things well” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 31:11

יַעֲשֽׂוּ

They refers to Bezalel and Oholiab as well as the unnamed other “skilled of heart” (talented craftsmen) referred to in verse 2 and verse 6. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 31:13

לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר

A second-level direct quotation starts after saying. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. There are multiple possible endings for this quotation, which will be addressed in later verses. (See: Quote Markings)

אַ֥ךְ אֶת־שַׁבְּתֹתַ֖⁠י תִּשְׁמֹ֑רוּ

Yahweh uses the phrase keep my Sabbaths as a metaphor for obeying his instructions about the Sabbath, as if it was a precious thing they should guard. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “You must certainly obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: Metaphor)

לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם

Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in Exodus 12:14.

Exodus 31:14

לָ⁠כֶ֑ם

One possible ending place for the second-level quotation that began in the previous verse is after to you. The rest of Yahweh’s instructions to Moses in this section do not use the second person to address Israel directly, so you may close the second-level quotation here. (See: Quote Markings)

מ֣וֹת יוּמָ֔ת

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֛ה

See how you translated cut off in 12:15. (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 31:15

שֵׁ֣שֶׁת

Alternate translation: “6” (See: Numbers)

וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but day 7” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

שַׁבַּ֧ת שַׁבָּת֛וֹן

Alternate translation: “a Sabbath of complete rest”

מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 31:16

וְ⁠שָׁמְר֥וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל אֶת־הַ⁠שַּׁבָּ֑ת

Yahweh uses the phrase keep my Sabbaths as a metaphor for obeying his instructions about the Sabbath, as if it was a precious thing they should guard. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel must obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: Metaphor)

לְ⁠דֹרֹתָ֖⁠ם

See how you translated “throughout their people’s generations” in Exodus 12:42. Alternate translation: “; they and all the generations of their descendants must observe it.”

בְּרִ֥ית עוֹלָֽם

Alternate translation: “A covenant that will always exist” or “A lasting covenant”

Exodus 31:17

וַ⁠יִּנָּפַֽשׁ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and he refreshed himself” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 31:18

כְּתֻבִ֖ים בְּ⁠אֶצְבַּ֥ע אֱלֹהִֽים

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which Yahweh wrote on with his own hand” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 32

Exodus 32 General Notes

Structure and formatting

The events in verses 1-6 of this chapter occured while Moses spoke with God and therefore happened sometime during the events recorded between Exodus 24:15 and Exodus 31. (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

• v. 1-6: The people ask Aaron to make them a god and he makes the golden calf
• v. 7-29 - Yahweh and Moses’ reaction
  • v. 11-14 - Moses intercedes for the people
• v. 30-34 - Moses intercedes for the people

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 32:18.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Idolatry

The making of the golden calf was considered a form of idolatry. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 32:1

This chapter begins with a major scene shift, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא הָ⁠עָ֔ם

Here, the word saw is used to indicate understanding or realization of a situation. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And the people realized” (See: Metaphor)

וַ⁠יִּקָּהֵ֨ל הָ⁠עָ֜ם

This means the people both decided to gather and were the ones gathering. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ק֣וּם

Arise strengthens the force of the command following it. The people were demanding that Aaron make an idol for them. It did not necessarily mean that he should literally stand up. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: Idiom)

יֵֽלְכוּ֙ לְ⁠פָנֵ֔י⁠נוּ

Here, before our faces means ahead of. The Israelites want idols to lead them. Alternate translation: “shall lead us” or “shall be our leader” (See: Metonymy)

כִּי־זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה

People showed disrespect by putting the word this before his name, as if Moses were someone they did not know and could not trust. They were creating social distance between him and themselves. When translating, use a form in your language that communicates the same sense of disassociation between people.

Exodus 32:2

וְ⁠הָבִ֖יאוּ

Here, them refers to the golden rings. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 32:3

כָּל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם

This refers to all the people who rejected Moses as their leader and Yahweh as their God. Later parts of the text reveal that there were people still faithful to Moses and Yahweh and that the Israelites had a great deal more gold. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that means many or most. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: Hyperbole)

Exodus 32:4

וַ⁠יָּ֤צַר אֹת⁠וֹ֙ בַּ⁠חֶ֔רֶט וַֽ⁠יַּעֲשֵׂ֖⁠הוּ עֵ֣גֶל מַסֵּכָ֑ה

Most likely this means that Aaron melted the gold and poured it into a mold that had the shape of a calf. When the gold cooled and became hard, he removed the mold, and the hardened gold had the shape of a calf. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמְר֔וּ

The identity of the speakers, referred to as they, remains unknown. Alternate translation: “And someone said” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙…הֶעֱל֖וּ⁠ךָ

Because the speaker of this sentence is unknown and mentioned in the plural, it is possible that it is the people speaking. In that case, it would be possible for a translation to use the first person rather than second person here. Alternate translation: “These are our gods … brought us up” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙

In the text, there only appears to be one “god” (the golden calf idol) presented to Israel. If it would be clearer to your audience, you may consider translating these … gods as singular. Alternate translation: “this is your god”

Exodus 32:5

וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא אַהֲרֹ֔ן

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what he saw explicitly. “Aaron saw what the people did” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לְ⁠פָנָ֑י⁠ו

Here, before its face means in front of. Alternate translation: “in front of it” (See: Metonymy)

לְ⁠פָנָ֑י⁠ו

Here, it is the golden bull-calf. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in front of the bull-calf idol” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 32:6

לְ⁠צַחֵֽק

This word may imply drunken and sexual sin (for a sexual implication see Genesis 26:8). However, the only actions mentioned in the text are singing (v. 18) and dancing (v. 19), so translators should avoid using a term that is overly suggestive. Alternate translation: “to revel” (See: Euphemism)

Exodus 32:7

Here there is a scene shift back to the top of the mountain with Moses and Yahweh, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

שִׁחֵ֣ת

Here, themselves is used to indicate that the Israelites actions made the Israelites corrupt. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “have acted corruptly” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

Exodus 32:8

סָ֣רוּ מַהֵ֗ר מִן־הַ⁠דֶּ֨רֶךְ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר צִוִּיתִ֔⁠ם

Here God speaks of the people disobeying what he commanded them as if he had told them to walk on a certain road, and they left that road. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “They have quickly stopped doing what I commanded them to do” or “They have quickly stopped obeying what I commanded them to do” (See: Metaphor)

אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֶֽעֱל֖וּ⁠ךָ מֵ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם

This is a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֶֽעֱל֖וּ⁠ךָ מֵ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם

You may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “that these are your gods, Israel, that brought you up from the land of Egypt” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙

In the text, there only appears to be one “god” (the golden calf idol) presented to Israel. If it would be clearer to your audience, you may consider translating these … gods as singular. See how you translated this in verse 4. Alternate translation: “This is your god”

אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙…הֶֽעֱל֖וּ⁠ךָ

Because the speaker of this sentence is unknown and mentioned in the plural, it is possible that it is the people speaking. In that case, it would be possible for a translation to use the first person rather than second person here. See how you translated this in verse 4. Alternate translation: “our gods … brought us up” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 32:9

עַם־קְשֵׁה־עֹ֖רֶף

Yahweh speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had hard necks. The image comes from an animal that does not want to go the way his master is trying to direct him (not going in the way God commanded). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “is a rebellious people” (See: Metaphor)

הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה…הֽוּא

The word people is a collective noun, so the pronouns referring to the people are singular. You may use plural pronouns if that is the normal usage in your language. Alternate translation: “these … they” (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 32:10

וְ⁠עַתָּה֙

So now is used here to mark that Yahweh’s next statements are a result of what he has said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

וְ⁠יִֽחַר־אַפִּ֥⁠י בָ⁠הֶ֖ם

This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And let me be angry with them”(See: Idiom)

אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֖

Here, you refers to Moses. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 32:11

לָ⁠מָ֤ה יְהוָה֙ יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ אֲשֶׁ֤ר הוֹצֵ֨אתָ֙ מֵ⁠אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם בְּ⁠כֹ֥חַ גָּד֖וֹל וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה

Moses used this question to try to persuade Yahweh not to be so angry with his people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, do not let your nose burn against your people whom you have brought out from the land of Egypt with great power and with a strong hand.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ

This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry with his people. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “are you angry with your people” (See: Idiom)

בְּ⁠כֹ֥חַ גָּד֖וֹל וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה

These two phrases share similar meanings and are combined for emphasis. If doubling in this way would not convey emphasis in your language, you will need to find a way to translate it that does give emphasis. Alternate translation: “using your very strong power” (See: Doublet)

וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה

Here, hand represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in Exodus 6:1. Alternate translation: “and with powerful works” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 32:12

לָ⁠מָּה֩ יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר בְּ⁠רָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָ⁠ם֙ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בֶּֽ⁠הָרִ֔ים וּ֨⁠לְ⁠כַלֹּתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה

Moses used this question to try to persuade God not to destroy his people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: If you destroy your people, the Egyptians might say, ‘He brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the ground.’ (See: Rhetorical Question)

יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר בְּ⁠רָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָ⁠ם֙ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בֶּֽ⁠הָרִ֔ים וּ֨⁠לְ⁠כַלֹּתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה

After saying, this is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “the Egyptians say that you brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the ground” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה

Here, face means “surface.” Alternate translation: “from the surface of the land” or “from the earth” (See: Metonymy)

שׁ֚וּב מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ

Alternate translation: “Stop your burning anger” or “Stop being so angry”

שׁ֚וּב מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ וְ⁠הִנָּחֵ֥ם עַל־הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה לְ⁠עַמֶּֽ⁠ךָ

Here, Yahweh’s anger (burning nose) and plan to punish the people are spoken of as things that he could turn away from and repent of (repentance also means to turn from). This imagery may not translate into your language, and you may need to use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Calm down, and please do not stay determined to do evil to your people” (See: Idiom)

מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ

This is an idiom that means anger. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from your terrible anger” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 32:13

זְכֹ֡ר

Alternate translation: “Think about”

נִשְׁבַּ֣עְתָּ

Alternate translation: “you made an oath”

וְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ הַ⁠זֹּ֜את אֲשֶׁ֣ר אָמַ֗רְתִּי אֶתֵּן֙ לְ⁠זַרְעֲ⁠כֶ֔ם

That is, the land of Canaan.

Exodus 32:15

לֻחֹ֗ת כְּתֻבִים֙ מִ⁠שְּׁנֵ֣י עֶבְרֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מִ⁠זֶּ֥ה וּ⁠מִ⁠זֶּ֖ה הֵ֥ם כְּתֻבִֽים

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh had written on both the sides of the tablets, on this side and on that side he had written.” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 32:16

וְ⁠הַ֨⁠לֻּחֹ֔ת מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה אֱלֹהִ֖ים הֵ֑מָּה וְ⁠הַ⁠מִּכְתָּ֗ב מִכְתַּ֤ב אֱלֹהִים֙ ה֔וּא

These two sentences have an unusual structure that places emphasis on tablets and writing. If your language would emphasize these topics in a different way than moving them to the beginning of the sentence, follow your language’s natural usage for emphasis. Alternate translation: “And the tablets themselves were the work of God. And the writing itself was the writing of God” (See: Information Structure)

Exodus 32:17

יְהוֹשֻׁ֛עַ

Joshua was last mentioned in Exodus 24:13. The text does not say if he was on top of the mountain with Moses or if he waited for him part way up. Consider if your language will need to re-introduce Joshua in any way here. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Exodus 32:18

אֵ֥ין קוֹל֙ עֲנ֣וֹת גְּבוּרָ֔ה וְ⁠אֵ֥ין ק֖וֹל עֲנ֣וֹת חֲלוּשָׁ֑ה ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ

These lines are widely considered to be poetic. It is not clear why a poetic form is used here. In some languages it may not be appropriate to convey this response in poetic form, in which case another form may be used. (See: Poetry)

אֵ֥ין קוֹל֙ עֲנ֣וֹת גְּבוּרָ֔ה וְ⁠אֵ֥ין ק֖וֹל עֲנ֣וֹת חֲלוּשָׁ֑ה ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ

The poetic form here is parallelism in the repetition of sound of singing. If it would be unclear to say that Moses heard the sound of singing in the third line after saying he didn’t hear the sound of singing twice before, something more like the more contrastive UST may be followed. (See: Parallelism)

ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ

If it is unclear to say that Moses hears the sound of singing after twice saying he didn’t hear that, you may want to make the type of singing explicit. Consider referring to your translation of the last word of verse 6 (to play in the ULT). Alternate translation: “the sound of playful singing I hear” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 32:19

וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֣ף מֹשֶׁ֗ה

This is an idiom for being angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and Moses was very angry” (See: Idiom)

תַּ֥חַת

Alternate translation: “at the bottom of”

Exodus 32:21

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן מֶֽה־עָשָׂ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה׃

Moses’ question is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternate translation: “Then Moses asked Aaron what the people did to him, that he had brought such a great sin on them” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה

Moses spoke of causing people to sin as if sin were an object and Aaron put it on them. Alternate translation: “that you have caused them to sin greatly” (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 32:22

אַל־יִ֥חַר אַ֖ף

This is an idiom for anger. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not be angry” (See: Idiom)

כִּ֥י בְ⁠רָ֖ע הֽוּא

This is probably an idiom that could mean (1) that the people are prone to evil or (2) that the people were in trouble (that is, they felt troubled because of not having contact with God). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “that they are set on evil” (See: Idiom)

הֽוּא

Here, it is used because people is grammatically singular in Hebrew. Alternate translation: “they are” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 32:23

עֲשֵׂה־לָ֣⁠נוּ אֱלֹהִ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֵלְכ֖וּ לְ⁠פָנֵ֑י⁠נוּ כִּי־זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה הָ⁠אִ֗ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱלָ֨⁠נוּ֙ מֵ⁠אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם לֹ֥א יָדַ֖עְנוּ מֶה־הָ֥יָה לֽ⁠וֹ׃

This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: Quotes within Quotes)

זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה הָ⁠אִ֗ישׁ

People showed disrespect by putting the word this before his name, as if Moses were someone they did not know and could not trust. They were creating social distance between him and themselves. When translating, use a form in your language that communicates the same sense of disassociation between people. See how you translated this in verse 1.

Exodus 32:24

וָ⁠אֹמַ֤ר לָ⁠הֶם֙ לְ⁠מִ֣י זָהָ֔ב הִתְפָּרָ֖קוּ

Whoever has gold, take it off yourself is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, this can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “So I told them that whoever had any gold should take it off” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

הִתְפָּרָ֖קוּ

Aaron instructs people to take their own gold off. Alternate translation: “you take off your own” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

וָ⁠אַשְׁלִכֵ֣⁠הוּ בָ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֖א הָ⁠עֵ֥גֶל הַ⁠זֶּֽה

Aaron claims an unusual sequence of events here. The translation should surprise an audience unfamiliar with the story. He states that the result of simply throwing gold in the fire is the apperance (by its own power or volition it seems) of the calf. This is a lie. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 32:25

פָרֻ֖עַ

Alternate translation: “were behaving wildly” or “were not controlling themselves”

כִּ֥י פָרֻ֖עַ ה֑וּא כִּֽי־פְרָעֹ֣⁠ה אַהֲרֹ֔ן

Here, the pronoun it agrees with the grammatical number of people (singular). If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “that they were let loose, for Aaron had let them loose” (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 32:26

וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה אֵלָ֑⁠י

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and said that whoever was for Yahweh should come to him” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה

Moses speaks of being loyal to Yahweh as being for Yahweh. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever serves Yahweh” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 32:27

עִבְר֨וּ וָ⁠שׁ֜וּבוּ מִ⁠שַּׁ֤עַר לָ⁠שַׁ֨עַר֙ בַּֽ⁠מַּחֲנֶ֔ה

Alternate translation: “Go from one side of the camp to the other, starting at one entrance to the camp and going to the entrance on the other side of the camp”

Exodus 32:28

כִּ⁠שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת אַלְפֵ֖י

Alternate translation: “about three thousand” (See: Numbers)

Exodus 32:29

מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם

This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:41. However, this usage is different from that text, as here it is not specified what authority they are given or what they are consecrated for other than for Yahweh. Alternate translation: “Consecrate yourselves” (See: Idiom)

מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם הַ⁠יּוֹם֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה

Here it is unclear if fill should be rightly understood as in the past or as a new command. You may want to follow the decision of another translation your people are familiar with. Alternate translation: “You have filled your hand for Yahweh today”

כִּ֛י אִ֥ישׁ בִּ⁠בְנ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אָחִ֑י⁠ו

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the fact that they did this in obedience to God explicitly. Alternate translation: “For you have obeyed Yahweh, because each man was against his son and against his brother” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠לָ⁠תֵ֧ת עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֛ם הַ⁠יּ֖וֹם בְּרָכָֽה

This phrase is difficult to interpret. Several options depend on exactly how the conjunction, preposition, and verb combination are interpreted. The first difficulty is related to the difficulty with the previous verb: have they already been blessed or are they going to be blessed? (Alternate translation: “to have put a blessing on yourselves today”) The second difficulty is: should the clause connections be understood to say that the blessing is because of their actions, or more strongly, that a desire for blessing motivated them to take action? (Alternate translation: “and therefore a blessing is put on you today” or “so that a blessing may be put over you today”) The third difficulty is: while ultimately all blessing is from Yahweh, which is the subject here, Yahweh or the Levites? (Alternate translation: “and so Yahweh is putting a blessing on you today”) As with the previous clause, you may want to follow the decision of another translation your people are familiar with. Alternate translation: “, by that you brought blessing on yourselves”

Exodus 32:30

חֲטָאתֶ֖ם חֲטָאָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה

Here, sin used as a verb and then repeated as a noun for emphasis. Along with great, it suggests that the people sinned very, very badly. If the repetition of words in this way would not create emphasis, use another form in your language that would. Alternate translation: “You have sinned extremally badly” (See: Doublet)

חֲטָאתֶ֖ם חֲטָאָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה

If your language does not use an abstract noun for sin, you could express the idea behind it in another way. See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 32:31

חָטָ֞א הָ⁠עָ֤ם הַ⁠זֶּה֙ חֲטָאָ֣ה

Here, sin is used as a verb and then repeated as a noun for emphasis. Along with great, it suggests that the people sinned very, very badly. If the repetition of words in this way would not create emphasis, use another form in your language that would. Alternate translation: “this people has sinned extremely badly” (See: Doublet)

חֲטָאָ֣ה

If your language does not use an abstract noun for sin, you could express the idea behind it in another way. See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

אֱלֹהֵ֥י

Alternate translation: “a god”

Exodus 32:32

וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה אִם־תִּשָּׂ֣א חַטָּאתָ֑⁠ם

Moses leaves out his conclusion, perhaps as a way of making this conditional phrase into a request, or perhaps to avoid suggesting to God what would be good for him to do. However, if leaving out a conclusion would be misunderstood in your language you may need to rephrase it or add the implied conclusion. Alternate translation: “But now, if you forgive their sin, good!” (See: Ellipsis)

מְחֵ֣⁠נִי

Here, me refers to the name of Moses. Alternate translation: “erase my name from” (See: Metonymy)

אֲשֶׁ֥ר כָּתָֽבְתָּ

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what God had written in the book explicitly. Alternate translation: “in which you have written the names of your people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 32:33

אֶמְחֶ֖⁠נּוּ מִ⁠סִּפְרִֽ⁠י

Here, him represents that person’s name. Alternate translation: “I will erase that person’s name from my book” (See: Metonymy)

מִ⁠סִּפְרִֽ⁠י

This refers to the book of Yahweh that Moses spoke of in Exodus 32:32.

Exodus 32:34

וּ⁠בְ⁠י֣וֹם פָּקְדִ֔⁠י וּ⁠פָקַדְתִּ֥י עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם חַטָּאתָֽ⁠ם

Yahweh makes it clear that he will punish the people because they sinned by making and worshiping the idol. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “However, because they sinned, one day I will come to punish them.” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 32:35

עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן

The people are being spoken of as having made the calf themselves (along with Aaron) because they demanded it and gave their gold for it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they were guilty along with Aaron of making the calf” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠יִּגֹּ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֑ם עַ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “And because they had made the calf (that Aaron made), Yahweh plagued the people. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 33

Exodus 33 General Notes

This chapter is largely about Moses continuing to negotiate for a closer relationship between Yahweh and himself and Yahweh and the people. There are a number of important theological issues addressed, especially Yahweh’s holiness and character. Several key terms appear.

Structure:

• v. 1-6: Moses negotiating with Yahweh to go with Israel
• v. 7-11: the temporary tent of meeting
• v. 12-23: Moses negotiating with Yahweh to see his glory

Potential Translation Issues

Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them.

Verses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. While the term in verses 7-11 is often used interchangeably with the Dwelling that will be built in chapters 35-39, it is a temporary and different tent. One distinguishing feature is that it is well outside the camp, while the Dwelling will be in the center of the camp.

The word tent in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is referred to.

Exodus 33:1

לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר לְ⁠זַרְעֲ⁠ךָ֖ אֶתְּנֶֽ⁠נָּה

The words which follow saying are a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. See UST. (See: Quotes within Quotes)

Exodus 33:2

וְ⁠שָׁלַחְתִּ֥י לְ⁠פָנֶ֖י⁠ךָ מַלְאָ֑ךְ וְ⁠גֵֽרַשְׁתִּ֗י אֶת־הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙ הָֽ⁠אֱמֹרִ֔י וְ⁠הַֽ⁠חִתִּי֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִֽי

See how you translated these in Exodus 23:20 and 23:23.

Exodus 33:3

חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ

Here, milk is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; honey is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. See how you translated this in Exodus 3:8. (See: Metonymy)

זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ

God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. See how you translated this in Exodus 3:8. (See: Metaphor)

קְשֵׁה־עֹ֨רֶף֙

Yahweh speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had hard necks. See how you translated this in Exodus 32:9. (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 33:4

וְ⁠לֹא־שָׁ֛תוּ אִ֥ישׁ עֶדְי֖⁠וֹ עָלָֽי⁠ו

Here, his and him refer to both men and women. Alternate translation: “and the men and women did not put on their ornaments” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

עֶדְי֖⁠וֹ

This may have referred to beautiful clothing as well as chains and rings made from gold or silver that had could have had jewels in them. Alternate translation: “his adornments” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them. (See: Verse Bridges)

Exodus 33:5

וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה

The word had places Yahweh’s statement back in time. It can be understood from context as Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4. If you are reversing the order of the verses for your language, you should adjust the verbal sequencing in your translation. (See: Order of Events)

אֱמֹ֤ר אֶל־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙

You may want to make the introductory portion of this quotation,Say to the sons of Israel, indirect to keep from having a quote inside a quote. See the UST. (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

קְשֵׁה־עֹ֔רֶף

Yahweh speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had hard necks. See how you translated this in Exodus 32:9. (See: Metaphor)

רֶ֧גַע אֶחָ֛ד אֶֽעֱלֶ֥ה בְ⁠קִרְבְּ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠כִלִּיתִ֑י⁠ךָ וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה

Because the surrounding narrative clearly shows that this is not what Yahweh did or will do, this is a hypothetical situation. Some languages may need to reorder the clauses. Alternate translation: “Since I would destroy if I went up among you for one moment, then” (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה הוֹרֵ֤ד עֶדְיְ⁠ךָ֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ וְ⁠אֵדְעָ֖ה מָ֥ה אֶֽעֱשֶׂה־לָּֽ⁠ךְ

The goal of the Israelites removing their ornaments is so that Yahweh can consider his reaction. Some languages may need to reorder this structure. Alternate translation: “So that I will know what I will do to you, take your ornaments down from on you” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה הוֹרֵ֤ד עֶדְיְ⁠ךָ֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ

This was a way for the Israelites to show that they were sorry for sinning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 33:6

וַ⁠יִּֽתְנַצְּל֧וּ

Here, themselves refers to the Israelites; they are both the ones doing the action and the ones to whom the action is done. A special form of verb or pronoun may be required to translate this in your language. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

מֵ⁠הַ֥ר חוֹרֵֽב׃

Here, from means “from that point of time and continuing into the future.” Try to find a form in your language that means “from then on” for your translation. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 33:7

Verses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. (See: Connect — Background Information)

הָ⁠אֹ֜הֶל

The word tent in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up, or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is being referenced. Here it refers to the “tent of meeting.”

Exodus 33:8

אָהֳל֑⁠וֹ

This refers to the people’s tents.

Exodus 33:9

עַמּ֣וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָ֔ן

See how you translated this in 13:21.

יֵרֵד֙

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express where the pillar of cloud would come down from explicitly. Alternate translation: “would come down from the sky” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר

Grammatically, the most likely referent for this pronoun is the pillar of cloud. By metonymy and based on verse 11, this probably refers to Yahweh. (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 33:10

וְ⁠רָאָ֤ה כָל־הָ⁠עָם֙ אֶת־עַמּ֣וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָ֔ן עֹמֵ֖ד פֶּ֣תַח הָ⁠אֹ֑הֶל וְ⁠קָ֤ם כָּל־הָ⁠עָם֙ וְ⁠הִֽשְׁתַּחֲוּ֔וּ אִ֖ישׁ פֶּ֥תַח אָהֳלֽ⁠וֹ

This verse uses contrastive parallelism. The presence of Yahweh is represented in the cloud that stands at the entrance of the tent, while the people prostrate themselves at the entrance to their tents. It would be good to try to retain the contrasting image in your translation if possible. (See: Parallelism)

עַמּ֣וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָ֔ן

See how you translated this in 13:21.

אָהֳלֽ⁠וֹ

This refers to the people’s tents.

Exodus 33:11

פָּנִ֣ים אֶל־פָּנִ֔ים

Speaking directly to each other rather than through dreams and visions is spoken of as if Moses and God saw each other’s faces while they spoke. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yahweh would speak directly to Moses” (See: Metaphor)

כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר יְדַבֵּ֥ר אִ֖ישׁ אֶל־רֵעֵ֑⁠הוּ

The metaphor of speaking face to face is explained by the simile here. How you translated face to face in your language may determine how you should translate this explanation. (See: Simile)

וּ⁠מְשָׁ֨רְת֜⁠וֹ יְהוֹשֻׁ֤עַ בִּן־נוּן֙ נַ֔עַר

Joshua has been introduced before but not mentioned since Exodus 32:17. Consider if your language will need to re-introduce Joshua in any way here. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Exodus 33:12

A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

הַ֚עַל אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה…דַעְתִּ֣י⁠ךָֽ בְ⁠שֵׁ֔ם וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י

You may want to make these two second-level quotations indirect to reduce the levels of quotation. See the UST. (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

רְ֠אֵה

This is an interjection to get someone’s attention. Alternate translation: “Look!” or “Listen!” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”

יְדַעְתִּ֣י⁠ךָֽ בְ⁠שֵׁ֔ם

To know someone by name is to know them well. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I know you well” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and my eyes find you favorable” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י

Here, found favor in my eyes is an idiom that means “I am pleased with you” so it means that God is pleased with Moses. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and you please me” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י

Here, in my eyes is a metaphor representing God’s evaluation. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you have also found favor in my evaluation” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י

Here, favor is an abstract noun that you could express in another way if necessary in your language. Alternate translation: “and you have also been found approved in my eyes” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 33:13

מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֗י⁠ךָ…אֶמְצָא־חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֑י⁠ךָ

Here, found favor in your eyes is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun favor into another form. Finally, in your eyes is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase you have found favor in my eyes in Exodus 33:12.

הוֹדִעֵ֤⁠נִי נָא֙ אֶת־דְּרָכֶ֔⁠ךָ

Here, ways is a metaphor either: (1) for Yahweh’s plans or (2) for the holy life he requires. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: (1) “please cause me to know what you are going to do in the future” (2) “please cause me to know how people can do what pleases you” (See: Metaphor)

אֶמְצָא־חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֑י⁠ךָ

This instance of the phrase find favor in your eyes means in the future. Consider how to translate it in your language to convey an on-going situation. Alternate translation: “I can always find favor in your eyes”

וּ⁠רְאֵ֕ה כִּ֥י עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ הַ⁠גּ֥וֹי הַ⁠זֶּֽה׃

Moses is requesting that Yahweh would again see, perceive, consider, or recognize the Israelites as his special people. In this way, Moses would know that Yahweh had truly forgiven them.

Exodus 33:14

פָּנַ֥⁠י יֵלֵ֖כוּ

Yahweh’s face represents his presence, which represents himself. Alternate translation: “I will go” (See: Metonymy)

פָּנַ֥⁠י יֵלֵ֖כוּ וַ⁠הֲנִחֹ֥תִי לָֽ⁠ךְ

The preposition connected to you here has a very flexible meaning and seems to be connected to both will go and will cause rest. If this would be unclear, consider repeating it in both clauses. Alternate translation: “My face will go with you and I will cause rest for you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לָֽ⁠ךְ

The word you here refers to Moses. It is singular. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

Exodus 33:15

אִם־אֵ֤ין פָּנֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הֹלְכִ֔ים

If your face is not going is a hypothetical situation in which Moses makes a request that they not go anywhere without Yahweh. In some languages you may need to place the request first. Alternate translation: “Do not take us up from here if your face is not going” (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

אִם־אֵ֤ין פָּנֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הֹלְכִ֔ים

Yahweh’s face represents his presence, which represents himself. Alternate translation: “If you are not going” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 33:16

וּ⁠בַ⁠מֶּ֣ה׀ יִוָּדַ֣ע אֵפ֗וֹא כִּֽי־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ אֲנִ֣י וְ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ הֲ⁠ל֖וֹא בְּ⁠לֶכְתְּ⁠ךָ֣ עִמָּ֑⁠נוּ וְ⁠נִפְלֵ֨ינוּ֙ אֲנִ֣י וְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֔ מִ⁠כָּ֨ל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם אֲשֶׁ֖ר עַל־פְּנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֲדָמָֽה

This verse contains two or three rhetorical questions, and the length of the second is debated. The first rhetorical question, “And in what then will it be known that I have found favor in your eyes, I and your people?” is used for emphasis and means, “There is only one way people will know that I and your people please you.” The second, “Is it not in your going with us?” is used to answer the first question and means “That way is your going with us.” It is possible that the rest of the verse is (1) a statement further clarifying how Yahweh’s favor is demonstrated (ULT, UST), (2) an extension of the second rhetorical question (“Is it not in your going with us so that I and your people shall be distinct from all of the people that are on the face of the earth?”), or (3) a separate rhetorical question making the same point (“And shall I and your people be distinct from all of the people that are on the face of the earth?”) Moses used these questions in order to emphasize that if Yahweh does not go with them, no one will know that Yahweh is pleased with Moses and the people. Use whatever forms would be natural in your language to present an argument like this. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: Rhetorical Question)

וּ⁠בַ⁠מֶּ֣ה

This refers back to Moses’ hypothetical situation in the previous verse, that is, Yahweh not going with them. Use whatever connecting forms are necessary to make that clear. (See: Information Structure)

וּ⁠בַ⁠מֶּ֣ה׀ יִוָּדַ֣ע אֵפ֗וֹא

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And in what then will people know” (See: Active or Passive)

מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙

Here, found favor is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun favor into another form. Finally, eyes are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase you have found favor in my eyes in Exodus 33:12. (See: Idiom)

Exodus 33:17

גַּ֣ם אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר דִּבַּ֖רְתָּ אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֑ה כִּֽי־מָצָ֤אתָ חֵן֙ בְּ⁠עֵינַ֔⁠י וָ⁠אֵדָעֲ⁠ךָ֖ בְּ⁠שֵֽׁם

Here, for signals a reason clause. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because you have found favor in my eyes, and I know you by name, I will also do this thing that you have spoken” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

מָצָ֤אתָ חֵן֙ בְּ⁠עֵינַ֔⁠י

Here, you have found favor in my eyes is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun favor into another form. Finally, eyes are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase you have found favor in my eyes in Exodus 33:12. (See: Idiom)

מָצָ֤אתָ

Here, you is singular and refers to Moses. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

וָ⁠אֵדָעֲ⁠ךָ֖ בְּ⁠שֵֽׁם

To know someone by name is to know them well. See how you translated this in Exodus 33:12. Alternate translation: “and I know you well” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 33:18

כְּבֹדֶֽ⁠ךָ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 33:19

אֲנִ֨י אַעֲבִ֤יר כָּל־טוּבִ⁠י֙ עַל־פָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ

Yahweh speaks of his goodness like it was an object that he could move over Moses. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. See the UST. (See: Metaphor)

טוּבִ⁠י֙

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of goodness, you could express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

עַל־פָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ…לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י⁠ךָ

Here, face means “you.” Alternate translation: “above you … before you” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠קָרָ֧אתִֽי בְ⁠שֵׁ֛ם יְהוָ֖ה

The meaning of the phrase is unclear. It may mean that Yahweh will disclose something about his character to Moses. Alternate translation: “and I will proclaim my name, ‘Yahweh,’ ”

וְ⁠חַנֹּתִי֙ אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֣ר אָחֹ֔ן וְ⁠רִחַמְתִּ֖י אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֲרַחֵֽם

These statements use parallelism internally and between each other. They stress Yahweh’s divine prerogative to do whatever he wants. The structure also parallels Yahweh’s I AM statements in Exodus 3:14. If this form of parallelism would be misunderstood in your language, consider another form that emphasizes that Yahweh is graciously kind to exactly those and only those to whom he chooses to show kindness, and he does so without outside influence. (See: Parallelism)

Exodus 33:20

וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר

In some languages it may be better to omit And he said at the start of this verse to avoid stopping and restarting the quotation. Yahweh is speaking from 33:19-34:3. (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

כִּ֛י לֹֽא־יִרְאַ֥⁠נִי הָ⁠אָדָ֖ם וָ⁠חָֽי

Alternate translation: “because no person can live after he has seen me”

Exodus 33:21

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה

In some languages it may be better to omit And Yahweh said at the start of this verse to avoid stopping and restarting the quotation. Yahweh is speaking from 33:19-34:3. (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

הִנֵּ֥ה

Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you.”

Exodus 33:22

בַּ⁠עֲבֹ֣ר כְּבֹדִ֔⁠י

Yahweh speaks of his glory as if it were an object that he could move over Moses. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “while I pass over gloriously” (See: Metaphor)

כְּבֹדִ֔⁠י

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

וְ⁠שַׂכֹּתִ֥י כַפִּ֛⁠י עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ

Here Yahweh speaks as if he, like a person, had hands that could cover things. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use a simile to retain the image, as this figure is important to retain and extends into the next verse. Alternate translation: “I will cover you as with a hand” (See: Personification)

Exodus 33:23

וַ⁠הֲסִרֹתִי֙ אֶת־כַּפִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠רָאִ֖יתָ אֶת־אֲחֹרָ֑⁠י וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י לֹ֥א יֵרָאֽוּ

The strong personification image of Yahweh continues throughout this verse and should be retained, if possible. You may have to use similes if this would be misunderstood in your culture. Alternate translation: “Then it will be as if I stop covering you with a hand, and you will see a small part of my glory, like a person’s back, but not my full glory, like a person’s face.” (See: Personification)

וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י

Here, but my face is moved to the front of the clause to emphasize contrast with my back. If your language has a certain way of contrasting elements, be sure to make a strong contrast between Yahweh’s face and back. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י לֹ֥א יֵרָאֽוּ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but you will not see my face” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 34

Exodus 34 General Notes

Outline

• v. 1-4 Yahweh orders Moses to return to the mountain
• v. 5-9 Yahweh reveals himself to Moses and Moses reacts
• v. 10-28 Covenant renewal
• v. 29-34 Moses reports to Israel

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

• In verse 1, Yahweh says he will write on stone tablets, yet later (v. 27-28) he commands Moses to write and the text says Moses writes.
• Yahweh reveals something significant about himself or his character to Moses. There are a number of difficult terms and concepts.
• The biblical metaphor of true worship as sexual fidelity appears in v. 14-16.
• Several verses are repeated either exactly or closely from earlier chapters.
• In v. 12-26 Yahweh appears to give a different 10 commandments from those in Exodus 20 (but also largely repeated from other earlier parts of Exodus), raising the question of what was actually written on the stone tablets in v. 28.
• The concept of Moses’s shining face may be difficult in some cultures.

“He will bring the punishment for the fathers’ sin on their children”

This phrase does not mean that a child is necessarily punished for the sins of their parents. Many scholars believe that this passage indicates that a parent’s sins will have consequences that will affect their children and grandchildren. (See: sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Exodus 34:1

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה

Yahweh continues to speak to Moses, but there is a change of topic here, so you may want to retain the speech introduction. However, if it would be misunderstood, you could simply continue the quotation from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Yahweh continued” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

אֲשֶׁ֥ר שִׁבַּֽרְתָּ

This clause reminds the reader of what tablets are being mentioned by reminding you of what had happened to the previous tablets. If it would be more helpful in your language to attach it to the first mention of the tablets in this verse, you could rearrange it like the UST. (See: Information Structure)

לֻחֹ֥ת אֲבָנִ֖ים

Alternate translation: “flat slabs of stone” See how you translated this in Exodus 31:18

Exodus 34:3

וְ⁠גַם־אִ֥ישׁ אַל־יֵרָ֖א בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠הָ֑ר

Being seen doing something represents doing that. Alternate translation: “and do not let anyone else be anywhere on the mountain” (See: Metonymy)

גַּם־הַ⁠צֹּ֤אן וְ⁠הַ⁠בָּקָר֙ אַל־יִרְע֔וּ אֶל־מ֖וּל הָ⁠הָ֥ר הַ⁠הֽוּא

Alternate translation: “Even flocks or herds are not allowed to come near the mountain to eat.”

Exodus 34:5

וַ⁠יִּתְיַצֵּ֥ב עִמּ֖⁠וֹ שָׁ֑ם וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֥א

The pronouns are not clear here, but the referents are probably as in the following alternate translation: “and Yahweh stood with Moses there, and Yahweh proclaimed” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֥א בְ⁠שֵׁ֖ם יְהוָֽה

This could mean: (1) “he spoke the name ‘Yahweh’” (2) “he proclaimed who Yahweh is.” For the second meaning, name would represent who God is. (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 34:6

יְהוָ֣ה׀ יְהוָ֔ה אֵ֥ל רַח֖וּם וְ⁠חַנּ֑וּן

God is speaking about himself. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am God, and I am merciful and gracious” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

רַח֖וּם וְ⁠חַנּ֑וּן

This is emphasizing that Yahweh cares for people and acts kindly toward them. If doubling would not strengthen the statement here in your language, consider another form that would. (See: Doublet)

אֶ֥רֶךְ אַפַּ֖יִם

The phrase long of nostril is an idiom that means Yahweh does not get angry easily or quickly. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “slow to anger” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠רַב־חֶ֥סֶד וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of covenant faithfulness and trustworthiness, you could express the same idea in another way. (For covenant faithfulness, see Exodus 20:6). Alternate translation: “always being faithful to my covenant and always being trustworthy” (See: Abstract Nouns)

חֶ֥סֶד וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת

This is emphasizing that Yahweh always does what he promises toward the people he loves. If doubling would not strengthen the statement here in your language, consider another form that would. (See: Doublet)

Exodus 34:7

נֹצֵ֥ר חֶ֨סֶד֙ לָ⁠אֲלָפִ֔ים

See how you translated covenant faithfulnessin the previous verse. Alternate translation: “faithfully loving thousands of generations” or “faithful to his covenant with thousands of generations” (See: Abstract Nouns)

לָ⁠אֲלָפִ֔ים

This large number is used to mean “forever” or “to all descendants forever.” It is deliberately contrasted with third and fourth later in the verse to emphasize how much longer God’s covenant faithfulness is than his anger. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys a very long time. Alternate translation: “for every generation” (See: Hyperbole)

לָ⁠אֲלָפִ֔ים

The word thousands is a metonym for a number too many to count. Alternate translation: “to innumerable people” (See: Metonymy)

עָוֺ֛ן וָ⁠פֶ֖שַׁע וְ⁠חַטָּאָ֑ה

This list is meant to convey the idea of every kind of wrong. If a list like this would be misunderstood in your language you may need to use other terms or forms to make this point. Alternate translation: “every kind of sin” (See: Litany)

עָוֺ֛ן וָ⁠פֶ֖שַׁע וְ⁠חַטָּאָ֑ה…עֲוֺ֣ן

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of iniquity, transgression, and sin, you could express the same ideas in another way., as modeled in the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

וְ⁠נַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה

Yahweh is speaking about himself. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “But I will certainly not acquit” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וְ⁠נַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה

Whom Yahweh will not acquit is not stated. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translations: “But he will certainly not clear the guilty” or “But he will certainly not say that the guilty are innocent” or “But he will certainly not free guilty people” (See: Ellipsis)

עֲוֺ֣ן

Here, iniquity refers to the consequences or the punishment for iniquity. Alternate translation: “the punishment for the iniquity of” (See: Metonymy)

פֹּקֵ֣ד׀ עֲוֺ֣ן אָב֗וֹת עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים

The iniquity of the fathers is spoken of as if it were something capable of visiting people. This means that Yahweh makes the consequences of people’s sins affect their descendants. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “punishing the sons and the sons of the sons for the iniquity of the fathers” (See: Metaphor)

עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים

The references to sons and sons of the sons represents descendants. Alternate translation: “on their descendants” (See: Metonymy)

עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִֽים

Here, “generation” is implied after third and fourth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִֽים

Here, third and fourth means “several.” If this would not be understood and your language has a way of referring to an unspecified (but approximately 3-4) number, you may have to use it here. Alternate translation: “on a few generations” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 34:8

וַ⁠יִּשְׁתָּֽחוּ

Here, himself means that Moses did this action to his own body. Some languages may use a special form to indicate this. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

וַ⁠יִּקֹּ֥ד אַ֖רְצָ⁠ה וַ⁠יִּשְׁתָּֽחוּ

These two verbs have very similar meanings and are often used together to express people’s physical and spiritual posture in worship. If such repetition would be misunderstood in your language, you may need to express the physical action and spiritual action explicitly. Alternate translation: “and bowed to the ground in worship” (See: Doublet)

Exodus 34:9

מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙

Here, found favor is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun favor into another form. Finally, eyes are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase I have found favor in your eyes in Exodus 33:12. (See: Idiom)

עַם־קְשֵׁה־עֹ֨רֶף֙ ה֔וּא

Moses speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had hard necks. See how you translated this in Exodus 32:9. (See: Metaphor)

לַ⁠עֲוֺנֵ֥⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠חַטָּאתֵ֖⁠נוּ

The words iniquity and sin mean basically the same thing and are combined for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “all our sins” (See: Doublet)

Exodus 34:10

Starting in this verse, the covenant is largely repeated and consists of two parts: (1) what Yahweh will do, which is detailed in verses 10-11 (and briefly restated in verse 24) and (2) what is required of the Israelites, which is detailed in verses 12-26. For further context, see Exodus 19:5 and following, and 23:20-24:8. Verses 12-26 are another list of ten commandments.

כֹּרֵ֣ת בְּרִית֒

To cut a covenant means to make a covenant. The terminology refers to ancient rituals around making covenants, which is illustrated in Genesis 15. See the imagery and how you translated there. Alternate translation: “am about to make a covenant” (See: Idiom)

עַמְּ⁠ךָ֙

Here, the people are referred to as belonging to Moses. This refers to his being their leader. Alternate translation: ”the people you lead” (See: Possession)

כָל־הָ֠⁠עָם אֲשֶׁר־אַתָּ֨ה בְ⁠קִרְבּ֜⁠וֹ

This phrase is ambiguous and could refer to: (1) the nations that surrounded Israel or (2) the Israelites (who surrounded Moses). Attempt to maintain the ambiguity if you can; otherwise you may choose one, perhaps following another locally known translation’s choice.

כִּֽי־נוֹרָ֣א ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֲנִ֖י עֹשֶׂ֥ה עִמָּֽ⁠ךְ

This means that what Yahweh is doing causes people to be afraid. In this case, people will fear Yahweh when they see what he does. Alternate translation: “for what I am doing with you will cause fear”

עִמָּֽ⁠ךְ

Here, you refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Exodus 34:11

גֹרֵ֣שׁ מִ⁠פָּנֶ֗י⁠ךָ

Here, from before your faces means “ahead of you” or “on your behalf.” Yahweh is emphasizing who is doing the driving out. (See: Metonymy)

אֶת־הָ⁠אֱמֹרִי֙ וְ⁠הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִ֔י וְ⁠הַ⁠חִתִּי֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י וְ⁠הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִֽי

See how you translated these in Exodus 33:2. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 34:12

Verses 12-16 are the first of these ten commandments. The original language is structured such that every clause in these verses is subordinate to the initial, Guard yourself. That sort of structure may not be possible in your language (as it is not in English).

לְ⁠ךָ֗

Here, yourself means that each Israelite should guard against committing these sins. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֖ה בָּ֣א עָלֶ֑י⁠הָ פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּ⁠קִרְבֶּֽ⁠ךָ

This sentence contains two hypotheticals as a warning. Each is introduced by lest. Use a marker in your language that introduces a hypothetical situation, but also see the next note. Alternate translation: “If you were to cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land where you are about to go into, probably he would become as a trap in your midst.” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֖ה בָּ֣א עָלֶ֑י⁠הָ פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּ⁠קִרְבֶּֽ⁠ךָ

The second of these hypothetical statements is logically dependent on and follows after the first as a result. As you mark these hypotheticals, use a form that communicates that the second is a result of the first. Alternate translation: “because if you cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land where you are about to go into, then he will become as a trap in your midst” (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙

See how you translated this in 34:10. (See: Idiom)

לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב…יִהְיֶ֥ה

The word inhabitant is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronoun he is agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … they become” (See: Collective Nouns)

פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּ⁠קִרְבֶּֽ⁠ךָ

People who tempt others to sin are spoken of as if they were a trap. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “lest those remaining people tempt you to sin” (See: Simile)

Exodus 34:13

כִּ֤י

This word marks a strong contrast with the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a new sentence: “Do the opposite!” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

אֶת־מִזְבְּחֹתָ⁠ם֙ תִּתֹּצ֔וּ⁠ן וְ⁠אֶת־מַצֵּבֹתָ֖⁠ם תְּשַׁבֵּר֑וּ⁠ן וְ⁠אֶת־אֲשֵׁרָ֖י⁠ו תִּכְרֹתֽוּ⁠ן

This unusual word order reflects the original in bringing each item the Israelites must destroy into focus. You should use whatever form in your language would emphasize or focus on each item that they must destroy. Alternate translation, as separate sentences: “as for their altars, break them down! As for their stone pillars, smash them to pieces! As for their trees where they worship the goddess Asherah, cut them all down!” (See: Information Structure)

תִּכְרֹתֽוּ⁠ן

For some reason only this pronoun is singular, referring back the singular “inhabitant” in the previous verse. Translate it based on your decision in the previous verse. (See: Collective Nouns)

Exodus 34:14

לֹ֥א תִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה

To bow to another god means to worship it. This imagery is throughout scripture and should be retained in translation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you shall not bow to worship” (See: Symbolic Action)

כִּ֤י יְהוָה֙ קַנָּ֣א שְׁמ֔⁠וֹ אֵ֥ל קַנָּ֖א הֽוּא׃

The repeated word jealous means that God is concerned to keep his honor. If his people worship other gods, he loses honor, because when his people do not honor him, other people also will not honor him. This is pictured in a metaphor of a jealous spouse who is concerned that his spouse be faithful to him. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. The UST makes this image explicit as a simile, which can be done occasionally but would probably be too long for repeated use in a translation. Alternate translation: “Yahweh jealously guards his reputation. He is a God jealous of his honor.” (See: Metaphor)

כִּ֤י יְהוָה֙ קַנָּ֣א שְׁמ֔⁠וֹ

Here, the word name represents God’s character. Alternate translation: “Yahweh is always jealous” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 34:15

לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב…וְ⁠קָרָ֣א…מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ

The word inhabitant is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronouns he and his are agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. See how you translated this in verse 12. Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … and they invite … from their sacrifice” or “with the inhabitants of … and one of them invites … from his sacrifice” (See: Collective Nouns)

פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֥ת בְּרִ֖ית לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ וְ⁠זָנ֣וּ׀ אַחֲרֵ֣י אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠הֶ֗ם וְ⁠זָבְחוּ֙ לֵ⁠אלֹ֣הֵי⁠הֶ֔ם וְ⁠קָרָ֣א לְ⁠ךָ֔

Most of this verse is a sort of chain of logically consecutive hypothetical events that Yahweh is warning the Israelites against. Your language may have a specific way this sort of argument must be structured or phrased. One way to see this would be to repeat lest before every verb in verse 15-16. Alternate translation: “If you cut a covenant the inhabitant of the land, and if they then prostitute after their gods and sacrifice to their gods, and if he then invites you” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֥ת בְּרִ֖ית לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ

This phrase is exactly the same as the second clause of verse 12. It serves as a reminder of the command Yahweh is giving as he begins to expand on the “trap” he mentioned in verse 12. Your language may need to mark this repetition in a particular way. Alternate translation: “Remember: keep yourself lest you cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land”

תִּכְרֹ֥ת בְּרִ֖ית

See how you translated this in verse 12. Alternate translation: “you make a covenant” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠זָנ֣וּ׀ אַחֲרֵ֣י אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠הֶ֗ם

In this metaphor, Yahweh speaks of people worshiping other gods as if they were prostitutes going to other men. This metaphor is most often used regarding the unfaithfulness of the Israelites. The metaphor is not quite as clear with the other nations because while Yahweh is the only true God, he is not in special covenant with the other nations as their god. However, since the worship is still impurely following false gods, the metaphor is used here. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. Alternate translation: “and they worship their gods” or “because they worship their gods like prostitutes who go to other men” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠זָנ֣וּ׀ אַחֲרֵ֣י אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠הֶ֗ם

This phrase may also be seen as a metonymy because sexual sin was a regular part of worshiping false gods. Alternate translation: “and they worship by fornicating with their gods’ cult prostitutes” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠קָרָ֣א לְ⁠ךָ֔

Here, what the inhabitant will invite the Israelite to is not stated, but can be inferred from context. At the most basic level it is an invitation to eat food the Israelites were forbidden to eat. It is unclear how much more participation in worshiping false gods is implied. If your language requires that you specify what the Israelite is being invited into you may have to add some information. Alternate translation: “and he will invite you to eat from his sacrifice” or “and he will invite you to a feast to honor his gods” (See: Ellipsis)

וְ⁠אָכַלְתָּ֖ מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ

The first part of the sin Yahweh is warning against in this and the next verse is to eat from his sacrifice. This clause is the result of disobedience regarding the covenant and the logical conclusion of the series of hypothetical events Yahweh presents before this. Alternate translation: “as a result, you will eat from his sacrifice” or “then you will eat from his sacrifice” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

וְ⁠אָכַלְתָּ֖ מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ

Here, and you eat from his sacrifice may represent any and all parts of the worship of the other nations’ false gods. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and you feast to honor his gods” (See: Synecdoche)

וְ⁠אָכַלְתָּ֖ מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the consequence of eating food that is sacrificed to another god explicitly. Alternate translation: “and you will eat some of his sacrifice and become guilty of worshiping his gods” or “and you will prostitute yourself to his god by eating some of his sacrifice” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 34:16

The string of hypothetical actions, each with its logical result continues throughout this verse. Continue translating the transitions between clauses as you decided in the previous verses. (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

וְ⁠זָנ֣וּ בְנֹתָ֗י⁠ו אַחֲרֵי֙ אֱלֹ֣הֵי⁠הֶ֔ן

In this metaphor, Yahweh speaks of people worshiping other gods as if they were prostitutes going to other men. This metaphor is most often used regarding the unfaithfulness of the Israelites. The metaphor is not quite as clear with the other nations because while Yahweh is the only true God, he is not in special covenant with the other nations as their god. However, since the worship is still impurely following false gods, the metaphor is used here. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and his daughters worship their gods” or “and his daughters worship their gods like prostitutes who go to other men” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠הִזְנוּ֙ אֶת־בָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ אַחֲרֵ֖י אֱלֹהֵי⁠הֶֽן

In this metaphor, Yahweh speaks of people worshiping other gods as if they were prostitutes going to other men. The metaphor is clear here since it is referring to Israelite men who should be Yahweh worshipers. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. Alternate translation: “and cause your sons to worship their gods” or “and cause your sons to worship their gods like prostitutes who go to other men” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠הִזְנוּ֙ אֶת־בָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ אַחֲרֵ֖י אֱלֹהֵי⁠הֶֽן

This is the climatic consequence of living in peace the nations God is driving out before them: complete apostacy from Yahweh and loss of the next generation to wickedness. Specifically it is the result of intermarriage with the pagans, which God has explicitly forbidden for this very reason. If your language marks the final consequence of a string of actions in a particular way it may be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “and in the end, they will cause even your sons to prostitute after their gods” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 34:17

The prohibition here is focused on making gods. In your translation make sure that the focus is not on the method, but the god-making.

מַסֵּכָ֖ה

See how you translated molten metal in Exodus 32:4.

Exodus 34:18

This verse is almost identical to most of Exodus 23:15.

שִׁבְעַ֨ת

Alternate translation: “7” (See: Numbers)

הָ⁠אָבִ֑יב…הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב

This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated Aviv in Exodus 13:4. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: Hebrew Months)

Exodus 34:19

This verse is similar to Exodus 13:12.

Exodus 34:20

This verse is very similar to Exodus 13:13.

בְ⁠שֶׂ֔ה…וַ⁠עֲרַפְתּ֑⁠וֹ

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express explicitly that either the lamb or donkey must be killed, as in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה

Alternate translation: “you do not ransom the donkey”

כֹּ֣ל בְּכ֤וֹר בָּנֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ תִּפְדֶּ֔ה

Firstborn sons and firstborn donkeys belonged to Yahweh, but Yahweh did not want them sacrificed to Him. Instead, the Israelites were to sacrifice a lamb in their place. This allowed the Israelites to buy the donkeys and sons back from Yahweh.

וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖⁠י רֵיקָֽם

Here understatement is used to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. This portion of the verse is identical to the end of Exodus 23:15. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “come to me without a proper offering” or “always bring an offering to me” (See: Double Negatives)

Exodus 34:21

This command is similar to that in Exodus 20:9.

וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

בֶּ⁠חָרִ֥ישׁ וּ⁠בַ⁠קָּצִ֖יר

Alternate translation: “Even when you are preparing the soil or gathering the crops”

Exodus 34:22

This verse is similar to Exodus 23:16, however the first festival is named Festival of Weeks here and “Festival of the Harvest” in 23:16.

וְ⁠חַג֙ הָֽ⁠אָסִ֔יף

This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. See how you translated this in Exodus 23:16. Alternate translation: “and the Festival of the Ingathering”

תְּקוּפַ֖ת הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה

Like “the exiting of the year” in Exodus 23:16, this refers to the end of the year. Here, the year is pictured as something that can turn. Which, thinking of the planet, is highly astronomically accurate. (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 34:23

Except for God of Israel and dropping “to,” this verse is identical to Exodus 23:17.

יֵרָאֶה֙…אֶת־פְּנֵ֛י הָֽ⁠אָדֹ֥ן

Here to appear before the face of the Lord Yahweh means to gather to worship. Before the face is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 34:25

See the very similar Exodus 23:18.

דַּם־זִבְחִ֑⁠י

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the fact that the blood is from an animal explicitly. Alternate translation: “the blood of an animal that you sacrifice to me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 34:26

This verse is identical to Exodus 23:19.

Exodus 34:27

כִּ֞י עַל־פִּ֣י׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה

Alternate translation: “for in accordance with these words” or “for according to these words”

כָּרַ֧תִּי אִתְּ⁠ךָ֛ בְּרִ֖ית

See how you translated this in verse 12. (See: Idiom)

Exodus 34:28

עֲשֶׂ֖רֶת

Alternate translation: “10” (See: Numbers)

אַרְבָּעִ֥ים יוֹם֙ וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִ֣ים לַ֔יְלָה

Alternate translation: “for 40 days, including the nights”

וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֣ב

Here, he probably refers to Moses, based on Yahweh’s command in the previous verse. However, Exodus 34:1 opens the possibility that Yahweh wrote. It is best to leave it ambiguous, but if you must specify, saying Moses is better. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 34:29

וַ⁠יְהִ֗י

This marks a change of scene which you should mark in a natural way in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠רֶ֤דֶת מֹשֶׁה֙ מֵ⁠הַ֣ר סִינַ֔י וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֨י לֻחֹ֤ת הָֽ⁠עֵדֻת֙ בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶׁ֔ה בְּ⁠רִדְתּ֖⁠וֹ מִן־הָ⁠הָ֑ר

The statement about Moses’ descent from the mountain is repeated almost verbatim, but does not refer to two events. If this would be misunderstood you may need to state it only once in translation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Then Moses came down from Mount Sinai. As he was coming down from the mountain, he was carrying the two tablets of the testimony in his hands.” (See: Information Structure)

וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה לֹֽא־יָדַ֗ע כִּ֥י קָרַ֛ן ע֥וֹר פָּנָ֖י⁠ו בְּ⁠דַבְּר֥⁠וֹ אִתּֽ⁠וֹ

In some languages it will make more sense to state that Moses’ face shone before saying that he did not know that as in the UST. (See: Information Structure)

קָרַ֛ן

Alternate translation: “became radiant”

Exodus 34:30

וַ⁠יִּֽירְא֖וּ

They were afraid because of his bright face. Alternate translation: “because of that, they were afraid” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Exodus 34:32

וַ⁠יְצַוֵּ֕⁠ם אֵת֩ כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר דִּבֶּ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אִתּ֖⁠וֹ

This means that Moses commanded the Israelites to obey everything Yahweh had commanded Moses to command the Israelites to do.

Exodus 34:34

This and the next verse give a general statement about Moses’s practice for an unstated amount of time (it was probably from this point until his death as he continued to talk to Yahweh). You should mark this with a form in your language that is used for on-going action like would or the UST’s “Whenever.” (See: Connect — Background Information)

יְצֻוֶּֽה

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh had commanded him” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 35

Exodus 35 General Notes

Structure\r

\r - v. 1-3: reiteration of Sabbath command\r - v. 4-9: list of materials for donation (see Exodus 25:1-7)\r - v. 10-19: things they need to make for the Dwelling complex\r - v. 20-29: the people bring all the things listed\r - v. 30-36:1: appointing of lead craftsmen to build these things

Translation Issues in this Chapter

• In the last chapter some repetition of Yahweh’s instructions began, mostly around the covenant commands. Starting in this chapter and even more so in chapter 36, the commands regarding the construction of the Dwelling complex are repeated, often word for word, from chapters 25-31. In many verses the only difference will be a change of verb form from instruction to completion. As much as possible, these parallels will be pointed out for the translators with links to the previous verses. Translators should refer back to the previously translated verses for consistency and because notes in this section may not cover everything that was covered in the initial instruction section.
• Many items, materials, and processes for building the Dwelling may be unknown, but should have already been addressed in chapters 25-31.

Exodus 35:2

This verse is very similar to Exodus 31:15.

שֵׁ֣שֶׁת

Alternate translation: “6” (See: Numbers)

וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day 7” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

שֵׁ֣שֶׁת יָמִים֮ תֵּעָשֶׂ֣ה מְלָאכָה֒

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Six days you shall work” (See: Active or Passive)

כָּל־הָ⁠עֹשֶׂ֥ה ב֛⁠וֹ מְלָאכָ֖ה יוּמָֽת

If your language would not use passive here, you can state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “You must execute anyone who works on that day” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 35:4

In verses 4-9, Moses tells the Israelites to collect the things Yahweh commanded him to collect in Exodus 25:2-7. You should check your translation for consistency between these passages.

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶל־כָּל־עֲדַ֥ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר זֶ֣ה הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לֵ⁠אמֹֽר

Verses 5-19 are a second-level direct quotation. If it would be better to reduce the quotation level in your language, you may want to make this introductory comment (everything after the first saying) an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Moses told all of the congregation of the sons of Israel the things that Yahweh commanded, saying,” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Exodus 35:5

This verse is similar to Exodus 25:2-3.

קְח֨וּ מֵֽ⁠אִתְּ⁠כֶ֤ם תְּרוּמָה֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה

Alternate translation: “Take up a collection for Yahweh from what you have”

כֹּ֚ל

Here, “from” is omitted but suggested by the sentence grammar. Also, every means “every person.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “from every person” (See: Ellipsis)

כֹּ֚ל נְדִ֣יב לִבּ֔⁠וֹ

This is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom, though the body part often varies. Alternate translation: “from everyone who wants to give one” (See: Idiom)

After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list.

Exodus 35:6

This verse is identical to Exodus 25:4.

וּ⁠תְכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י

This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י

A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 35:7

This verse is identical to Exodus 25:5.

מְאָדָּמִ֛ים

When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish. It is not clear if these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: Translate Unknowns)

תְּחָשִׁ֖ים

The meaning of this word is not known; it may refer to some water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. Sea cows on Wikipedia (See: Translate Unknowns)

שִׂטִּֽים

A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. See on Wikipedia (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 35:8

Except for several uses of the word and, this verse is identical to Exodus 25:6.

וּ⁠בְשָׂמִים֙

Here, spices are made from parts of plants that people dry and then grind into a powder to put in oil or food, giving it a particular smell or flavor. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Exodus 35:9

Except for an initial and, this verse is identical to Exodus 25:7.

וְ⁠אַ֨בְנֵי־שֹׁ֔הַם

An onyx stone is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red, or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י

Alternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “and treasured gems for”

Exodus 35:10

וְ⁠כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב

Here, heart and spirit are both referring to things innately possessed by a person, that is, traits of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftsman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated this in Exodus 28:3. Alternate translation: “And every man with a skill” (See: Metonymy)

צִוָּ֖ה

Here, some the words that a sentence would need to be complete in some languages are left out. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled in the UST. (See: Ellipsis)

After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list.

Exodus 35:11

מִכְסֵ֑⁠הוּ

See how you translated this in Exodus 26:14.

קְרָסָי⁠ו֙

The clasps fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in Exodus 26:6.

קְרָשָׁ֔י⁠ו

See how you translated this in Exodus 26:15.

בְּרִיחָ֖יו

See how you translated this in Exodus 26:26.

עַמֻּדָ֖י⁠ו

See how you translated this in 26:32.

אֲדָנָֽי⁠ו

These are heavy objects that rest on the ground and keep the object attached to them from moving. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:19.

Exodus 35:12

See how you translated these terms in 25:10-17 and 26:36.

Exodus 35:13

לֶ֥חֶם הַ⁠פָּנִֽים

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. This bread represented the presence of God. Alternate translation: “the bread of the Presence” See how you translated this in Exodus 25:30. (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 35:14

See 25:31-37 for these items.

Exodus 35:15

מִזְבַּ֤ח הַ⁠קְּטֹ֨רֶת֙…שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מִּשְׁחָ֔ה…קְטֹ֣רֶת הַ⁠סַּמִּ֑ים

For the altar, see 30:1. For the oil, see 30:25. For the incense, see 30:7.

Exodus 35:16

For the grate, see Exodus 27:4. Most of the rest of the verse is almost identical to 30:28.

Exodus 35:17

קַלְעֵ֣י…מָסַ֖ךְ

These were large curtains made of cloth. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:36.

עַמֻּדָ֖י⁠ו

These were strong pieces of wood set upright and used as supports. See how you translated these in Exodus 27:10.

אֲדָנֶ֑י⁠הָ

These were blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place. See how you translated this in Exodus 26:19.

Exodus 35:18

יִתְדֹ֧ת…יִתְדֹ֥ת

These were sharp pieces of wood or metal used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground. See how you translated this in Exodus 27:19.

Exodus 35:19

Except for for serving in the Holy Place and two “ands,” this verse is identical to 31:10.

Exodus 35:20

מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֥י מֹשֶֽׁה

Alternate translation: “from Moses” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 35:21

וַ⁠יָּבֹ֕אוּ כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜⁠וֹ אֹת֗⁠וֹ הֵ֠בִיאוּ

These two phrases parallel each other and mean the same thing. It would be good to keep this poetic repetition in your translation unless it would be misunderstood. If repetition here would not highlight the joyful giving spirit of the Israelites in your language, you may need to combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “Everyone who was motivated, body and soul, came and gave” (See: Parallelism)

וַ⁠יָּבֹ֕אוּ כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜⁠וֹ אֹת֗⁠וֹ הֵ֠בִיאוּ

Here, heart and spirit both refer to a person’s will, their desire to do something. Many languages will have similar expressions, perhaps using different body and spirit words or concepts which you can use. If your language would not express a person’s will in this way, you could translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “And every man whose will lifted him came, and all who felt impelled brought” (See: Synecdoche)

אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ

Here, heart lifted is a metaphor for being willing or excited. Many languages will have similar expressions, perhaps using a different body part or a different action. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “who was excited” (See: Metaphor)

כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜⁠וֹ אֹת֗⁠וֹ

Here, man, whose, and him all refer to men and women in a general way. This is made explicit in the next verse. If your readers might misunderstand this, you may use terms that include men and women. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

וּ⁠לְ⁠בִגְדֵ֖י הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun holiness in another way. See how you translated this in 28:2. Alternate translation: “and for the holy clothing” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 35:22

כֹּ֣ל׀ נְדִ֣יב לֵ֗ב

Here, heart refers to a person’s will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to bring these gifts to Yahweh. This is a shortening and combining of the figure used in the previous verse: heart and impelled are brought together. See how you translated these ideas in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “anyone whose will impelled him” (See: Synecdoche)

ל׀ נְדִ֣יב

Alternate translation: “who were impelled of”

חָ֣ח וָ⁠נֶ֜זֶם וְ⁠טַבַּ֤עַת וְ⁠כוּמָז֙ כָּל־כְּלִ֣י זָהָ֔ב

These are different kinds of jewelry. The exact identity of each object is not known. The phrase all of the things of gold could either modify the whole list, meaning “all these items were made of gold,” or could mean “many other gold things.” If taken as a summary statement, in some languages it may be clearer to move it to the front of the list. Alternate translation: “all kinds of gold jewelry including necklaces, nose rings, signet rings, and gold ornaments” (See: Litany)

וְ⁠כָל־אִ֕ישׁ

Although the term men is used, the word here is used in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “And every person” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Exodus 35:23

See how you translated many of these words in Exodus 25:4-5.

וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נִמְצָ֣א אִתּ֗⁠וֹ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also, the meaning of this phrase is simple possession. Alternate translation: “And every man who owned” or “And every man having” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ

Here man includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “And every person” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ

The phrase every man is used here without the restriction, “who was willing,” from previous verses. The exaggeration is used to emphasize what a large portion of the Israelites gave willingly. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses a large number or a majority. Alternate translation: “And very many people” (See: Hyperbole)

Exodus 35:24

וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נִמְצָ֨א אִתּ֜⁠וֹ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also, the meaning of this phrase is simple possession. Alternate translation: “and everyone who owned” or “and everyone having” (See: Active or Passive)

כָּל־מֵרִ֗ים

Here, all is limited by presenters, meaning only everyone who brought contributions. Avoid implying that every single Israelite did this (though very many did). Alternate translation: “All who decided to offer”

וְ⁠כֹ֡ל

The phrase all is used here without the restriction, “who were willing,” from previous verses. The exaggeration is used to emphasize what a large portion of the Israelites gave willingly. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses a large number or a majority. Alternate translation: “and very many people” (See: Hyperbole)

לְ⁠כָל־מְלֶ֥אכֶת הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֖ה

Here, service refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase work of the service refers to building the Dwelling as a place for worshiping Yahweh. Alternate translation: “for any of the building of a place for worship” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 35:25

חַכְמַת־לֵ֖ב

Here, heart is referring to something innately possessed by a person, that is, a trait of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftswoman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 28:3. Alternate translation: “who possessed the skill” (See: Metonymy)

אֶֽת־הַ⁠תְּכֵ֨לֶת֙ וְ⁠אֶת־הָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן אֶת־תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י

This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in Exodus 25:4.

Exodus 35:26

אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָשָׂ֥א לִבָּ֛⁠ן אֹתָ֖⁠נָה

Here, heart refers to a persons’ will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to use her skills for Yahweh. This is the same as the first phrase in verse 21. Alternate translation: “whose wills impelled them” (See: Synecdoche)

Exodus 35:27

Beginning with onyx, this verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:7.

Exodus 35:28

Exodus 25:6 has almost identical words, arranged slightly differently.

Exodus 35:29

The order of clauses in the ULT is reversed from the original because of required English sentence structure. In the original, The sons of Israel brought a freewill offering to Yahweh is at the end of the verse. Other languages may be able to retain the original order. (See: Information Structure)

אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָדַ֣ב לִבָּ⁠ם֮ אֹתָ⁠ם֒

Here, heart refers to a persons’ will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to bring these gifts to Yahweh. See how you translated this in 25:2 and 35:22. Alternate translation: “whose will impelled them” (See: Synecdoche)

אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶׁ֑ה

Here, by the hand of Moses refers to Moses as a messenger for Yahweh’s commands, not to Moses being the one who would build all these things. If this imagery of carrying a message would be misunderstood in your language, you may use another figure or translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “which Yahweh had told Moses to tell them to do” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 35:30

What Moses says in this verse is a quote from Exodus 31:2

בְּצַלְאֵ֛ל…אוּרִ֥י…ח֖וּר

These are men’s names. See 31:2. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 35:31

This verse is a quote from Exodus 31:3

וַ⁠יְמַלֵּ֥א אֹת֖⁠וֹ ר֣וּחַ אֱלֹהִ֑ים

Yahweh speaks of giving Bezalel his spirit as if Bezalel were a container and God’s spirit were a liquid. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And he has given his spirit to Bezalel” (See: Metaphor)

בְּ⁠חָכְמָ֛ה

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun skill in another way. Alternate translation: “so he can work skillfully” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וּ⁠בְ⁠דַ֖עַת

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun understanding in another way. Alternate translation: “and so he can understand his work” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וּ⁠בְ⁠דַ֖עַת

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun knowledge in another way. Alternate translation: “and so he knows his work well” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְלָאכָֽה

If your language does not use an abstract noun for craftsmanship, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun in another way. Alternate translation: “and for making all kinds of crafts” or “and so that he can make all kinds of things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 35:32

This verse is identical to Exodus 31:4, except for the first and.

Exodus 35:33

This verse is identical to Exodus 31:5 except for the final of invention.

Exodus 35:34

וּ⁠לְ⁠הוֹרֹ֖ת נָתַ֣ן בְּ⁠לִבּ֑⁠וֹ

Here, put in his heart is an idiom referring to ability and desire. These are spoken of as if they are something that could be placed in a heart. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And he gave to them the ability and desire to teach” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠אָֽהֳלִיאָ֥ב…אֲחִיסָמָ֖ךְ

These are names of men. See how you translated these names in Exodus 31:6. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 35:35

This verse summarizes and pulls together many previously mentioned things. See 28:3 (skill of heart), 25:4 (for materials), 26:36 (embroiderer), 28:32 (weaver), 26:31 (skillful workman), 31:3 (craftsman), 28:6 (designer of designs).

מִלֵּ֨א אֹתָ֜⁠ם חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב

Here, skill to create beautiful objects is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “He has made them very skillful” (See: Metaphor)

חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב

Here, of heart refers to possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with ability” (See: Synecdoche)

Exodus 36

Exodus 36 General Notes

Structure

\r \r * v. 1: finish Moses’ instruction\r * v. 2-7: craftsmen collect materials from Moses, inform him the people should stop bringing things because they have too much already -v. 8-38: construction of the Dwelling, verse-by-verse quotations marked below\r * v. 8-18: quote Exodus 26:1-11\r * v. 19-34: quote Exodus 26:14-29\r * v. 35-36: quote 26:31-32\r * v. 37-38: quote 26:36-37

Translation issues

• The first verse of this chapter goes with the last chapter.
• Most of this chapter exactly quotes chapter 26 with a shift from instruction to past narrative form on the verbs and a few other minor changes; some are Hebrew word order that will be invisible here. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.
• Throughout verses 8-38 the word heis used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: Generic Noun Phrases and First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 36:1

This verse is the end of a quotation from Moses that begin in 35:30. It should be connected as visually as possible to the previous verses, as the chapter break here is poorly placed.

בְצַלְאֵ֨ל וְ⁠אָהֳלִיאָ֜ב

Bezalel and Oholiab are the names of men. See how you translated this in Exodus 31:2 and 31:6 as well as in the end of chapter 35. (See: How to Translate Names)

אִ֣ישׁ

We know from 35:25 that women were included in the skilled workers, so man means every person. Alternate translation: “person” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

חֲכַם־לֵ֗ב

Here, of heart refers to innately possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with innate ability” (See: Synecdoche)

חָכְמָ֤ה

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun skill in another way. See 35:31. Alternate translation: “the ability to work skillfully” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וּ⁠תְבוּנָה֙

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun understanding in another way. See 35:31. Alternate translation: “and so he can understand his work” (See: Abstract Nouns)

מְלֶ֖אכֶת עֲבֹדַ֣ת הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ

Here, service refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase work of the service refers to building the Dwelling (Holy Place) where the Israelites would worship Yahweh. See 35:24. Alternate translation: “the building of the Holy Place for worship” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 36:2

אֶל־בְּצַלְאֵ֘ל וְ⁠אֶל־אָֽהֳלִיאָב֒ וְ⁠אֶל֙ כָּל־אִ֣ישׁ חֲכַם־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה חָכְמָ֖ה בְּ⁠לִבּ֑⁠וֹ

See how you translated this in the previous verse.

חָכְמָ֖ה

See how you translated skill in the previous verse. (See: Abstract Nouns)

כֹּ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֔⁠וֹ

See how you translated this in 35:21. (See: Metaphor)

Exodus 36:3

וַ⁠יִּקְח֞וּ

Alternate translation: “and the craftsmen took”

מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֣י

Here, before the face means with Moses. Moses had received and kept the building materials. Alternate translation: “from the custody of” (See: Metonymy)

בַּ⁠בֹּ֥קֶר בַּ⁠בֹּֽקֶר

This is an idiom meaning every morning or every day. Use a similar expression or translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “morning by morning” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 36:4

הַ֣⁠חֲכָמִ֔ים

Here the adjective skilled is used as a noun in order to describe the group of craftsmen. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the skilled workers” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

אִֽישׁ־אִ֥ישׁ

Here, every single man translates an idiom that cannot be rendered literally and sensibly in English. The original is ”a man a man.” If your language would use repetition to emphasize that each and every man came to see Moses, you can follow the original; otherwise use a phrase or structure that emphasizes that they all came. Alternate translation: “every man without exception” (See: Idiom)

אִֽישׁ־אִ֥ישׁ

As previously, noted, there were some women who contributed (particularly in the cloth crafts) so this use of man may include women. Alternate translation: “every single worker” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Exodus 36:5

וַ⁠יֹּאמְרוּ֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֣ה לֵּ⁠אמֹ֔ר מַרְבִּ֥ים הָ⁠עָ֖ם לְ⁠הָבִ֑יא מִ⁠דֵּ֤י הָֽ⁠עֲבֹדָה֙ לַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לַ⁠עֲשֹׂ֥ת אֹתָֽ⁠הּ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The craftsmen told Moses that the people were bringing much more than enough for doing the work that Yahweh has commanded them to do” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Exodus 36:6

אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֗ה אַל־יַעֲשׂוּ־ע֛וֹד מְלָאכָ֖ה לִ⁠תְרוּמַ֣ת הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that no one should bring any more contributions for the work of the Holy Place” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

וַ⁠יַּעֲבִ֨ירוּ ק֥וֹל

Here, sound refers to the message. This means they spread Moses’ message orally. Alternate translation: “everyone to share this message” (See: Metonymy)

אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֗ה אַל־יַעֲשׂוּ

Here, man and woman is intended to mean everyone, or in this case because of the negation, no one. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “No one shall make” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

מְלָאכָ֖ה

Here, work means the sorts of crafted items listed in the previous chapter.

מֵ⁠הָבִֽיא

In some languages you may need to provide an object for this sentence. Alternate translation: “from bringing contributions” (See: Ellipsis)

Exodus 36:7

וְ⁠הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֗ה

Here, work means the sorts of crafted items listed in the previous chapter.

Exodus 36:8

Except for tense and the addition of every skilled of heart among the doers of the work, this verse is identical to Exodus 26:1.

כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֜ב

See how you translated this in 35:21. (See: Synecdoche)

עָשָׂ֥ה

Throughout verses 8-38 the word he used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “they made” or “a craftsman made” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

Exodus 36:9

This verse is identical to Exodus 26:2. Tense is implied.

Exodus 36:10

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:3.

Exodus 36:11

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:4.

Exodus 36:12

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:5.

Exodus 36:13

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:6.

Exodus 36:14

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:7.

Exodus 36:15

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:8.

Exodus 36:16

This verse is almost identical to the first sentence of Exodus 26:9.

Exodus 36:17

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:10.

Exodus 36:18

This verse is similar to Exodus 26:11. The difference is the absence of the middle clause from 26:11.

Exodus 36:19

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:14.

Exodus 36:20

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:15.

Exodus 36:21

This verse is identical to Exodus 26:16.

Exodus 36:22

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:17.

Exodus 36:23

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:18.

Exodus 36:24

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:19.

Exodus 36:25

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:20.

Exodus 36:26

This verse is identical to Exodus 26:21.

Exodus 36:27

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:22.

Exodus 36:28

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:23.

Exodus 36:29

This verse is very similar to Exodus 26:24.

Exodus 36:30

This verse is very similar to Exodus 26:25.

שְׁנֵ֤י אֲדָנִים֙ שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָֽד

The list formula from 26:25 is strangely shortened here but has the same meaning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 36:31

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:26.

Exodus 36:32

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:27.

Exodus 36:33

This verse is very similar to Exodus 26:28.

Exodus 36:34

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:29.

Exodus 36:35

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:31.

Exodus 36:36

Aside from some verbal differences, this verse is very similar to Exodus 26:32.

Exodus 36:37

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 26:36.

Exodus 36:38

See how you translated many of these words in Exodus 26:37.

Exodus 37

Exodus 37 General Notes

Structure\r

\r - v. 1-9 Making the ark, see Exodus 25:10-20\r - v. 10-16 Making the table, see Exodus 25:23-29\r - v. 17-24 Making the lampstand, see Exodus 25:31-39\r - v. 25-28 Making the altar for incense, see Exodus 30:1-5\r - v. 29 Making the oil and incense, see Exodus 30:22-38

Potential translation issues

• This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.
• Throughout the chapter the word he is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: Generic Noun Phrases and First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 37:1

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:10.

Exodus 37:2

This verse is very similar to Exodus 25:11.

Exodus 37:3

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:12.

Exodus 37:4

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:13.

Exodus 37:5

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:14.

Exodus 37:6

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:17.

Exodus 37:7

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:18.

Exodus 37:8

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:19.

Exodus 37:9

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:20.

Exodus 37:10

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:23.

Exodus 37:11

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:24.

Exodus 37:12

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:25.

Exodus 37:13

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:26.

Exodus 37:14

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:27.

Exodus 37:15

This verse is very similar to Exodus 25:28.

Exodus 37:16

This verse is very similar to Exodus 25:29.

Exodus 37:17

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:31.

Exodus 37:18

This verse is identical to Exodus 25:32.

Exodus 37:19

This verse is identical to Exodus 25:33.

Exodus 37:20

This verse is identical to Exodus 25:34.

Exodus 37:21

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:35.

Exodus 37:22

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:36.

Exodus 37:23

This verse is almost identical with Exodus 25:37-38, excluding the purpose clause in v. 37 (“and it will hold up its lamps, and it will make light on the side of its face”).

Exodus 37:24

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 25:39.

Exodus 37:25

This verse is very similar to Exodus 30:1-2.

Exodus 37:26

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 30:3.

Exodus 37:27

This verse is very similar to Exodus 30:4.

Exodus 37:28

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 30:5.

Exodus 37:29

For the oil, see Exodus 30:25, and for the incense see 25:6 and 30:35.

Exodus 38

Exodus 38 General Notes

• This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-20 of this chapter follow Exodus 27:1-19 almost verse for verse.
• Throughout the chapter the word he is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: Generic Noun Phrases and First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 38:1

This verse is very similar to Exodus 27:1.

Exodus 38:2

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 27:2.

Exodus 38:3

This verse is very similar to Exodus 27:3.

Exodus 38:4

This verse is very similar to Exodus 27:4 and Exodus 27:5. One part of 27:4 is rearranged into 38:5.

Exodus 38:5

This verse is very similar to the second half of Exodus 27:4.

Exodus 38:6

This verse is very similar to Exodus 27:6.

Exodus 38:7

This verse is very similar to Exodus 27:7 and the first part of 27:8.

Exodus 38:8

וַ⁠יַּ֗עַשׂ אֵ֚ת הַ⁠כִּיּ֣וֹר נְחֹ֔שֶׁת וְ⁠אֵ֖ת כַּנּ֣⁠וֹ נְחֹ֑שֶׁת

This portion is almost identical to Exodus 30:18.

בְּ⁠מַרְאֹת֙

The bronze came from the mirrors. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the bronze mirrors” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Exodus 38:9

This verse is similar to Exodus 27:9.

Exodus 38:10

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 27:10.

Exodus 38:11

This verse is very similar to Exodus 27:11.

מֵאָ֣ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה

Here, “the curtains of the courtyard” and “long” are both omitted. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the curtains of the courtyard were 100 cubits long” (See: Ellipsis)

Exodus 38:12

This verse is very similar to Exodus 27:12.

Exodus 38:13

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 27:13.

Exodus 38:14

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 27:14.

Exodus 38:15

This verse is very similar to Exodus 27:15.

Exodus 38:17

See how you translated many of these words in Exodus 27:17.

Exodus 38:18

See how you translated many of these words in Exodus 27:16 and 18.

וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים…חָמֵ֣שׁ

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m … 2.3m (See: Biblical Distance)

וְ⁠קוֹמָ֤ה בְ⁠רֹ֨חַב֙ חָמֵ֣שׁ אַמּ֔וֹת

This probably refers to the general dimensions (20 cubits long by 5 cubits wide) but clarifies that the width would become the height of the curtain when the craftsmen or Levites set up the Dwelling. Alternate translation: “and the width, which corresponded to the height when hung, was five cubits”

Exodus 38:19

See how you translated many of these words in Exodus 27:17.

Exodus 38:20

This verse is very similar to the second half of Exodus 27:19.

Exodus 38:21

אֲשֶׁ֥ר פֻּקַּ֖ד

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which the Levites recorded” (See: Active or Passive)

עַל־פִּ֣י מֹשֶׁ֑ה

This is an idiom referring to Moses telling them to make these records. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “following Moses’ instructions” (See: Idiom)

בְּ⁠יַד֙ אִֽיתָמָ֔ר בֶּֽן־אַהֲרֹ֖ן הַ⁠כֹּהֵֽן

Here, by the hand of could mean: (1) Ithamar was in charge of the group that recorded these records (2) Ithamar was the scribe who actually wrote these records. Alternate translation: “under the direction of Ithamar son of Aaron the priest” or “written down by Ithamar son of Aaron the priest” (See: Metonymy)

אִֽיתָמָ֔ר

Ithamar is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in Exodus 6:23. (See: How to Translate Names)

Exodus 38:22

וּ⁠בְצַלְאֵ֛ל בֶּן־אוּרִ֥י בֶן־ח֖וּר

Bezalel, Uri, and Hur are the names of men. See how you translated these in Exodus 31:2. (See: How to Translate Names)

מֹשֶֽׁה

This sentence leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “Moses to do” (See: Ellipsis)

Exodus 38:23

אָהֳלִיאָ֞ב בֶּן־אֲחִיסָמָ֛ךְ

Oholiab and Ahisamakare names of men. See how you translated these in Exodus 31:6. (See: How to Translate Names)

חָרָ֣שׁ וְ⁠חֹשֵׁ֑ב וְ⁠רֹקֵ֗ם בַּ⁠תְּכֵ֨לֶת֙ וּ⁠בָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן וּ⁠בְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י וּ⁠בַ⁠שֵּֽׁשׁ

This is very similar to part of Exodus 35:35.

Exodus 38:24

כָּל־הַ⁠זָּהָ֗ב הֶֽ⁠עָשׂוּי֙

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “All the gold that the craftsmen used” (See: Active or Passive)

תֵּ֤שַׁע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֙ כִּכָּ֔ר וּ⁠שְׁבַ֨ע מֵא֧וֹת וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים שֶׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֥קֶל הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ

A talent is about 34 kilograms, and a shekel is about 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time; by the shekel of the sanctuary specified which one was to be used. See how you translated this in Exodus 30:13. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: Biblical Weight)

Exodus 38:25

מְאַ֣ת כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אֶלֶף֩ וּ⁠שְׁבַ֨ע מֵא֜וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֧ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֛ים שֶׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֥קֶל הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ

A talent is about 34 kilograms, and a shekel is about 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time, by the shekel of the sanctuary specified which one was to be used. See the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: Biblical Weight)

Exodus 38:26

See how you translated many of the same things in Exodus 30:13-14.

בֶּ֚קַע לַ⁠גֻּלְגֹּ֔לֶת מַחֲצִ֥ית הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ

A beka is 1/2 a shekel. A shekel is 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time; by the shekel of the sanctuary specified which one was to be used. See verse 24. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “five and a half grams” or “5 1/2 grams” (See: Biblical Weight)

מַחֲצִ֥ית הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל

A half means one part out of two equal parts. (See: Fractions)

לְ⁠כֹ֨ל הָ⁠עֹבֵ֜ר עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֗ים מִ⁠בֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ וָ⁠מַ֔עְלָ⁠ה לְ⁠שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת אֶ֨לֶף֙ וּ⁠שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֔ים וַ⁠חֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשִּֽׁים

Here the account leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The idea that this silver was “received” from these “men” is left out. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “received from every passer over to the counted ones from a son of 20 years and older—received from 603,550 men” (See: Ellipsis)

מִ⁠בֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙

This is an idiom meaning 20 years old. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from those 20 years old” (See: Idiom)

Exodus 38:27

מְאַת֙ כִּכַּ֣ר

A talent is about 34 kilograms. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: Biblical Weight)

Exodus 38:28

הָ⁠אֶ֜לֶף וּ⁠שְׁבַ֤ע הַ⁠מֵּאוֹת֙ וַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֔ים

Here the words shekels of silver have been omitted because they are understood from verse 25. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the 1,775 shekels of silver” (See: Ellipsis)

See how you translated some of these in Exodus 27:17.

Exodus 38:29

שִׁבְעִ֣ים כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אַלְפַּ֥יִם וְ⁠אַרְבַּע־מֵא֖וֹת שָֽׁקֶל

A talent is about 34 kilograms, and a shekel is about 11 grams. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: Biblical Weight)

Exodus 38:30

מִכְבַּ֥ר

A grate is a frame of crossed bars for holding wood when burning. See how you translated this in Exodus 27:4.

Exodus 38:31

יִתְדֹ֧ת…יִתְדֹ֥ת

These are sharp bronze stakes that were used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground. See how you translated this in Exodus 27:19.

Exodus 39

Exodus 39 General Notes

• This chapter continues the record of the construction in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. The special, holy clothing mentioned in previous chapters is produced to the correct specifications in this chapter. (See: holy, holiness, unholy, sacred) Be sure to consult your previous work to maintain consistency. Verses 1-31 of this chapter follow Exodus 28:1-37 with some differences. Verses 33-41 follow 35:10-19.
• Throughout the chapter the people making the items are referred to interchangeably as he or they. Both are generic nouns referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could change all instances to “they” or “he” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: Generic Noun Phrases and First, Second or Third Person)

Exodus 39:1

See how you translated similar instructions in Exodus 28:4-5.

בִּגְדֵ֤י הַ⁠קֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of holiness, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in 28:2. Alternate translation: “the holy clothes” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Exodus 39:2

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 28:6.

Exodus 39:4

This verse is very similar to 28:7.

Exodus 39:5

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 28:8.

Exodus 39:6

See how you translated many of these words in Exodus 28:9 and especially Exodus 28:11. Here, as there, the sons of Israel literally means the twelve sons, Rueben through Benjamin, not the Israelite nation.

Exodus 39:7

This verse is almost identical to the first half of Exodus 28:12.

Exodus 39:8

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 28:15; a few words are omitted here.

Exodus 39:9

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 28:16; a few words are added or repeated here.

Exodus 39:10

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 28:17.

Exodus 39:11

This verse is identical to Exodus 28:18.

Exodus 39:12

This verse is identical to Exodus 28:19.

Exodus 39:13

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 28:20.

Exodus 39:14

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 28:21.

Exodus 39:15

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 28:22.

Exodus 39:16

This verse is very similar to Exodus 28:23-24.

Exodus 39:17

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 28:24.

Exodus 39:18

This verse is identical to Exodus 28:25 except for verb tense.

Exodus 39:19

This verse is identical to Exodus 28:26 except for verb tense.

Exodus 39:20

This verse is identical to Exodus 28:27 except for verb tense.

Exodus 39:21

This verse is almost identical to Exodus 28:28 except for the note about Yahweh’s command.

Exodus 39:22

This verse is almost identical to most of Exodus 28:31-32.

Exodus 39:23

This verse is very similar to Exodus 28:32.

Exodus 39:24

This verse is similar to part of Exodus 28:33.

Exodus 39:25

This verse is similar to parts of Exodus 28:33.

Exodus 39:26

The first part of this verse is almost identical to the first part of Exodus 28:34.

Exodus 39:27

Verses 27-29 reflect Exodus 28:39, 40, and 42 but in a different order.

Exodus 39:28

Verses 27-29 reflect Exodus 28:39, 40, and 42 but in a different order.

Exodus 39:29

Verses 27-29 reflect Exodus 28:39, 40, and 42 but in a different order.

Exodus 39:30

This verse is almost identical Exodus 28:36. See 29:6 for the crown of holiness.

Exodus 39:31

This verse is very similar to Exodus 28:37.

Exodus 39:32

This verse marks the end of the narrative of the construction of the Dwelling. More precisely, it seems to mark the beginning of an ending section. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: End of Story)

מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד

The tabernacle and tent of meeting are the same thing. The two interchangeable terms are brought together here in a poetic doubling to bring this part of the narrative to a close. If your readers would find this confusing you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST. Alternate translation: “holy meeting tent” (See: Doublet)

וַֽ⁠יַּעֲשׂוּ֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כְּ֠⁠כֹל אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֖ה כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ

Here, thus they did parallels the whole rest of the sentence. Like the doubling of the terms for tabernacle this brings the narrative of building to an emphatic conclusion. If this sort of parallelism would convey a meaning other than this emphatic conclusion in your language you may need to use another natural way to close the narrative with emphasis on the Israelites complete obedience. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel faithfully did exactly according to all that Yahweh had commanded Moses” (See: Parallelism)

Exodus 39:33

This verse starts a short narrative of the Israelites bringing and presenting the items for the Dwelling to Moses for inspection. It is a summary of the construction and extended conclusion to the last few chapters. Your team may need to decide how to group verse 32, as it both closes the construction narrative and introduces this next section, which ends with a very similar summary statement in verses 42-43. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

This verse, especially the list of items, is very similar to 35:11.

Exodus 39:34

וְ⁠אֶת־מִכְסֵ֞ה עוֹרֹ֤ת הָֽ⁠אֵילִם֙ הַ⁠מְאָדָּמִ֔ים וְ⁠אֶת־מִכְסֵ֖ה עֹרֹ֣ת הַ⁠תְּחָשִׁ֑ים

See how you translated similar phrases to this in Exodus 26:14.

פָּרֹ֥כֶת הַ⁠מָּסָֽךְ

See how you translated similar phrases to this in 35:12.

Exodus 39:35

See how you translated similar phrases to this in 35:12.

Exodus 39:36

This verse is almost identical to 35:13.

Exodus 39:37

This verse is very similar to 35:14.

Exodus 39:38

This verse is very similar to 35:15.

Exodus 39:39

This verse is almost identical with 35:16.

Exodus 39:40

This verse is almost identical with 35:17 and parts of 35:18.

הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן לְ⁠אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד

These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in verse 32. Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: Doublet)

Exodus 39:41

This verse is identical to 35:19.

Exodus 39:42

This verse is almost identical to the second half of verse 32.

Exodus 39:43

וְ⁠הִנֵּה֙

Here, the word behold draws attention to the information that follows. Use a word or marking in your language that draws attention to the next information.

This (and really verse 42) is the end of the conclusion of the construction of materials portion of the story. The ending began in verse 32. If your language has specific features that should be part of the end of a section like this, consider using them here. (See: End of Story)

Exodus 40

Exodus 40 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• In this chapter, just as Yahweh commanded Moses is repeated seven times, as in the previous chapter, to show that Moses was obedient to every detail of Yahweh’s command.
• This chapter is repetitive both internally and with other parts of the book. Verses 17-33 parallel verses 2-8 in an expanded way.

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

• The Dwelling and tent of meeting are the same thing, but both appear next to each other many times in this chapter. The two interchangeable terms are brought together throughout this chapter in a poetic doubling to bring book to a close. If your readers would find this confusing, you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST.
• This chapter says that Moses did all these things. Just like with Bezalel in earlier chapters, it would have been impossible for him to do all this personally. The people helped him set up the Dwelling. In many translations this will more clear if you make this explicit.
• “the glory of Yahweh filled the Dwelling”: This phrase indicates that Yahweh began to dwell within the Dwelling, among Israel, in a special way. (See: glory, glorious, glorify and tabernacle)

Exodus 40:1

There is a transition to a new event at the beginning of this chapter. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Exodus 40:2

בְּ⁠יוֹם־הַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֖וֹן בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “On day one of the month, in month one” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד

These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in 39:32. Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: Doublet)

לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ

Here, the new or next year is omitted because it can be inferred from context. However, if that would be misunderstood by your readers (perhaps they would think it just meant ”next month” or something), you could add a phrase to make it clear that it is the first month of the year. This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See Exodus 12:2. Alternate translation: “month of the year” (See: Ellipsis)

Exodus 40:3

וְ⁠סַכֹּתָ֥ עַל

Alternate translation: “and you shall conceal”

Exodus 40:5

לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י

Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 40:6

לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י

Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: Metonymy)

מִשְׁכַּ֥ן אֹֽהֶל־מוֹעֵֽד

These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in 39:32. Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: Doublet)

Exodus 40:10

קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִֽׁים

Here, holiest holy means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in Exodus 29:37. Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: Possession)

Exodus 40:12

Verses 12-15 are similar to Exodus 29:4-9.

Exodus 40:16

This statement starts a new section in which Moses does all the things just as Yahweh had commanded; this poetic obedience statement was seen so often in the previous chapter. You may wish to mark this transition and poetic statement in a particular way in your language that is similar to how you did in the last chapter. See 39:32. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Exodus 40:17

הוּקַ֖ם הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן

The use of the passive here indicates that the important thing is the completion of the task of setting up the tent on the specific date Yahweh had commanded. If your language would show that focus in a different way, use a natural form to do that. Alternate translation: “that they set up the Dwelling” (See: Active or Passive)

בַּ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּ⁠שָּׁנָ֥ה הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ

This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See Exodus 12:2.

בַּ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּ⁠שָּׁנָ֥ה הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “in month one, year two, on day one of” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Exodus 40:18

וַ⁠יָּ֨קֶם מֹשֶׁ֜ה אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּ֗ן וַ⁠יִּתֵּן֙ אֶת־אֲדָנָ֔י⁠ו

Moses was the leader. It would have been impossible for him to do all this personally; the people helped him set up the Dwelling. All references to Moses from here to all the Dwelling assembly listing through verse 33 can be understood this way. Alternate translation: “And Moses directed the people to raise up the Dwelling, and they placed its bases”(See: Metonymy)

Exodus 40:20

וַ⁠יִּקַּ֞ח…וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם

In this verse and the next, there may be an exception to the word he meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the Dwelling, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 40:21

וַ⁠יָּבֵ֣א…וַ⁠יָּ֗שֶׂם

In this verse and the previous verse, there may be an exception to the word he meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the Dwelling, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Exodus 40:23

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י

Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 40:25

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י

Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 40:26

לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י

Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: Metonymy)

Exodus 40:27

See 30:7.

Exodus 40:35

וְ⁠לֹא־יָכֹ֣ל מֹשֶׁ֗ה לָ⁠בוֹא֙ אֶל־אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֔ד כִּֽי־שָׁכַ֥ן עָלָ֖י⁠ו הֶ⁠עָנָ֑ן וּ⁠כְב֣וֹד יְהוָ֔ה מָלֵ֖א אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the cloud had settled on it and the glory of Yahweh had filled the Dwelling, Moses was not able to go into the tent of meeting.”

Exodus 40:36

וּ⁠בְ⁠הֵעָל֤וֹת הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Whenever Yahweh’s cloud moved” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 40:37

וְ⁠אִם־לֹ֥א יֵעָלֶ֖ה הֶ⁠עָנָ֑ן וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִסְע֔וּ עַד־י֖וֹם הֵעָלֹתֽ⁠וֹ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but if Yahweh did not take up the cloud, then they would not set out until the day he took it up.” (See: Active or Passive)

Exodus 40:38

לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י כָל־בֵּֽית־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל

Here, before the eyes of refers to being able to see. All the Israelites could see the cloud and fire. Alternate translation: “and all the house of Israel could see it” (See: Metonymy)

בֵּֽית־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל

Here, house represents a people group, the Israelites, who were descended from Jacob, who was also named Israel. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use a metaphor from your language or translate the meaning. This is a common biblical metaphor, so you may want to check other places this occurs. The house of Israel is equivalent to “sons of Israel” or “Israelites.” (See: Metaphor)